This appendix contains comprehensive reference information for each user interface item (dialogs, panes, editors, and so on). Topics are provided in alphabetical order by user interface item.
Use this dialog to select the user who you want to "act as"; that is the user whose account you want to access. You also use this dialog to return to your own user account after "acting as" another user. This dialog is available and includes a list of users only if you have been assigned the appropriate privilege and the administrator has configured this feature, as described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
For more information, see "Acting for Other Users".
Use this option to select the ID of the user whose account you want to access. Based on the system settings, a text box might be displayed in this dialog. Generally, this text box is displayed if a long list of users is returned. In this text box, enter the ID of the user that you want to act as.
Use this button to stop accessing another user's account and to return to your own account.
Use this dialog to add an action link to an initiative or objective in a Scorecard.
For more information, see:
Use this box to select the state of the initiative or objective under which the action link is to be enabled.
Displays the action to be associated with the action link.
Use this button to select the type of action that you want to create and display the "Add New Action dialog", where you create the action.
Use this button to display the "Select Existing Action dialog", where you select an existing action.
Use this field to enter the text to display as the link to execute the associated action.
Use this dialog to add an action link to a KPI threshold range.
For more information, see:
Displays the action links that have been added to the KPI, including the text of the action links and the actions associated with the links.
Use this option to display the "New Action Link dialog", where you create a new action link.
Use this button to display the "Edit Action Link dialog", where you edit the selected action link.
Use this button to remove the selected action link.
Use this dialog to set the properties of an action links menu on a dashboard page.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the text to display for the menu.
Use this field to enter a caption to be displayed above the menu text.
Displays a list of action links associated with the action links menu.
Use this button to display the "Action Link Properties dialog", where you add an action link to the action links menu.
Use this button to display the "Action Link Properties dialog", where you edit the currently selected action link.
Use this button to delete the currently selected action link.
Use the arrows to the right of the Action Links list to reorder the list of action links and change the order of how they will be displayed in the action link menu.
Use this dialog to set the properties of an action link on a dashboard page.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the text to display as the link to execute the associated action.
This field is available only for actions links that will not be displayed on an action link menu.
Use this field to enter a caption to display above the link text.
Displays the action to be associated with the action link.
Use this button to select the type of action that you want to create and display the "New Action dialog", where you create an inline action. For more information on inline actions, see "What Are Inline Actions?"
Use this button to display the "Select Existing Action dialog", where you select a named action. For more information on named actions, see "What Are Named Actions?"
This button is available only for named actions that have parameters that are not fixed or hidden.
Use this button to display the "Edit Parameter Mapping dialog", where you edit the action parameters. For more information on action parameters, see "What Are Action Parameters?"
Displays these options for the currently selected action:
Edit Action — Use this option to display the "Edit Action dialog", where you edit an action.
Remove Action — Use this option to remove the action.
Save Action As — Use this button to display the "Save As dialog", where you save the action to the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog. If the action is an inline action, then the action is saved to the catalog rather than saved with the dashboard. If the action is a named action, then you can save the action with the same name or another name.
This box is available only for Navigate to a Web Page and Navigate to BI Content actions.
Use this box to specify, for an action link that navigates to a URL or to other BI content, whether to open the link in a new browser window or new tab (if the browser supports tabs). Select this box to open the action link in a new browser window or tab. Deselect this box to open the action link in the same browser window or tab.
This box is available only for Navigate to BI Content actions.
Use this box to specify whether the action associated with the action link can be executed in a briefing book, but only if the number of briefing book navigation links to be followed is greater than 0. (You set the number of briefing book navigation links to be followed in the "Save Briefing Book Content dialog" or in the "Page Properties dialog".)
If you select this box, then the action can be executed in a briefing book. A briefing book icon is displayed to the left of the action link on the dashboard page and in the briefing book to indicate that the action can be executed.
If you deselect this box, then the action cannot be executed in the briefing book.
See "Working with Briefing Books".
Use this box to specify one of the following options:
Always — Use this option to specify that the action link is always to be enabled.
Conditionally — Use this option to specify that the action link is to be enabled only if the associated condition is satisfied. Selecting this option displays the Condition area.
(Displayed only if the Conditionally option is selected.)
Use this area to specify the condition under which the action link is to be enabled. It includes the following components:
New Condition — Use this button to display the "New Condition dialog", where you create a new condition.
Select Condition — Use this button to display the "Select Condition dialog", where you select an existing condition.
More (>>) — Display these options:
Test Condition — Use this button to test if the condition evaluates to true or false.
Edit Condition — Use this button to display the "Edit Condition dialog", where you edit the condition.
Remove Condition — Use this button to remove the condition.
Save Condition As — Use this button to display the "Save As dialog", where you save the condition to the catalog.
Use this dialog to customize information to display to users when they execute an action.
For more information, see:
Use the "Action Options dialog: Invoke Action tab" to:
Specify whether to display a confirmation prompt to users when they execute the action
Customize the dialog that is displayed to users when they need to supply action parameter values before the action is executed
Customize the invocation successful message that is displayed to users
Customize the invocation failure message that is displayed to users
This tab is available only for Invoke a Web Service actions.
Use the "Action Options dialog: Action Results tab" to customize a dialog to display information to users about the results of the action, if the action executed successfully.
Use this tab of the "Action Options dialog" to customize a dialog to display information to users about the results of the action, if the action executed successfully.
For more information, see:
Use this option to work with HTML codes, as described in "Working with HTML Markup".
Use this field to enter the Web Service results information that you want to display to users.
Use this area to specify one or more XPath expressions to be used to extract values from the XML returned from the Invoke a Web Service action.
Note:
Before specifying any XPath expressions, you need to know what the Web Service returns. You can find out what a Web Service returns by reading the Web Services Definition Language (WSDL).To add an XPath Expression to the list, click the Add XPath Expression button. A row is added to the list, where you then specify the following information:
In the Name column, enter a unique name for the XPath expression, for example, filename. You then can use this name to embed the XPath expression as a token in the dialog text, for example, @{filename}.
In the XPath Expression column, enter the XPath expression. For example, if you know that the name of a file can be identified by the XPath expression "Body/writeToFileResponse/result", you enter Body/writeToFileResponse/result.
In the Default Value column, enter the value to display when the XPath expression is not found in the action results. If you do not enter a default value and the XPath expression is not found, then an empty string is displayed.
Note:
If multiple values for an XPath expression are found in the results, then only the first value is shown.To delete an XPath expression from the list, select the XPath expression and click the Delete XPath Expression button.
Use this box to specify the title of the dialog, for example, Action Results.
Use this field to specify the width for the dialog. Specifying a width will cause the content to wrap and a scroll bar to be displayed, if necessary.
If you do not specify the width, then the dialog will be sized based on its content.
You might want to specify a width, for example, if the dialog text contains a long sentence without any explicit line breaks, which would result in a very wide dialog.
Use this field to specify the height for the dialog. Specifying a height will cause the content to wrap and a scroll bar to be displayed, if necessary.
If you do not specify the height, the dialog will be sized based on its content.
You might want to specify a height, for example, if the dialog contains extensive text, which would result in a very long dialog.
Use this button to preview how the dialog will look. (Note that this does not run the action.)
Various dialogs and editors in which you can enter HTML codes include the Contains HTML Markup box. These dialogs and editors include the "Action Options dialog: Action Results tab", the "Edit Footer or Header dialog", the "Results tab: Narrative editor", the "Results tab: Static Text editor", and the "Text Properties dialog".
This option is available in the Action Options dialog: Action Results tab only if you have been granted the Save Actions containing embedded HTML privilege, and in the other dialogs and editors only if you have been granted the Save Content with HTML Markup privilege by the administrator.
Use this box to specify whether the text that you enter in the appropriate field contains HTML markup. (For example, in the Action Results tab, the field is labeled Dialog Text.) Check this box if the text contains HTML markup. Deselect this box if it contains only plain text. If the text contains HTML markup and you do not check this box, then the text is displayed as plain text.
You can add HTML that contains formatted text, and depending on the security settings of the servers, Active-X controls or Java scripts, sound bites, animation, a background image, and so on. The HTML code can contain anything that is supported by the browser.
Table B-1 contains usage notes and examples for several HTML elements. If you find an example in the table that is similar to what you want to do, then you can copy and paste the example, then tailor it to your needs.
Table B-1 Usage Notes and Examples for HTML Elements
| HTML Element | Usage Notes and Examples |
|---|---|
|
Text |
Any HTML tags can be used to control the format of the text. The following HTML tags are examples of some of the formatting you can apply.
|
|
Active-X object |
The Active-X object must be self-contained and supported by the browser. Paste or type the object into the HTML text window, ensuring that you include the beginning and ending tags <object...> and </object>. |
|
JavaScript and VBScript |
The script must be self-contained and supported by the browser. Paste or type the script into the HTML text window, ensuring that you include the beginning and ending tags <script> and </script>. Specify the script language in the opening <SCRIPT> tag, either <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="javascript"> or <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="vbscript">. |
|
Audio |
Ensure that you know where the audio clip is located. If the audio clip is for use in a shared environment, then it must be located on a network drive that is accessible to all users. Use the HTML tag <EMBED> to add audio in the dashboard. The following HTML code is an example: <EMBED SRC="audio" AUTOSTART="true" LOOP="true" HIDDEN="true"></EMBED> where "audio" is the location and name of the audio clip. Note: You might need to adjust the HTML for the browser. The following HTML tags are examples of the <EMBED> tag.
|
Use this tab of the "Action Options dialog" to:
Specify whether to display a confirmation prompt to users when they execute the action.
Customize the dialog that is displayed to users when they need to supply action parameter values before the action is executed.
Customize the invocation successful message that is displayed to users.
Customize the invocation failure message that is displayed to users.
For more information, see:
Use this box to specify whether to display a confirmation prompt to users when they run the action. The confirmation prompt will include the text you enter as well as a Yes button to run the action and a No button to cancel the running of the action.
Select this box to display a confirmation prompt and then enter the text of the confirmation prompt in the field to the right. Deselect this box to not display a confirmation prompt.
Use this box to customize the title of the dialog that is displayed to users when they need to supply action parameter values.
Select this box to customize the title and then enter the title in the field to the right. Deselect this box to use the default title Invoke Action.
Use this box to specify the text of the dialog that is displayed to users when they need to supply action parameter values.
Select this box to specify the text and then enter the text in the field to the right. Deselect this box to use the default text Enter the values for action parameters and execute.
To embed a URL link within the text, use the token @{URL}. The URL link will be substituted for the token.
Use this box to specify whether to display a URL link below or within the text of the dialog that is displayed to users when they need to supply action parameter values. This allows you, for example, to display a link that navigates to a URL that provides more information about the action being executed.
Select this box to display a URL link below or within the text and then enter the URL in the box to the right. If the @URL token is embedded in the text, the URL (or URL label if provided) is displayed within the text. If the token is not embedded in the text, then the URL (or URL label if provided) is displayed beneath the text.
Deselect this box to not display a URL below or within the text.
Use this field to enter the text to display for the URL link.
Use this box to customize the name of the button that is shown on the dialog that is displayed to users when they need to supply action parameter values, and that users click to execute the action once they have supplied parameter values.
Select this box to customize the name of the button and then enter the name in the box to the right. Deselect this box to use the default value Execute.
This box is not available for some action types.
Note:
For an Invoke a Web Service action, you can use the "Action Options dialog: Action Results tab" to customize a dialog to display information to users about the results of the action, if the action executed successfully.Use this box to customize the message that is displayed to users when the action is successfully executed.
Select this box to customize the message and then enter the message in the field to the right. Deselect this box to use the default message Action invocation was successful.
This box is not available for some action types.
Use this box to customize the message that is displayed to users when the action is not successfully executed.
Select this box to customize the message and then enter the message in the field to the right. Deselect this box to use the default message Action invocation was unsuccessful.
Use this dialog to select the users, application roles, and Catalog groups to:
Receive the delivery content of an agent.
Have permission to access a section or alert section in a dashboard.
Have permission to use a saved customization.
Add or edit for an existing Catalog group.
Assign permissions to a catalog object.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Available only when working with Catalog groups. Enter the name that you want to use for this group.
Available only when you are working with catalog object permissions. Displays the catalog location of the object with which you are working.
Use this area to:
Initiate a search in the Search area.
Select accounts to move to the Selected Members area.
Click to see effective permissions
Available only when you are working with catalog object permissions. Use this button to add the Permissions column to the Available Members list. This column displays the permissions that the corresponding application role, Catalog group, or user would have if you add them to the object for which you are assigning permissions. The effective permissions that display in the table are determined by the membership that the application role, Catalog group, or user has in the other roles, groups, and users already added to the Permissions dialog. For example, suppose that you have a catalog object called Report1 and you grant the BIAdministrator application role the Full Control permission. Then you access the Add Application Roles, Catalog Groups, and User dialog to search for and add User A to the object's permission list. Since User A belongs to the BIAdministrator role, the effective permissions that displays for User A is Full Control.
Use this button to show and hide the Search area within the Available Members area.
Use this area to search for users, application roles, and Catalog groups.
To initiate a search, enter the string for which you want to search in the Name field; select either Application Roles, Catalog Groups, Users, or All and click the Search button. The results are displayed in the Available Members list.
Use these buttons move accounts between the available and selected areas.
Use this area to view the accounts that you have selected from the Available Members area and moved to the Selected Members area.
Available only when you are working with catalog object permissions. Use this box to select the permission for the accounts that are listed in the Selected Members area. For more information about the options in this list, see "Permission Definitions" and "Permissions Available by Object Type".
Use this dialog to select the attribute or hierarchical column that you want to use as a dimension for the KPI.
Displays the subject area's attribute and hierarchical columns that you can use as dimensions for the KPI. Use this list to select a column.
Use this dialog to add new comments to or reply to existing comments attached to initiatives, objectives, and KPIs. (Remember that a comment is associated with a specific point of view.)
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this box to enter the subject of the comment.
Use this box to enter your comment.
This area is not available when the New Comment dialog is displayed from the "Collaboration pane".
Displays any comments that previously have been added to the initiative, objective, or KPI for the current point of view.
To expand or collapse the History area, click the Expand All or Collapse All button.
Ensure that you save objectives, initiatives, and KPIs after adding new comments to or replying to existing comments attached to them.
Use this dialog to specify the name and description of the page that you are adding to a dashboard.
For more information, see "Adding New Pages to Dashboards".
Use this field to enter a name for the page.
Use this field to enter a description for the page.
Use this dialog to provide a label for a KPI usage or to pin (or set) the value of one or more KPI dimensions.
Pinning is optional. Typically, it is best not to pin most of the dimensions so that the data will be controlled by the point of view settings.
You pin values of KPI dimensions, for example, when you add a KPI to one of the following tables:
Initiatives & KPIs table in the "Analytics pane" of the "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab"
Objectives & KPIs table in the in the "Analytics pane" of the "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab"
New KPI Watchlist table in the "KPI Watchlist editor: Performance tab"
When you view the KPI, the data displayed is determined by the dimension values that you selected.
This dialog also displays as:
Displays the name of the saved KPI that you are adding (for example, Revenue KPI).
Displays the name of the subject area that contains the KPI dimension or dimensions.
This box is not available for a dimension whose value has been set in the KPI.
Use this box to specify a dimension value. Consider the following options:
For all dimensions, you can select a column value or roll up value (for example, for the Dimensions.Geog dimension, you can drill and select North American, or drill further and select Los Angeles).
Select Point-of-View to set no dimension value. If you use this option, at runtime a dimension field displays in the point of view area where the user can select a dimension value.
For measures column, you can select Use Variable to set the dimension's value with either a session or repository variable. When you select this option, the "Select Variable dialog" displays. For more information about variables, see "Using Variables".
Use this field to enter a user-friendly, descriptive KPI name to display in the watchlist or the Objectives & KPIs table.
Tip:
If you select a specific value for a dimension, rather than the Use Point-of-View option, then enter a label that describes the pinning. For example, if you select Central for the Region dimension, you might enter Sales Central Region.Use this dialog to add links to business intelligence objects and documents that are stored in the Presentation Services Catalog or web pages that provide additional information about or can be used in conjunction with the KPI.
Use this field to enter the name of the link that will display in the related documents table. The user clicks this link to access the corresponding Web site, document, or business intelligence object.
Use this list to indicate how you want to provide the path to the related document.
Select Catalog and click the Browse button to navigate to the document or business intelligence object in the catalog.
Select Link and enter or paste the URL of the online document or business intelligence object.
This field displays if you select Catalog in the Type field.
Displays the location of the business intelligence object that you select from the catalog. To provide a location in this field, click the Browse button to access the "Select an Object from the BI Catalog dialog" and select a catalog object.
This option is available if you select Catalog in the Type field. Use this button to access the "Select an Object from the BI Catalog dialog" to browse the Presentation Services catalog and choose an object.
This field displays if you select Link in the Type field.
Use to enter or paste the URL of the related object.
Use this dialog to add or remove related subject areas from which to select columns.
For more information, see:
Displays the primary subject area and any related subject areas that you have permission to access. The primary subject area (which you select when you create a new analysis, a new named filter, or a new dashboard prompt) is always listed first.
A check mark beside a subject area identifies a related subject area that has already been added. A grayed-out check mark identifies the primary subject area or a related subject area whose data is currently being used in the analysis, named filter, or column prompt. You cannot remove a primary subject area. You can remove a related subject area only if its data is not currently being used.
Use this list to add or remove related subject areas. Check a related subject area to add it. Uncheck a subject area to remove it.
Use this page to administer Oracle BI Presentation Services. You perform administration tasks such as managing privileges and metadata for maps.
The functions of the Administration page are described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this collapsible section to see the following information about your installation of Oracle BI EE:
Product Version — Specifies the version number for Oracle BI EE.
Catalog Path — Specifies the complete directory name for the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog.
Oracle BI Server Data Source — Specifies the name of the data source that is specified in the Oracle BI Server.
Available Paging Memory (MB) — Specifies the amount of physical memory that is available plus any paging memory that is available. If this value is very low, then Oracle BI Presentation Services might run out of memory. Available for Windows systems only.
Available Virtual Address Space (MB) — Specifies the amount of virtual address space remaining to process. If this value is very low, then Oracle BI Presentation Services might run out of memory. Available for Windows systems only.
Replication — Indicates whether replication of the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog is enabled or disabled.
Maintenance Mode — Indicates whether Maintenance mode is turned on or off. You modify this setting using the Toggle Maintenance Mode link on this page. In maintenance mode, the catalog is read-only; no one can write to it.
Use this link to display the "Administration: Manage Catalog Groups page" in which you manage catalog groups.
Use this link to display the "Administration: Manage Privileges page" in which you view and administer privileges that are associated with various components. Privileges are actions that users have the right to perform.
Use this link to display the "Administration: Manage Sessions page" in which you view information about active sessions and about the cache for each analysis.
Use this link to display the "Administration: Manage Agent Sessions page" in which you view information about currently active agent sessions that are triggered by Oracle BI Scheduler.
Use this link to display the "Administration: Manage Device Types page" in which you create, edit, view or delete device types for use with agents.
Use this link to turn maintenance mode on or off. You can see the setting of the mode in the Product Information area. When Maintenance Mode is on, users cannot write to the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog.
Use this link to reload XML message files, refresh metadata from the Oracle BI Server, and clear caches.
Use this link to display the "Administration: Issue SQL page" in which you enter a SQL statement to run against the Oracle BI Server.
Use this link to display the "Administration: Manage Map Data page" in which you manage layers, background maps, and images.
Use this link to display the Marketing Job Management page in which you manage background jobs and the database cache.
Use this link to display the Manage Marketing Defaults and Contact Planning Rules pages, in which you select the default Campaign Load File Format, the default Global Audience segment and the Profile Dashboard for each Target Level.
Use this link to display the Administration page for BI Publisher where you can manage BI Publisher users, permissions, jobs, and files and folders.
For information, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Administrator's and Developer's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher.
Use this page to enter a SQL statement to send directly to the Oracle BI Server. This feature is useful for testing the server only. Results are not formatted, and it is not possible to save the SQL statement that you issue here as an analysis.
For more information, see Appendix A, "Logical SQL Reference".
Use this field to enter a SQL statement to send directly to the Oracle BI Server.
Click this button to send the SQL statement to the Oracle BI Server.
Use this box to select the Oracle BI Server logging level, from 0 through 7. Each user receives a default logging level during user creation in the BI Server Administration tool. Select Default in this box to specify the use of your default level.
For information on logging levels, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use Oracle BI Presentation Services Cache
Use this box to specify whether to use the Oracle BI Presentation Services Cache. Clear this box to specify that you do not want the query to use the Presentation Services cache. In general, you should avoid clearing this box as disabling the cache has potential performance degradation issues.
Use this page to view information about currently active agent sessions that are triggered by Oracle BI Scheduler.
For more information, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Displays a table with information about each agent session. You can see details such as the job identifier, the instance identifier, the primary agent, and the day and time at which the agent session was last accessed.
Click the Sort button at the top of various columns to sort the sessions. Click the link in the Primary Agent column to display the agent in the "Agent editor".
Click the Expand button to see the list of agents in that session.
Displays a table with information about each agent. You can see details such as the path for the agent and its state. The state can be either Created, Populated, or Conditional Request Resolved.
Click the link in the Path column to display the agent in the "Agent editor". Click the Expand button to see the list of recipients for that agent.
Displays a table with the name and type of each recipient of the agent.
Use this page to manage Catalog groups. These groups are for backward compatibility with previous releases only.
For more information, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this button to display the "Add Groups dialog", in which you create a new group.
After selecting a group in the list, use this button to display the "Edit Groups dialog", in which you edit an existing group.
After selecting one or more groups in the list, use this button to delete the groups.
Enter the name of a group that you need and click Search to display a list of groups that match that name. You generally need to use this field only when you have a very long list of groups and are having difficulty finding the one that you need.
Click this button to display either a list of additional groups or a message box that states that no other groups are available. Groups are displayed in lists of 25.
Use this page to create, edit, view or delete device types for use with agents. The types that are specified on this page can be selected on the "Create Device dialog" from the "My Account dialog: Delivery Options tab".
For more information, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Displays the names of device types that are already created.
Displays the category of the device type, such as mobile phone, pager, or handheld device.
Click this link to display the "Create New Device Type dialog".
Click this button to display the "Edit Device Type dialog".
Click this button to begin the process of deleting the device type. A confirmation dialog is displayed in which you verify the deletion of the device type.
Use this page to administer maps and data, so that users can create map views. You perform administration tasks such as managing layers and background maps. Click OK when you have finished updating the page, to save your changes.
The functions of the Administration page are described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this tab to work with the layers for display on a map.
Use this tab to work with the main maps for use with map views.
Use this tab to specify the images for use with map views. You must specify images only if you want content designers to include them as part of formats on the map.
Use the import buttons on each tab to display a dialog in which you can import layers, background maps, or images to the tab.
Use the edit or delete button on each tab, after importing a layer, background map, or image to either display a dialog in which you can edit the item or delete it from the tab.
Use the sort buttons beside Name and Location on each tab to sort the layers, maps, or images.
Use this page to view and administer privileges that are associated with various components. Privileges control the rights that users have to access the features and functionality of Oracle BI Presentation Services.
The functions of the Administration page are described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this table to:
View privileges. The privileges are organized by categories (such as Access, Catalog, and so on). Users, roles, and Catalog groups who have explicit access to a privilege are identified to the right of each privilege.
Administer a privilege by clicking the link for the users, roles, and groups who have explicit access to the privilege. Clicking the link displays the "Privilege dialog", where you can change the users, roles, and Catalog groups who are granted that privilege.
Use this page to view information about active sessions and about the cache for each analysis.
The functions of the Administration page are described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Displays the total number of active sessions. Also displays a table that includes the following information about sessions that have been created for users who have logged in:
| Field | Description |
|---|---|
| User ID | The name that the user entered when logging in. |
| Host Address | The name or IP address of the computer that initiated the HTTP connection to the Web server. This could be a user's PC, a handheld device, a firewall, and so on. |
| Session ID | A unique identifier assigned by Presentation Services for each client session. |
| Browser Info | Information about the browser from which the user logged on. |
| Logged On | The time stamp on which the user logged on. |
| Last Access | The time stamp of the last activity for this user on Presentation Services. This can be any kind of activity on the system, such as switching from one dashboard page to another. |
Displays a table that includes the following information about each analysis:
| Field | Description |
|---|---|
| ID | The unique internal cache identifier for this entry. |
| User | The name of the user who ran the analysis and last placed it into the cache. If two IDs are shown, then the second ID is impersonating the first. For example, the entry lhurley/administrator means that the Administrator account logged on and impersonated lhurley. This can happen when Oracle BI Scheduler starts an agent on someone's behalf. Oracle BI Scheduler logs on and impersonates that user so security and content filters still apply. |
| Refs | The number of references to this entry since it was placed into the cache. |
| Status | The status of the analysis that is using this cache entry:
|
| Time | The time taken to process and run the analysis, displayed in one-second increments. A value of 0s (zero seconds) indicates that the analysis took under 1 second to complete. |
| Action | The following links that you can click to affect the analysis:
|
| Last Accessed | The time stamp of the last time the cache entry for this analysis was used to satisfy an analysis. |
| Statement | The SQL statement that was issued for the analysis; or if the analysis resulted in an error, information about the nature of the error. |
| Information | Usage tracking information (for example, what analysis contained the query). |
| Records | The number of records in the result set that have been seen (for example, 50+ to indicate that 50 records have been seen but there are additional records to be fetched or 75 to indicate that 75 records have been seen and there are no more records to be fetched). |
Use this button to cancel all requests that are running for analyses.
Use this button to close all cursors, which removes all information in the Cursor Cache table.
Use the arrow button beside each column heading to sort the table by that value.
Use this dialog to edit the SQL code that is generated for a column filter.
For more information, see "Creating and Editing the SQL Statements for a Column Filter in an Analysis".
Use this field to modify the SQL WHERE clause to be used as a filter.
For descriptions of SQL clauses, see Appendix A, "Logical SQL Reference".
Use this dialog to specify additional options for a scrolling ticker.
For more information, see
Use this field to enter the number of times that the results will scroll. The default is an infinite number of times.
You must specify a whole number.
Use this field to enter the number of pixels between successive redraws of the results.
Use this field to enter the number of milliseconds between successive redraws of the results.
Use this field to enter the color to use for the background. Depending on what the browser supports, you can enter a color name, such as yellow or blue, or use the 6-digit hexadecimal format, such as #AFEEEE for pale turquoise. (You can omit the number sign character from the hexadecimal format.)
Use this field to enter other marquee options that the browser might support, such as ALIGN="top | middle | bottom" to align the ticker to the top, middle or bottom of the text around it. You can also add HTML to further customize the look of the ticker.
Use this editor to create or edit an agent.
For more information, see:
Displays a summary of the current settings for the agent. Use the Plus and Minus buttons to expand and collapse this summary.
Use the "Agent editor: General tab" to specify the priority of the content that the agent is to deliver and how to send the delivery content
Use the "Agent editor: Schedule tab" to specify whether the agent is to be run based on a schedule, how often it runs, and when its running is to start and end.
Use the "Agent editor: Condition tab" to specify whether the agent always delivers its content and executes its actions, or conditionally delivers its content and executes its actions.
For more information about conditions, see Chapter 9, "Working with Conditions."
Use the "Agent editor: Delivery Content tab" to specify the content to deliver with the agent, such as a dashboard page or a saved analysis.
Use the "Agent editor: Recipients tab" to specify who is to receive the delivery content of the agent and who is allowed to subscribe to the agent.
Use the "Agent editor: Destinations tab" to specify where the content is to be delivered.
Use the "Agent editor: Actions tab" to specify one or more actions to execute when the agent finishes.
For more information about actions, see Chapter 10, "Working with Actions."
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save this Agent — Use this button to save the agent.
Save this Agent as — Use this button to save a copy of the agent by another name.
Delete this Agent from the Catalog — Use this button to delete the agent.
Discard changes made to this page — Use this button to discard any changes you have made on the current tab.
Run Agent Now — Use this button to run the agent.This is helpful, for example, if you want to test the agent.
Use this tab of the "Agent editor" to specify one or more actions to execute when an agent finishes.
You can specify actions to execute under the following circumstances:
Only if the agent condition evaluates to true or if there is no condition associated with the agent
Only if the agent condition evaluates to false
For more information, see:
Agent Condition True or No Condition Exists
Use this area to specify one or more actions to execute only if the agent condition evaluates to true or if there is no condition associated with the agent.
This area is enabled only when a condition has been specified for the agent. See "Agent editor: Condition tab".
Use this area to specify one or more actions to execute only if the agent condition evaluates to false.
This box is enabled only when a condition has been specified for the agent. It is not available for Invoke Server Script actions, Invoke Agent actions, or actions for which one of the parameters is a result set mapping.
Use this box to specify whether to execute the action for each row returned by the condition. Select this box to execute the action for each row. Deselect this box to execute the action only once, regardless of the number of rows returned.
Use this button to display the "Create New Action dialog", where you create a new action.
Use this button to display the "Select Existing Action dialog", where you select an existing action.
Use this button to display the "Edit Action dialog", where you edit the selected action. For inline actions, you can edit the action definition. For named actions, you can edit only parameter values.
Use this button to delete an action.
Use this tab of the "Agent editor" to specify whether an agent always delivers its content and executes its actions, or conditionally delivers its content and executes its actions.
To determine whether the agent delivers its content and executes its actions, you use a condition. (For more information on conditions, see Chapter 9, "Working with Conditions.")
For more information, see:
Use this box to select one of the following options:
Do Not use a Condition (always deliver content and run actions) — Use this option to specify that the agent is always to deliver its content and execute its actions.
Use a Condition — Use this option to specify that the agent is to conditionally deliver its content and execute its actions.
Use this button to display the "Create Condition dialog", where you create an inline condition.
Use this button to display the "Select Condition dialog", where you select a named condition.
This button is available only if you created an inline condition.
Use this button to display the "Edit Condition dialog", where you edit an inline condition. (You cannot edit named conditions.)
This button is available only if you selected a named condition that is based on an analysis that includes one or more prompted filters.
Use this button to display the "Customize Condition dialog", where you can customize the condition.
Use this button to test whether the condition evaluates to true or false.
This button is available only if you created an inline condition.
Displays the "Save As dialog", where you save the condition to the catalog as a named condition.
Use this tab of the "Agent editor" to specify the content to deliver with the agent, such as a dashboard page or a saved analysis. You can also specify:
The delivery format for the content, such as HTML, PDF, XLS, CSV, or text
A subject line to include with the content
A text message to provide context for an agent attachment
A narrative text description of the conditional analysis (but only when you specify that the conditional analysis is also the delivery content)
An explanation to deliver when an agent is to be delivered conditionally and the condition evaluates to false
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the subject line for the agent.
Use this box to select the type of content to deliver:
Analysis — Use this option to deliver saved analyses (shared and private).
Dashboard Page — Use this option to deliver dashboard pages from My Dashboard or dashboard pages from public (shared) dashboards.
Briefing Book — Use this option to deliver a briefing book.
Condition Analysis — This option is available only if you have specified a condition on the Conditions tab. Use this option to deliver the results of the analysis on which the condition is based.
Note:
If you attempt to clear the content or select different delivery content, and you have selected the option to show only relevant rows to each user on the "Agent editor: Recipients tab", then a message is displayed. The message alerts you that the option to show relevant rows will be reset if you proceed with clearing the content or selecting different delivery content. Click Yes to proceed, or No to retain the current delivery content choice. If you click Yes, then the recipients will still be determined from the conditional analysis, but users will receive all content, and not only the content that pertains to them.Use this button to display the "Choose Delivery Content dialog", where you select the content.
(This button is not available if you have specified Condition Analysis as the delivery content. Instead, the customizations specified on the Conditions tab will be used.)
Use this button to display the "Customize Delivery Content dialog", where you customize the content to be delivered.
Use this button to remove content previously selected.
Use this box to select the format in which to deliver the content. The format options depend upon the type of delivery content. The format options are:
(Device default) — Uses the device default to determine the content format.
HTML — Sends delivery content as HTML.
Plain Text — Sends delivery content in plain text format.
CSV data — Sends delivery content as a Comma Separated Value (CSV) attachment.
Excel 2003+ — Sends delivery content as an XLS attachment.
PowerPoint — Sends delivery content as a PPT attachment.
PDF — Sends delivery content as a PDF attachment.
Narrative Text — (This option is available only if you have specified the Condition Analysis as the delivery content.) Sends a narrative description of the the results of the analysis on which the condition is based. If you select this option, a box is displayed in which you enter the narrative description to send. To include column n from the results in your text, use @n.)
Use this area to select whether to deliver the content directly or as an attachment:
Deliver Results Directly — This option is available only for these format options: (Device default), HTML (with the exception of dashboard pages), Plain Text, and Narrative Text. Use this option to deliver the content directly.
Deliver as Attachment — Use this option to deliver the content as an attachment.
If CSV data, Excel, or PDF is selected in the Format box, then this option is automatically selected.
If you select the Deliver as Attachment option, in the Attachment Note field, then enter a text message to provide context for the agent attachment.
Use this field to enter a text message to provide context for the agent attachment.
Use this area to specify whether to deliver a text message to recipients when there is no agent content to deliver to them. To deliver a text message, select Deliver this Message and then enter the text message to be delivered.
You can reference variables in the Subject, Attachment Note, and If Condition is False Deliver this Message fields. For the syntax to use, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
To use the @ character, precede it with the \ (backslash) character to separate it from the variable syntax. For example, Dear @{NQ_SESSION.DISPLAYNAME}, \@ New York, is displayed as Dear Joe Smith, @ New York.
Use this tab of the "Agent editor" to specify where content is to be delivered.
For more information, see:
Use this box to specify whether content is to be delivered to the Home page and dashboard pages.
Use this option to specify whether content is to be delivered to specified devices. If you select this option, then you must select one of the following options:
Active Delivery Profile — Use this option to specify that content is to be delivered to the devices specified in the active delivery profile.
The active delivery profile is configured through the "My Account dialog: Delivery Options tab".
Specific Devices — Use this option to specify that content is to be delivered to specific devices and then select one or more of the following device options:
Pager
Digital Phone
Handheld Device
If you select a specific device here, then the default device selected in the My Account dialog: Delivery Options tab overrides the devices that are set in the active delivery profile for a user. Devices that are specified here are used instead of the devices specified in the active delivery profile. An agent, for example, need not be dependent upon a user's configuration. The agent can be configured to use device information from default devices in the Devices area in the My Account dialog: Delivery Options tab.
For more information about active delivery profiles and devices, see "Configuring Your Devices and Delivery Profiles".
Oracle BI Server Cache (For seeding cache)
This option is available only for administrators who have been granted the Manage Catalog Groups privilege.
Use this option to specify whether to seed the cache.
Administrators can create Server cache for individual users. The cache seeding operation allows administrators to run analyses on dashboard pages or analyses that are stored in the catalog, and to create a Server cache. This speeds up response time for users when they actually run the analyses on the dashboards. If data already exists in the cache for a given analysis, then the data is deleted and refreshed when the agent runs.
The cache for the analysis or the dashboard page is created at the appropriate schedule for the indicated set of users.
Note:
To have the cache created for each user, select the Run As Recipient or Specified User box in the General tab.Generally, if you are using the analysis that you have specified as the content for this agent to seed the cache, you will not select any other user destinations (such as Email).
Use this tab of the "Agent editor" to specify the priority of the delivery content that an agent is to deliver and how to generate the delivery content.
For more information, see:
Use this option to specify the priority of the delivery content — High, Normal, Low. The priority works with the delivery profile for a user to determine the destination for delivery content of different priorities.
For more information on delivery profiles, see "What Are Devices and Delivery Profiles?" and "Configuring Your Devices and Delivery Profiles".
Use this option to specify how to generate the delivery content (that is, what user to run the query as):
Recipient — Select this option to use the credentials of each recipient.
Specified User — This option is available only to the administrator. Select this option to use the credentials of a specified user. All recipients receive the same content as if they were the specified user. Then specify the user by typing the user's name in the box to the right of the option or by clicking the Set User button to display the "Select Business Owner dialog", where you can select a user.
Use Agent Owner's Credentials — This option is not available to administrators. Select this option to use the credentials of the agent owner. All recipients receive the same content as if they were the agent owner.
This information is displayed once the agent has been saved.
Displays the name of the person who created the agent.
This information is displayed once the agent has been saved.
Displays the date and time when the agent was last modified.
This information is displayed once the agent has been saved.
Displays the description of the agent that was provided when the agent was saved.
You can edit the description of the agent by navigating to the agent on the "Catalog page" and using the Properties option on the More menu.
Use this tab of the "Agent editor" to specify who is to receive the delivery content of the agent and who is allowed to subscribe to the agent.
For more information, see:
Use this area to view and specify who is to receive the delivery content of the agent.
To:
Add users, application roles, and catalog groups, click the Add Recipient button to display the "Select User dialog", where you select the users, application roles, and catalog groups.
Add e-mail recipients, click the Add Email Recipient button to display the "Enter Email Address dialog", where you enter their e-mail addresses.
Delete a selected recipient, select the recipient in the list and then click the Delete button.
Show only a particular set of selected recipients, use the Show box to select one of the following options: All, Users, Emails, Catalog Groups & Application Roles.
Note:
When a user subscribes to and customizes an agent, if you then select the same user as a recipient, the user's customizations will be lost when the agent is next run.Get Recipients from the Request Used in the Agent Condition
This box is enabled only if you have specified a condition that is based on an analysis for the agent. In addition, you must include the recipient information in the conditional result set (that is, you must include a column that contains who the recipient should be for each row).
Use this box to specify whether recipients are to be determined dynamically from the results of a conditional analysis. Select this box to have recipients determined dynamically from the results of a conditional analysis. Clear this box to have the recipients determined from the Select Recipients area.
Note:
If you select the option to allow the recipients to be determined from the results of a conditional analysis and choose to show only relevant rows to each user, then it is assumed that you want the results of the conditional analysis set as the delivery content in the "Agent editor: Delivery Content tab". If the content has been set to something else (through clicking Clear or Browse), then a message is displayed asking if you want to update the delivery content to be the results of the conditional analysis. Click Yes to proceed and update the delivery content, or No to retain the current delivery content. If you click No, then the recipients will still be determined from the conditional analysis, but users will receive all content, and not only the content that pertains to them.This box is available only if the Get Recipients from the Request Used in the Agent Condition box is selected.
Use this box to select the column in the conditional analysis that contains the desired recipients.
2nd Column Containing Recipients (optional)
This box is available only if the Get Recipients from the Request Used in the Agent Condition box is selected.
Use this box to optionally select an additional column in the conditional analysis that contains desired recipients.
Only Return Rows Relevant to the User Running the Agent
This box is available only if the Get Recipients from the Request Used in the Agent Condition box is selected.
Use this box to specify whether only rows in the results that are relevant to the user running the agent are sent in the delivery content. Select this box to send only rows that are relevant to the user running the agent. Deselect this box to send all rows.
Use this box to specify whether the agent is to be published so that users can subscribe. Note the following:
When you deselect the Publish Agent for subscription box, any selected subscribers are disabled, and the Allow Subscribers to Customize Agent box is cleared and disabled.
You can only publish agents that have content and actions (if any) that can be shared.
For more information on how to subscribe to agents, see "Subscribing to Agents".
Allow Subscribers to Customize Agent
This box is available only when the Recipient box is selected on the "Agent editor: General tab".
Use this box to specify whether subscribers can customize their subscription of the agent, for example, by providing values for a prompted filter associated with an analysis.
For more information on how to customize an agent subscription, see "Customizing Your Agent Subscriptions".
Use this area to view and specify who is allowed to subscribe to this agent. In the list of agent subscribers, the Name column identifies the users, application roles, and catalog groups that are allowed to subscribe to the agent and the Currently Subscribed column identifies (with a check mark) those users, application roles, and catalog groups that are currently subscribed.
To:
Add users, application roles, and catalog groups that are allowed to subscribe to this agent, click the Add Subscriber button to display the "Select User dialog", where you select the users, application roles, and catalog groups.
Delete a user, application role, or catalog group from the list of users, application roles, and catalog groups who are allowed to subscribe to the agent, select the user, application role, or catalog group in the list and then click the Delete button.
To unsubscribe a user, application role, or catalog group that is currently subscribed to the agent, select the user, application role, or catalog group in the list and then click Unsubscribe.
Note:
The Unsubscribe button is available only to administrators and users who have been granted the privilege Modify Current Subscriptions for Agents.Show only a particular set of users and groups who are allowed to subscribe to this agent, use the Show boxes. In the first box select the All, Users, or Catalog Groups & Application Roles, and in the second box select All, Unsubscribed, or Subscribed. To show:
All subscribed and unsubscribed users, application roles, and catalog groups, select All and All
All unsubscribed users, application roles, and catalog groups, select All and Unsubscribed
All subscribed users, application roles, and catalog groups, select All and Subscribed
All subscribed and unsubscribed users, select Users and All
Only unsubscribed users, select Users and Unsubscribed
Only subscribed users, select Users and Subscribed
All subscribed and unsubscribed catalog groups and application roles, select Catalog Groups & Application Roles and All
Only unsubscribed catalog groups and application roles, select Catalog Groups & Application Roles and Unsubscribed
Only subscribed catalog groups and application roles, select Catalog Groups & Application Roles and Subscribed
Use this tab of the "Agent editor" to specify whether the agent is to be run based on a schedule, how often it runs, and when its running is to start and end.
Agents can execute based on a specified schedule. You can define a starting date and time for the agent, a recurrence schedule, and an ending date.
You can also create a nonscheduled agent. This is useful when you want to create an agent that runs only as part of an agent chain, or an agent that is initiated by an external process.
For more information, see:
This box is disabled when the Frequency box is set to Never.
Use this box to specify whether to enable the agent to run as scheduled. This is useful if you have defined a schedule for an agent but find you want to stop it for a certain period of time.
You also can enable and disable an agent's schedule from the "Catalog page". See "Disabling and Enabling Agents' Schedules".
Use this box to select one of the following options to specify how often the agent runs:
Never — Creates a nonscheduled agent.
Once — Runs the agent one time only.
Daily — Runs the agent on a daily schedule. If you select this option, then the following additional option is displayed:
Days — Use this box to specify the daily interval, such as every 3 days.
Weekly — Runs the agent on a weekly schedule. If you select this option, then the following additional options are displayed:
Weeks —Use this box to specify the weekly interval, such as every 6 weeks
On — Use this option to specify the days of the week, such as Monday and Friday
Monthly — Runs the agent on a monthly schedule. If you select this option, then the following additional options are displayed:
On — Use this option to specify either the day occurrence (such as the first Tuesday or the first day of the month) or the day of the month.
Months —Use this box to specify the months, such as March, June, September, December.
Use this box to specify the date and time to start the agent and the time zone. Click the Select Date and Time button to display the Select Date and Time dialog, where you select the date, time, and time zone.
Use this box to specify whether to run the agent multiple times within a day. Select this box to run it multiple times within a day. Then enter the interval between executions (in minutes) and specify the time to stop the repetition by clicking the Select Time button to display a dialog in which to select the time.
Deselect this box to run it one time within the day.
Use this area to specify when to end the running of the agent:
No End Date — Use this option to specify that the agent is to be run indefinitely.
Select End Date — Use this option to specify an end date. Click the Select Date button to display the Select Date dialog, where you specify the date on which to end the running of the agent.
When you select the date and time, for time zones where daylight savings applies, the time zone reflects the daylight savings time. For example, if, during the summer months, you select (GMT) Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London, this means BST (British Summer Time).
Use this dialog to:
View information about an alert
View the content of an alert
Clear an alert
Edit the agent that generated an alert, if you have permission to modify the agent
Run the agent that generated an alert, if you have permission to execute the agent
For more information, see:
Displays the following information:
Priority — Identifies the priority (High, Normal, or Low) of the alert.
Delivered — Identifies the last delivery date and time of the alert.
Recurrence — Identifies the number of occurrences of the alert.
Source Agent — Identifies the name of the agent that generated the alert and includes the following buttons:
Edit Agent — (This button is available only if you have permission to modify the agent.) Use this button to display the agent that generated the alert in the "Agent editor", where you can edit the agent.
Run Agent — (This button is available only if you have permission to execute the agent.) Use this button to run the agent that generated the alert.
Displays the content of the alert.
Use this button to delete the alert.
Use this dialog to:
View a list of your alerts
View the content for an alert
Clear an alert
Edit the agent that generated the alert, if you have permission to modify the agent
Run the agent that generated the alert, if you have permission to execute the agent
Subscribe to an RSS feed for alerts
Clear all of your alerts
For more information, see:
Displays a list of your alerts, including the name, priority (High, Normal, or Low), last delivery date and time, and number of occurrences for each alert.
To view the latest occurrence of an alert, click its name. The "Alert dialog" is displayed, where you can view information about the alert as well as the content of the alert. You can also edit and run the agent that generated the alert.
Each alert contains a toolbar that displays when you hover over the alert name. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Edit Agent — (This button is available only if you have permission to modify the agent.) Displays the agent that generated the alert in the "Agent editor", where you can edit the agent.
Run Agent — (This button is available only if you have permission to execute the agent.) Use this button to run the agent that generated the alert.
Clear alert/Clear all recurrences of this alert — Use this button to delete the alert, or if the alert has recurrences, delete all recurrences of the alert.
Displays the browser's page that lets you subscribe to an RSS feed. Using this page, you can subscribe to an Oracle BI Alerts feed (that is, the channel that contains the delivered agents).
Use this button to delete all alerts. When you clear all alerts, the Alerts! button in the global header and the Alerts area on the "Home page" are no longer displayed.
Use this button to refresh the list of alerts.
Use this editor to create or edit an analysis. Analyses let you explore and interact with information by visually presenting data in tables, graphs, pivot tables, and so on. You can include the views that you create in an analysis for display in dashboards.
For more information, see:
Use the "Analysis editor: Criteria tab" to specify the criteria for an analysis, including columns and filters. You can work with selection steps after displaying the "Selection Steps pane".
Use the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to create different views of the analysis results such as graphs, tickers, and pivot tables. You can also work with selection steps.
Use the Analysis editor: Prompts tab to access the "Prompt editor" to create prompts that allow users to select values that dynamically filter all views within the analysis or all analyses on a dashboard.
Use the "Analysis editor: Advanced tab" to examine or edit the XML code and logical SQL statement that is generated for an analysis.
The toolbar includes the following buttons:
Save Analysis — Use this button to save an analysis.
Save As — Use this button to save an analysis as another name.
Use this tab of the "Analysis editor" to examine or edit the XML code and logical SQL statement that is generated for an analysis. This tab is for use only by advanced users and developers who have the appropriate privileges. See "Examining the Logical SQL Statements for Analyses" for additional important information on working with this tab.
For more information, see:
Use this area at the top of the tab to access links that are identified with the name of the analysis and offer the following functions:
Displaying individual pages that contain links for refreshing, modifying, and viewing the results of the analysis. You can bookmark these pages for use as links from other Web pages and portals.
Generating and downloading a Web Query (.IQY) file, which allows you to work with the tables and pivot tables of the analysis in Microsoft Excel.
These links execute for the analysis as it is currently saved. If you update the analysis later, then the links are also changed for those updates. The links are not visible if you have not yet saved an analysis.
Use this area to view and modify the XML code for an analysis.
Caution:
Analyses are stored in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog in XML format. If you change the XML code, then you change the analysis in the catalog.Use the following components in this area:
XML Code Box — Use this box to view the XML code for the analysis and to enter any changes to that code.
Apply XML — Click this button to commit the XML code modifications that you made to the catalog.
Partial Update — Use this box to specify whether to update the SQL statement and HTML code only for views or for the entire analysis in response to an event.
Select either Default or Affected Views to update the SQL statement and HTML code only for the views that have been affected by an event such as drilling or sorting. These settings ensure better performance because the SQL statement and HTML code is generated only for affected views, which prevents the entire analysis from redrawing.
Select Entire Report to rebuild and redraw the entire analysis.
Bypass Oracle BI Presentation Services Cache — Use this box to specify whether you want the query to use the Oracle BI Presentation Services Cache. In general, you should avoid selecting this box as enabling the cache has potential performance degradation issues.
Use this read-only box to view the SQL statement that will be sent to the Oracle BI Server when the analysis is executed.
Click this button to display the "Analysis Simple SQL Statement dialog", in which you create a new analysis using the SQL statement from the current analysis as the starting point. Any hierarchical columns, selection steps, groups, or formatting that are specified in the current analysis will be removed before the dialog is displayed. You can edit the SQL statement in this dialog.
Use this area to modify the SQL statement for an analysis. You can include additional SQL clauses and change the subject area or the FROM clause for certain analyses. All but one of these features are disabled for analyses that contain hierarchical columns, member selections, or groups. Only the ability to specify a prefix is enabled.
Use the following components in this area:
Issue an Explicit Distinct — Select this box to send a SELECT DISTINCT SQL statement to the Oracle BI Server. If you clear this box, then a simple SELECT command is sent to the Oracle BI Server. The SELECT DISTINCT command ensures that you obtain only unique results, with no duplicate values.
FROM — Enter either the name of the subject area to use for the analysis or enter a complex FROM clause.
GROUP BY — Enter a comma-separated list of columns from the analysis to use in a GROUP BY command.
Prefix — Enter any SQL statements to be run before the SQL statement for the analysis runs. For example, you can modify the values of session variables.
Postfix — Enter any additional SQL clauses that you would like to include with the analysis, including a full SQL statement. For example, you can affect the SQL statement for the analysis by entering JOIN, UNION, or ORDER BY commands. If you include an ORDER BY command, then you override any ORDER BY commands from the SQL statement for the analysis.
In general, only enter statements for Postfix if you are very familiar with SQL code.
Apply SQL — Click this button to commit the SQL statement modifications that you made. Use care when clicking this button. When you do, Oracle BI EE essentially creates a new analysis based on the SQL statement that you have added or modified. Therefore, you will lose all views, formatting, and so on that you had previously created for the analysis. The XML code will also be modified for the new analysis.
You can also enter SQL statements using the "Administration: Issue SQL page".
To combine an analysis with a similar analysis from the same subject area or another subject area, where you can perform Set operations such as UNION or INTERSECT on the results, click the Combine results based on union, intersection, and difference operations toolbar button on the "Selected Columns pane". For more information, see "Combining Columns Using Set Operations".
Use this tab of the "Analysis editor" for:
Use the "Subject Areas pane" to select the columns and hierarchy levels for an analysis and to work with subject areas.
Use the "Catalog pane" to drag and drop objects from the catalog that you want to add to the analysis.
Use the following components when you are not creating a direct database request.
Use the "Selected Columns pane" to modify the columns and hierarchy levels that have been selected for an analysis.
Use the "Filters pane" to create new filters for an analysis.
Use the "Selection Steps pane" to create and modify steps for data selections. This pane is not visible until you click the button on the toolbar to display it.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Show/Hide Filters pane — Click this button to show and hide the "Filters pane".
Show/Hide Selection Steps pane — Click this button to show and hide the "Selection Steps pane".
Edit Analysis Properties — Click this button to display the "Analysis Properties dialog", where you specify properties for the entire analysis.
Direct Database Request Components
Use the following components when you create a direct database request.
For more information, see "Working with Direct Database Requests".
Enter the name of the connection pool for the database that is defined in the physical layer of the Oracle BI Administration Tool. A sample name is sql_paint.
For information about connection pools, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Enter the SQL statement that you want to send directly to the database. Oracle BI Server security rules for data are bypassed and cannot be applied when you send a direct database request.
The statement that you execute is affected by the user name that is specified for this connection pool in the Oracle BI Administration Tool. You might find that not all columns from the database are returned to you, if the specified user name is not permitted to see them.
Validate SQL and Retrieve Columns
Click this button to validate the SQL statement and retrieve any columns that you have specified in the request. The columns are displayed in the Result Columns area.
If any errors are returned from the database, then you will see them in the area below this button. See Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for information on resolving any errors.
Bypass Oracle BI Presentation Services Cache
Use this box to specify whether to use the Oracle BI Presentation Services Cache. Select this box to specify that you do want the request to use the Presentation Services cache. In general, you should avoid selecting this box as enabling the cache has potential performance degradation issues.
Use this area to work with the columns that are returned, if any, from the valid SQL statement. This area includes each column name and data type with the following options:
Column Properties — Click this button to display the "Column Properties dialog", in which you modify the properties of the column. The "Column Properties dialog: Conditional Format tab" is not available in this case, because you cannot apply conditional formatting to a column that is returned via a direct database request.
Edit Formula — Click this button to display the "Change Aggregation Rule dialog", in which you modify the aggregation rule for the column.
To change which columns that are returned, modify and validate the SQL statement.
Use this tab of the "Analysis editor" to create different views of the analysis results such as graphs, tickers, and pivot tables. For more information, see "Displaying the Results of Analyses".
Use the "Subject Areas pane" to select the columns and hierarchy levels for an analysis and to work with subject areas.
Use the "Catalog pane" to display objects from the catalog to use with views.
Use the "Views pane" to create and modify views to work with analyses.
Use the "Compound Layout" to assemble different views for display on a dashboard and to create additional layouts.
Use the "Selection Steps pane" to create and modify steps for data selections.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Print this analysis — Use this button to specify whether to print the views for the analysis as HTML or PDF.
Export this analysis — Use this button to select an option for exporting the views for the analysis. For information, see "Export Menu Options for Views and Results".
Schedule — Use this button to save the analysis and then display the "Agent editor", where you can create an agent from the analysis. For more information, see "Creating Agents from Analyses".
Show how results will look on a Dashboard — Use this button to preview how the edited view will look on a dashboard.
Note:
If the Show how results will look on a Dashboard button is not available, then the administrator has suppressed its display.Print Options — Use this button to display the "Print Options dialog", where you specify settings for printing.
Refresh the results of the current analysis — Use this button to refresh the results of the current analysis. Clicking this button does not bypass the Oracle BI EE server cache.
New View — Use this button to display a list of views from which you can select the view that you want to create. The view is added to the current compound layout.
New Group — Use this button to display the "New Group dialog", where you create a new group.
New Calculated Item — Use this button to display the "New Calculated Item dialog", where you build calculated items.
Edit Analysis Properties — Use this button to display the "Analysis Properties dialog", where you specify properties for the entire analysis.
Import formatting from another analysis — Use this button to display the "Open dialog", where you select an analysis from which to import formatting for columns and views. For more information, see "Using a Saved Analysis to Modify the Cosmetic Appearance of Other Analyses".
Create Compound Layout — Use this button to create a new instance of the compound layout. A new compound layout is displayed in a tab in the "Compound Layout" and contains only a title.
Copy Compound Layout — Use this button to create a copy of the current compound layout. The copy is displayed in a tab in the Compound Layout and contains the same views as the compound layout that you copied.
When you copy, you do not actually create additional copies of the analysis or its views. The analysis and views exist only once. Any changes that you make to the analysis or its views are reflected in the multiple instances of the compound layout.
Delete Compound Layout — Use this button to delete the current compound layout. The views on the layout are not deleted from the analysis. This button is not available if you attempt to delete the last compound layout in the analysis.
Show/Hide Selection Steps Pane — Use this button to show or hide the display of the "Selection Steps pane" in the Results tab.
Use this dialog to specify properties for the analysis.
For more information, see "Specifying the Criteria for Analyses".
Use this box to select the type of message (default or custom) that will be displayed if no results are returned from an analysis. You might see the message, for example, if you have a very restrictive filter placed on the columns in the analysis. You will not see the custom message if you simply create the analysis and include no columns.
Edit the header to use for the custom message. Available only when you specify a custom message for No Results Settings.
Edit the message to use for the custom message. Available only when you specify a custom message for No Results Settings.
Use this box to manually control which compound layout, including its associated views, is sent to a particular destination. For more information, see "Customizing Views for Delivery to Agent Users".
Use the buttons within this area as follows, to control how members are added to hierarchical columns in this analysis via selection steps:
Within the Hierarchy: Does not display duplicate members within all hierarchies in the analysis. If the member is already in the view, within the hierarchy, then this setting is ignored. Applies only to level-based hierarchies.
Outside the Hierarchy: Members are added at the bottom. Members, groups, and calculated items are added below the last members at the top level of the hierarchy, in the order in which they are added.
For more information on selection steps, see "Creating Selection Steps".
Use this dialog to enter simple SQL statements that you can use to easily create an analysis. This dialog is displayed from the following places:
When you select New in the global header and select Analysis or when you click Analysis in the Create area of the Home page, then select Create Analysis from Simple Logical SQL. The dialog is displayed with no existing SQL statement.
When you select New Analysis when examining the SQL statement for an existing analysis in the "Analysis editor: Advanced tab". The dialog is displayed using the SQL statement from the current analysis as a starting point.
For information, see "Creating New Analyses" and "Examining the Logical SQL Statements for Analyses".
Use this pane as follows:
For an initiative or objective, to specify basic information about the objective, to identify the KPIs and other objectives that support and measure the performance of the objective, and to add action links.
For KPI details, to view basic KPI settings as well as a graph that presents actual values and target values, to pin dimensions, and to run actions.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor: KPI Details tab", the "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab" and the "Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab".
Displays a graph that presents actual values and target values that enable you to view KPI performance over time or using dimensions selected from the following:
The point of view area
The Dimensionality area below the graph
The graph will only show multiple time periods if trending was enabled in the KPI's definition.
Parent Initiative or Parent Objective
Displays the name of the parent initiative or the parent objective whose progress is measured by the KPI.
Displays the action links associated with each KPI performance level or range. Use to perform actions in response to the KPIs current performance state. (You add or edit the action links in the KPI definition. See "Adding Actions to KPIs" and "Editing Actions and Action Links Added to KPIs".)
Displays the following KPI values and data:
Value — The KPI value that was manually entered, calculated, or referenced from the subject area.
Variance — The amount by which the actual value differs from the target value.
Change — If you enabled trending, this is the value by which the current actual value differs from that from the previous period. For example, if the actual value for an "Annual Sales" KPI is 30000 and was 2650 last year, the change is 27350.
Target — The value that you want the KPI to achieve.
% Variance — The amount by which the actual value differs from the target value expressed as a percentage.
% Change — If you enabled trending, this is the value by which the actual value differs from that from the previous period, as a percentage.
Displays the following options to indicate whether the performance of the KPI drives other KPIs, or is affected by the performance of other KPIs, or other data or processes:
Undefined — Use this option to not define an indicator type.
Leading — Use this option to indicate that the performance of the KPI drives the performance of other KPIs. For example, a Sales KPI would lead a Profits KPI.
Lagging — Use this option to indicate that the performance of the KPI is affected by the performance of other KPIs, or by other data or processes.
Displays the perspectives available for the scorecard. Select the perspective with which to align the initiative or objective. For example, you might align an objective for Increased Product Sales with the Financial perspective.
For more information on perspectives, see "What Are Perspectives?"
Displays the dimensions associated with the KPI. Use this area to pin the dimensions.
Pinning is optional. Typically, it is best not to pin most of the dimensions so that the data will be controlled by the point of view settings.
To pin a dimension, click the down-arrow button to the right of the dimension and select one of the following options:
A specific value
Use Point-of-View — Use this option to use the value currently selected in the in the point of view area.
Use Variable — Use this option to display the "Select Variable dialog", where you specify a variable to use to set the value. For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Components for Initiatives and Objectives
Displays the score for the initiative or objective in a gauge and numerically.
For more information on scores, see "Understanding Initiative or Objective Performance Assessment".
Parent Initiative or Parent Objective
Displays the name of the parent initiative (for an initiative) or the parent objective (for an objective).
This box is available only for initiatives.
Use this box to specify the date on which the initiative is to begin as well as the time zone. To select a date, click the Select Date button to display the Select Date dialog.
This box is available only for initiatives.
Use this box to specify the date on which the initiative is due as well as the time zone. To select a date, click the Select Date button to display the Select Date dialog.
This box is available only for initiatives.
Use this box to specify the date on which the initiative was actually completed as well as the time zone. To select a date, click the Select Date button to display the Select Date dialog.
Displays for the initiative or objective:
The number of its child initiatives or child objectives in each assessment range.
The number of its child KPIs in each assessment range.
If there is at least one child objective, initiative, or KPI for a particular status value, the status name is a hyperlink that drills to a dynamically created list of the child objectives, initiatives, and KPIs.
Displays for the initiative or objective:
The number of its descendant initiatives or objectives in each assessment range.
The number of its descendant KPIs in each assessment range.
If there is at least one descendant objective, initiative, or KPI for a particular status value, the status name is a hyperlink that drills to a dynamically created list of the descendant objectives, initiatives, and KPIs.
Displays the perspectives available for the scorecard. Select the perspective with which to align the initiative or objective. For example, you might align an objective for Increased Product Sales with the Financial perspective.
For more information on perspectives, see "What Are Perspectives?"
Displays the following options to specify the rule to be used to assess the overall performance of the initiative or objective:
Worst case — Use this option to specify that the status of the worst performing child KPI or objective is to be used.
Best case — Use this option to specify that the status of the best performing child KPI or objective is to be used.
Most Frequent (Worst Case) — Use this option to specify that, if half the child KPIs and objectives have high performance and half have low performance, then use the status of the worst performing child KPI or objective.
Most Frequent (Best Case) — Use this option to specify that, if half the child KPIs and objectives have high performance and half have low performance, then use the status of the best performing child KPI or objective.
Weighted — Use this option to use a weighted average based on the weights you have assigned to the child KPIs and objectives.
Displays the following options to indicate whether the performance of the objective drives other objectives, or is affected by the performance of other objectives or other data or processes:
Undefined — Use this option to not define an indicator type.
Leading — Use this option to indicate that the performance of the objective drives the performance of other objectives. For example, an objective for Increased Sales would drive an objective for Increased Profits.
Lagging — Use this option to indicate that the performance of the objective is affected by the performance of other objectives or by other data or processes.
This box is available only for initiatives.
Displays the options High, Medium, and Low to identify the importance and urgency of an initiative.
Displays the action links that have been added to an initiative or objective, including the text of the action links, the actions associated with the links, and under which states of the objectives or initiatives the action links are enabled.
Use this area to view and manage action links:
To add a new action link, click the New Row button to display the "Action Link dialog".
To edit an action link, select the link in the list and click the Edit Row button to display the "Action Link dialog".
To delete an action link, select the link in the list and click the Delete Row button.
Initiatives & KPIs or Objectives & KPIs
Use this table to view and manage:
For an initiative, KPIs and other initiatives that are used to evaluate the performance of the initiative
For an objective, KPIs and other objectives that are used to evaluate the performance of the objective
The Initiative and KPIs table, Objectives & KPIs table, Objectives, Initiatives & KPIs table, and the New KPI Watchlist table displays initiatives, objectives, and KPIs as follows:
The Initiatives & KPIs table displays the child initiatives and the KPIs that are used to evaluate the performance of an initiative.
Use this table to view and manage the child initiatives and the KPIs that are used to evaluate the performance of the initiative.
To add a KPI, drag it from the "Catalog pane for Scorecard" and drop it on the table. The "Add KPI dialog" is displayed, where you pin dimension values or assign a label for this usage of the KPI.
The Objectives & KPIs table displays the child objectives and the KPIs that are used to evaluate the performance of an objective.
Use this table to view and manage the child objectives and the KPIs that are used to evaluate the performance of the objective.
To add a KPI, drag it from the "Catalog pane for Scorecard" and drop it on the table. The "Add KPI dialog" is displayed, where you pin dimension values or assign a label for this usage of the KPI.
The Objectives, Initiatives & KPIs table displays the initiatives, objectives, and KPIs that are associated with a perspective.
Use this table to view and manage the initiatives, objectives, and KPIs that are associated with the perspective.
The New KPI Watchlist table displays the KPIs in the watchlist.
Use this table to add KPIs to and manage KPIs in the watchlist.
To add a KPI, drag it from the "Catalog pane for Scorecard", "Strategy pane", "Initiatives pane", or the "Scorecard Documents pane" and drop it on the table. The "Add KPI dialog" is displayed, where you pin dimension values or assign a label for this usage of the KPI.
These tables contain the following components:
Objects — Displays these options:
Open — This option is not available in the New KPI Watchlist table. Use this option to open the selected initiative, objective, or KPI.
Open KPI Definition — This option is available only in the New KPI Watchlist table. Displays the "KPI editor", where you edit the selected KPI.
Edit Watchlist Entry — This option is available only in the New KPI Watchlist table. Displays the "Edit Watchlist Entry dialog", where you edit the dimension values and label for the selected KPI.
Delete — This option is not available in the New KPI Watchlist table. Use this option to delete the selected initiative, objective, or KPI.
Remove KPI — This option is available only in the New KPI Watchlist table. Removes the selected KPI from the watchlist.
Analyze — Use this option to create an analysis based on the KPI. The analysis is automatically saved in the catalog in the My Folders/Drills folder.
Note:
Because the My Folders/Drills folder is used for temporary storage, the analysis may not persist after your Oracle Business Intelligence session ends. To preserve the analysis, copy it to another directory. For example, to preserve an analysis that you plan to use in a shared dashboard, copy it to a folder in /Shared Folders.Contact Owner — Use this option to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can send a message to the business owner of the selected initiative, objective, or KPI.
Add KPI — This option is available only in the Objectives & KPIs table and the Initiatives & KPIs table. Use this option to display the "Select a KPI dialog", where you select a KPI to add.
View — Displays these options:
Show More Columns — Use this option to display the "Show More Columns dialog", where you add columns to or remove columns from the table. Table B-4 lists and describes the available columns.
Change Column Labels — This option is available only in a New KPI Watchlist table. Use this option to display the "Change Column Labels", where you change the labels of the columns. Table B-4 lists and describes the available columns.
Summary — Displays, of the initiatives, objectives and KPIs that are used to evaluate the performance of this initiative, objective or KPI, the number that fall into each assessment range, for example, OK (2), Critical (1).
Red asterisk (in a cell in the Status column) — This symbol is available only if there are status overrides applied to an initiative, objective, or KPI. Use this symbol to display the "Status window", where you can view the overrides that previously have been applied or apply another override.
Blue triangle (in the upper-right corner of a cell in the Status column as well as in other columns for a KPI) — This symbol is available only if there are comments attached to an initiative, objective, or KPI for the current dimension settings. Use this button to display the "Status window", where you can read the comments that previously have been added, add another comment, or reply to a comment.
Right-click menu in a column cell — The options that are available depend on the tab in which the table is displayed and on the column in which you right-clicked, and can include the following:
Action Links — Displays the action links that are available for the current status of the initiative, objective or KPI. Click a link to execute the action.
(for a cell in a KPI row only) Open KPI — Displays the KPI details for the selected KPI (that is, the details are displayed in the "Scorecard editor: KPI Details tab").
(for a cell in a KPI row only) Remove KPI — Use this option to remove the selected KPI from the KPI watchlist.
(for a cell in an initiative or objective row only) Open Initiative or Open Objective — Use this option to open the selected initiative or objective (that is, it is displayed in the "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab" or "Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab" in the current mode).
(for a cell in an initiative or objective row only) Delete Initiative or Delete Objective — Use this option to delete the selected initiative or objective.
(for a cell in a KPI row only) Analyze — Use this option to create an analysis based on the selected KPI. The analysis is automatically saved in the catalog in the My Folders/Drills folder.
Note:
Because the My Folders/Drills folder is used for temporary storage, the analysis may not persist after your Oracle Business Intelligence session ends. To preserve the analysis, copy it to another directory. For example, to preserve an analysis that you plan to use in a shared dashboard, copy it to a folder in /Shared Folders.Contact Owner — Use this option to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you compose a message to the business owner.
(for a cell in the Status column only) Add Comment — Displays the "Add Comment dialog", where you add a comment to an initiative, objective, or KPI for the current point of view.
(for a cell in the Status column only) Override Status — Displays the "Status Override dialog", where you override the status of an initiative, objective, or KPI for the current point of view.
The Status window shows the following information:
If you are working with comments, all the comments that have been added to and all status overrides that have been applied to an initiative, objective, or KPI for the current point of view.
If you are working with status overrides, all status overrides that have been applied to an initiative, objective, or KPI for the current point of view.
Use this window to view and manage this information as follows:
To add a new comment, click the New Comment button to display the "Add Comment dialog".
To override a status, click the New Override button to display the "Status Override dialog".
To expand or collapse all comments, click the Expand All or Collapse All button.
To expand or collapse an individual comment, click the Expand or Collapse button.
To reply to a comment, click Reply to display the "Reply dialog".
To pin the Status window so that it stays open as you work, click the Pin button in the top-right corner of the window.
Use this dialog to specify how to add a named filter to the analysis with which you are working.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed with the following name, with fewer options that are read-only:
Clear all existing filters before applying
Use this option to remove all existing filters from the analysis before adding the named filter.
Apply contents of filter instead of a reference to the filter
Select this option to add the filter as an inline filter. The filter is added to the "Filters pane", where you can edit it. Any changes that you make to the filter are saved with the analysis, but not to the catalog.
Clear this option to add the filter as a named filter. Clearing this option adds a reference to the filter (that is, add the filter as a named filter). The filter is added to the Filters pane, where you can view it but not edit it.
Use this dialog to specify if and how you want to apply the existing folder or object permissions when preparing the archive file. See "What is Archiving?"
Use this option to maintain the existing permissions that determine access to the object. If you do not select this option, then the permissions for the highest-level parent folder are used.
Use this option to maintain the timestamps assigned to the object. If you do not select this option, then a timestamp of when the folder was archived is applied.
Before you archive, ensure that the Archive\Unarchive privilege is assigned to your account.
Use this dialog to specify the formatting of bar graphs on a map view. The bar height varies with metric values. For pie graphs, the slice size varies as a percentage of the whole.
For more information, see "Editing Map Views".
This dialog is also displayed as:
Displays the name of the data column whose values will be displayed in graphs on the map and used as their labels.
Deselect this box to specify that you will enter the label for the graphs, rather than having the label specified automatically as the column name.
Use this list to select the column whose name is used as the tooltip when you hover over a value of the data column on the map.
Use this list to specify the measure column whose values will control the size of the bars or slices, such as Dollars or Units.
Use this box to specify the size in pixels of each graph that is displayed on the map.
Use this list to select the attribute column whose values show as bars or slices in the graphs, such as Product or Channel.
For example, you can create pie graphs that have a slice for each Product. The size of the slice depends on the Dollars sold for that Product.
Use this dialog to specify the information for adding an Oracle BI Publisher report to a dashboard page.
For more information, see "Adding Oracle BI Publisher Reports to Dashboard Pages".
Use this button to specify that the report is to be embedded in the dashboard, rather than displaying as simply a link to BI Publisher. This option is selected by default for reports.
For more information about embedded content, see "Adding Content to Dashboards".
Use these fields to specify the width and height of the report on the dashboard, if the report is embedded.
Use this box to specify that a link is to be displayed on the dashboard (rather than embedding the report in the dashboard). The text of the link is the name of the report. By clicking the link, you open the report in BI Publisher.
Use this box to indicate, for a report that is scheduled, that you want the most recently generated version of the report to be displayed on the dashboard page.
If this box is checked, then:
If there is a scheduled job associated with the report, then the report is not run again. The last saved output from the report is added to the dashboard page.
If there is no scheduled job associated with the report, then the report is run and the output from the report is added to the dashboard page.
If this box is not checked, then the report is executed each time, regardless of whether there is a scheduled job associated with the report, and the output is added to the dashboard page.
Use this dialog to add page and column breaks to the layout of a dashboard page.
For more information, see "Properties Buttons for Objects".
Use this option to place the column next to the column that is above it.
Use this option to place the column beneath the column that is currently to the left of it (or next to it).
Use this option to place the column on another page in printed and PDF versions. This option also places the column below the column that it is next to, if you have not selected the Column Break option.
Use this dialog to specify the formatting of bubbles on a map. Bubble size represents the value of a metric. Bubble location indicates the geographic region. Bubbles, images, and shapes can apply to both polygon layers and point layers. Point layers cannot use a color fill format.
For more information, see "Editing Map Views".
This dialog is also displayed as:
Displays the name of the data column whose values will be displayed as bubbles, color fills, images, or shapes on the map and used as their label.
Deselect this box to specify that you will enter the label for the bubbles, color fills, images, or shapes, rather than having the label specified automatically as the column name.
X (longitude) and Y (latitude)
Available only for the custom point layer and only if the Single Column box is not selected. Use this list to select the columns whose values will specify the longitude and latitude of the point that you want to represent on the map as a bubble, image, or shape.
You must specify different columns for longitude and latitude. These columns must store longitude and latitude values, values from a coordinate system that can identify a point, or address values that can be converted to longitude and latitude via the ETL system. The column values must adhere to the WGS84 coordinate system.
Use this box to indicate that the values from one column will specify the coordinates of the points that you want to represent on the map. The column is specified in the Location box.
Available only for the custom point layer and only if the Single Column box is selected. Use this list to select the column whose values will specify the longitude and latitude of the point that you want to represent on the map as a bubble, image, or shape. Ensure that the column contains both longitude and latitude values.
Available only for the custom point layer and only if the Single Column box is selected. Use this box to enter the delimiter that is used in the single column that you specified in the Location box that holds the longitude and latitude values, such as a comma. This box has no default values. If you do not specify the proper delimiter, then the format cannot be displayed appropriately on the map.
Use this list to select the column whose name is used as the tooltip when you hover over a value of the data column on the map.
Available only for shapes. Use this list to select the shape to include on the map. You can select Circle, Triangle, or Diamond.
Vary Size By or Vary Color By or Vary Image By
Use this list to specify the measure column whose values will control the images, the color fills, or the size of the bubbles or shapes, such as Dollars or Units. For example, you can vary the color of the shapes by one measure column and the size of the shape by another measure column.
Available only for bubbles and shapes. Enter the minimum size of the bubbles or shapes.
Available only for bubbles and shapes. Enter the maximum size of the bubbles or shapes.
Available only for bubbles and shapes. Use this list to select the color for the bubbles or shapes on the map. For bubbles, this box is disabled when you click Vary By Measure. When varying color by measure, you specify a palette of colors that corresponds to the binned values of the measure.
Use this list to select the type of grouping for the values to indicate via images or shapes. You can select one of the following types:
Percentile Binning — Group geographies by their rank, such as the top 33%. Percentile threshold values are specified automatically; you cannot modify them.
Value Binning — You specify the minimum and maximum values for each of the groups.
Continuous Color — For color fill only. A gradient of color is varied and applied to the ranks of the geographies. You make no specifications for minimum and maximum values.
Use this list to select the number of bins for grouping the values to indicate via color fills, images or shapes. You can select various integers, Quartile (4), or Decile (10). The number of bins that you select corresponds to the number of colors that the map format shows.
Available only for shapes and color fills. Use this list to select the shape or gradient to display. The number of colors in the style depends on the number that is specified for Bins.
Use these boxes to enter the minimum, maximum, and other values for the bins. You can enter the values only if you select Value Binning for Bin Type. If you select Percentile Binning, then the values are specified automatically.
Enter the labels for the bins. Labeling a bin helps users understand what a particular bin, or bucket, means. A label for the top quartile might say "Top Selling Products" instead of "Top 25%". You can customize these labels, and the map will provide automatic bin labels for particular types of data sets (percentage bins).
Available only for images. Use this list to select the images for the bins. Click an image to display the "Select Image dialog" where you select the image for the bin. Images are shown at a latitude and longitude coordinate.
Available only for color fill. Use this list to select the colors for the bins. Click a color to display a dialog where you select the color for the bin.
Allow Dashboard Users to Edit Thresholds
Available only for color fill when Bin Type is set to Percentile Binning or Value Binning. Select this box to display a slider component that allows end users to dynamically adjust threshold values. These adjustments allow users to perform visual analysis on their map data, which is sometimes referred to as "what-if analysis."
If you allow users to edit thresholds and they modify them, then the setting for Bin Type is automatically changed to Value Binning from any other settings.
For information, see "Modifying Thresholds for Formats on a Map View".
Use the Catalog page to locate objects in the catalog and perform tasks specific to those objects. The objects and options that are available to you are determined by your system privileges and the permissions assigned to individual folders and objects.
Use the Catalog page to:
Perform basic tasks. For example, open, copy, delete, search for objects, and create folders.
Move objects by dragging and dropping them to different locations within the catalog.
Perform object-specific tasks. For example, assigning an agent or adding an object to a briefing book.
Archive specific folders, objects, or the entire catalog.
Set permissions on individual objects and folders.
For more information, see:
Use the "Folders pane" to display the catalog as a directory hierarchy or to display only those folders and objects that you created or that you marked as your favorites.
Use the "Search pane" to provide search criteria and initiate a catalog search.
Use the "Catalog area" to view the results of your search, open folders to browse content, and initiate tasks specific to an object.
Use the "Tasks pane" to initiate tasks specific to an object.
Use the "Preview pane" to preview the object that you selected in the Catalog area. This pane is not visible until you click the button to display it.
The buttons that are enabled for the toolbar vary between object types. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
User View — Defaults to User View. You can select Admin View if you have administrative permissions. Admin View allows you to perform all administrative tasks and access the catalog root folders, which provide detailed information about all users and system objects.
New — Use to create new objects. After you select the object to create, the object's editor displays where you can begin building the object.
If you have administrative permissions, then the New menu displays the Folder link that you can select to create a new catalog folder.
Refresh — Use to update the catalog with content or folder changes.
Up — Use to navigate to a parent folder or directory.
Show/Hide folders panes — Use to hide or show the Folders pane and Tasks pane.
Search — Use to display the Search pane. Deselect this button to display the Folders pane.
Change list view type — Use this list to select how much information about folders and objects to display in the Catalog area.
Descriptive — Select to display the object or folder's name, type, owner, and date modified and Expand, Open, Edit, and More links. This view allows you to perform tasks directly from the object's listing.
Details — Select to display the object or folder's name, type, owner, and date modified.
List — Select to display object and folder name, only.
View — Use to view the selected object. For example, if you select a report and click this button, the report viewer launches and shows you the report.
Edit — Use to modify a selected object using the associated editor or run a script, URL, or Web service action.
Print — Use to print the current page or the information in the Preview pane.
Export — Use to export a copy of an object or the object's data to a variety of formats (for example, PDF or XLS).
Delete — Use to remove a selected object or folder from the catalog.
When deleting shared folders or objects, be aware that other users who have added shared objects to their personal dashboards will no longer have access to them.
Copy — Use to copy a selected object or folder to paste in another directory.
Paste — Use to paste a copied object to another location.
Displays the directory path of a selected object. Use as a way to determine where you are within the directory structure.
Select to display all object-related settings and data such as system privileges, metadata, and cached data. When you select this option, hidden folders, including the following folders, are displayed: _Portal, _Filters, _Prefs, _Alerts, _Agents, and _Delivers.
Use this area to view your search results and browse business intelligence objects and folders. You can also use this pane to perform object-specific tasks and to move objects by dragging and dropping them to different areas within the Catalog. You can drag and drop objects within the Catalog area or from the Catalog area to the "Folders pane".
This area is part of the "Catalog page".
For more information, see:
Use this list to specify which object type to display in the catalog area. Selecting an object type applies only to the folder that you are viewing and not to the whole catalog. For example, if you are viewing content in the /My Folders location and select the Dashboard object type, only the dashboards within the /My Folders location display in the Catalog area.
This field displays if you selected either the List or Descriptive view type in the Change list view type list located in the "Catalog Page" toolbar.
Use this list to specify how you want to sort the objects in the Catalog area. By default, objects display in alphabetical order (A-Z). For example, you can select the Last Modified Ascending option to view the object chronologically.
This field displays if you selected the Descriptive view type in the Change list view type list located in the "Catalog Page" toolbar.
Use to display more information about specific object types. For example, if the Catalog pane listing contains agents and you select the Show More Details option, the information listed with the agent will include last run, next run, recipient, and priority information.
Use to view a list of catalog objects and to initiate a specific tasks from an object. The way in which the objects display in this area (for example, list or details) is determined by the view type selection that you made in the Change list view type list located in the "Catalog Page" toolbar.
The tasks available for each object depend upon the object's type, the object's permissions, and your privileges. The tasks that display in the Catalog area also display in the "Tasks pane". For descriptions of these tasks, see "Tasks Options".
Use this pane to add objects from the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog to analyses, dashboards, and so on. The objects available for you to add depend on the task that you are performing. For example, if you are creating:
A dashboard, you can add objects that are appropriate to add to a dashboard (such as pages, columns, analyses, and prompts) and for which you have appropriate permissions.
An analysis, you can add filters, calculated items, and groups for which you have appropriate permissions.
This pane is displayed in numerous places, including the tabs of the "Analysis editor", the "Dashboard builder", and the "New Calculated Item dialog".
For more information, see:
This box is not available in the Dashboard builder or the New Calculated Item dialog.
Use this box to select which objects to display in the Catalog Tree. The options can vary depending on whether the Catalog pane is displayed but can include the following:
All —Use this option on the "Analysis editor: Criteria tab" to display all filters (for Criteria tab only), calculated items, and groups. On all other tabs of the Analysis editor, use this option to include all calculated items and groups.
Filters — Use this option to display only filters.
Calculated Items — Use this option to display only calculated items.
Groups — Use this option to display only groups.
Displays catalog objects that are appropriate for the task that you are currently performing and for which you have appropriate permissions.
Use this tree to:
Add a filter, calculated item, and group to an analysis. To do so, select the filter, calculated item, or group and click the Add More Options button.
Add an object to a dashboard. To do so, drag and drop the object to the "Page Layout area".
Add a group or calculated item as a selection step. To do so, drag and drop the object to the appropriate column in the "Selection Steps pane".
This toolbar is available only in the Catalog pane displayed in the tabs of the Analysis editor.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Add More Options — Use this button to add a filter, calculated item, or group to the analysis. To do so, first select the object, and then click this button:
For a filter, the "Apply Saved Filter dialog" is displayed, where you specify how the filter is to be applied to the analysis.
For a group, the following options are displayed:
Add — Use this option to add the group to the analysis. You will see an "Add: group-name" step in the Selection Steps pane. You will see an outline value for the group in a table or pivot table.
Add Members — Use this option to add the members of the group to the analysis. You will see an "Add: Members of group-name" step in the Selection Steps pane. You will not see an outline value in a table or pivot table; you will see the members of the group.
For a calculated item, use this button to add the calculated item to the view.
View — This button is available only when you select a filter. Use this button to view information about the selected object. When you click this button, the appropriate view dialog displays. For example, from the "View Saved Filter dialog", you can view the filter's Catalog path and the syntax of the filter (for example, Region is equal to/is in EASTERN REGION; SOUTHERN REGION).
Edit — Use this button to edit the selected object.
Refresh — Use this button to refresh the objects that are displayed in the Catalog Tree. For example, if you cannot locate a specific saved filter, then click the Refresh button to display it in the Catalog Tree.
Use this pane to work with objects in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog. For example, if you are creating an objective, you can add predefined KPIs to evaluate the objective's performance and progress by dragging and dropping KPIs from this pane to the objective.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor".
Displays catalog objects for which you have appropriate permissions.
Use this tree to work with the catalog objects. For example, you can add a KPI to an objective or initiative by dragging and dropping it, you can open a KPI, and so on.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Objects — Displays the following options:
Open — Use this option to open the selected object. (Whether you can open an object and whether the object opens as read-only depends on your privileges and permissions and on the type of object.)
Cut — Use this option to remove the selected folder or object for pasting in another folder.
Copy — Use this option to duplicate the selected folder or object and paste it in another folder.
Paste — Use this option to paste the folder or object that you have cut or copied in another folder.
Delete — Use this option to delete the selected folder or object.
View — Displays the option System Objects. Use this option to display system folders or objects in the Catalog Tree. (System folders or objects are those for which the system attribute is set in the "Properties dialog".)
New Object — Displays these options:
New Folder — Use this option to create a new folder. To rename the folder, right-click the folder, select Rename, and enter a new name.
KPI — Use this option to create a new KPI. When you select this option the Select Subject Area menu is displayed, where you select the subject area, and then the "KPI editor" is displayed.
Create Agent — (This option is available only when you select a KPI.) Use this option to display the "Create New Agent dialog", where you create an agent from the KPI.
Open — Use this option to open the selected object. (Whether you can open an object and whether the object opens as read-only depends on your privileges and permissions and on the type of object.)
Delete — Use this option to delete the selected folder or object.
Refresh — Use this button to refresh the objects that are displayed in the Catalog Tree. For example, if you cannot locate a specific saved filter, then click the Refresh button to display it in the Catalog Tree.
Use this dialog to specify the strength of a cause and effect relationship, and how the values of one impact the values of the other.
For more information, see:
Use this box to specify whether the strength of the cause and effect relationship is Strong, Moderate, or Weak.
Use this box to specify whether changes in performance or value in the cause and effect relationship are directly proportional (Direct) or inversely proportional (Inverse).
Use this dialog to specify how cause and effect relationships are to be displayed on a cause & effect map.
For more information, see:
Use the "Cause & Effect Map Preferences dialog: General tab" to specify which types of cause and effect relationships are to be displayed on a cause & effect map. You can also specify the slant of the lines that link objects as well as how many levels of the strategy hierarchy are to be displayed.
Use the "Cause & Effect Map Preferences dialog: Hidden Nodes tab" to specify which objectives and KPIs on a cause & effect map are to be hidden.
Use this tab of the "Cause & Effect Map Preferences dialog" to specify which types of cause and effect relationships are to be displayed on a cause & effect map. You can also specify the slant of the lines that link objects as well as how many levels of the strategy hierarchy are to be displayed.
For more information, see:
Displays the following check boxes to specify which types of cause and effect relationships are to be displayed on the map:
Strong — Use this option to specify that strong cause and effect relationships are to be displayed.
Moderate — Use this option to specify that moderate cause and effect relationships are to be displayed.
Weak — Use this option to specify that weak cause and effect relationships are to be displayed.
Displays the following check boxes to specify whether only associated objectives and KPIs whose changes in performance or value are directly proportional to the objective are to be displayed on the map, or only associated objectives and KPIs whose changes in performance or value are inversely proportional to the objective are to be displayed on the map, or both:
Direct — Use this option to specify that only associated objectives and KPIs whose changes in performance or value are directly proportional to the objective are to be displayed.
Inverse — Use this option to specify that associated objectives and KPIs whose changes in performance or value are inversely proportional to the objective are to be displayed.
Use this box to specify the degree to which the lines that link objects on the map are to slant. To use straight lines, specify 0.
Use this box to specify how many influencing, child objectives, to display on the map. This is helpful to reduce the visual complexity of the map.
Use this tab of the "Cause & Effect Map Preferences dialog" to specify which objectives and KPIs on a cause & effect map are to be hidden.
You might, for example, want to hide some nodes so that you can view only the nodes for which you are the business owner.
For more information, see:
Associated Objectives and KPIs (left pane)
Displays all objectives and KPIs that are associated with the objective or KPI that is the root of the map.
Hidden Objectives and KPIs (right pane)
Displays all objectives and KPIs that are to be hidden on the map.
Use these buttons move objectives and KPIs between the two panes.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Cause & Effect Map tab" to specify supporting information for a cause & effect map.
For more information, see:
Displays the name of the cause & effect map.
Use this field to enter a description of the cause & effect map.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the cause & effect map. To specify the business owner, click the Set User button to display the "Business Owner dialog", where you can search for and select the business owner.
Use this table to view and manage the objectives and KPIs that are displayed in the cause & effect map.
Use the "Related Documents area" to view and manage documents that provide supporting information to the cause & effect map.
Displays the documents that provide supporting information to a scorecard object, such as an objective.
Use this area to view and manage the documents:
To add a new document, click the New Row button to display the "New Related Document dialog".
To edit document, select the document in the list and click the Edit Row button to display the "Edit Related Document dialog".
To delete a document, select the document in the list and click the Delete Row button.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Cause & Effect Map tab" to create a diagram that illustrates the cause and effect relationships of an objective or KPI.
For more information, see:
Use this area to drag and drop the objective or KPI whose cause and effect relationships you want to diagram.
Each node (that is, the representation of an objective or KPI) on the diagram shows the status of the objective or KPI by displaying the icon and color that represents the assessment range. A KPI node also displays the actual value of the KPI and the percent variance from the target.
To display options that allow you to work with a node, right-click the node or click the Options button (on the right side of the node) to display the "Node Options Menu".
To display additional performance data for the KPI, such as target value or variance, click the down arrow at the bottom center of the node. To collapse this data, click the up arrow.
To edit a causal linkage, right-click the linkage line and select Edit Causal Linkage. The "Causal Linkage dialog" is displayed.
To delete a causal linkage, right-click the linkage line and select Delete Causal Linkage.
To zoom in and out of the diagram or to set preferences, use the toolbar buttons on the "Scorecard editor: Cause & Effect Map tab".
To work with comments (if any), click the Comment button in the upper-right corner of a node to display the "Status window", where you can read the comments that previously have been added, add another comment, or reply to a comment. See "About Comments".
To work with status overrides (if any), click the red asterisk in a node to display the "Status window", where you can view the overrides that previously have been applied or apply another override. See "About Status Overrides".
Use the "Legend pane" to view the legend for the cause & effect map.
Use this dialog to select the aggregation rule for a column when performing a direct database request. For more information, see "Working with Direct Database Requests".
Displays the name of the column for which you are changing the aggregation rule.
Use to select the aggregation rule for this column. In this dialog, Default indicates the default aggregation rule; that is, the rule that is determined by the Oracle BI Server (such as the rule that is defined in the Oracle BI repository).
For a list of the valid values, see "Aggregation Rules and Functions".
Use this dialog to change the labels of the columns (such as % Change) that are displayed in a KPI watchlist.
Table B-4, "Available KPI Data Columns" describes the available columns.
You can change the column labels in a stand-alone KPI watchlist or in a KPI watchlist that has been added to a scorecard. You cannot change the labels in a KPI watchlist that has been added to a dashboard.
For more information, see:
Use this box to enter a new label for the column. For example, you might want to change the % Change column label to Percent Change.
Use this dialog, when adding an inline action to an agent that will be conditionally executed based on an analysis, to select a column in the analysis whose value is to be used as the value of an action parameter.
For more information, see:
Use this list to select the request column whose value is to be used as the value of an action parameter.
Displays the name of the selected column.
If the action is being executed per row, then the value from each row will be passed to the parameter; otherwise, the value from the first row will be passed.
Use this pane to identify information that is helpful for collaborating on KPI details, an initiative, or an objective, including the business owner, key resources, and related documents.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor: KPI Details tab", "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab", and "Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab".
Displays the comments that have been added to the KPI, initiative, or objective. For more about comments, see "About Comments".
Use this area to view and manage the comments. Before you begin to work with comments, ensure that the point of view controls reflect the values for which you want to add or view comments.
To:
Add a new comment, click the New Comment button to display the "New Comment dialog".
Expand or collapse all comments, click the Expand All or Collapse All button.
Expand or collapse an individual comment, click the Expand or Collapse button.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the initiative, objective, or KPI. To specify the business owner, click the Set User button to display the "Select Business Owner dialog", where you can search for and select the business owner.
(for KPI details) Displays links to documents that provide supporting information to the KPI. You added these links when you created or edited the KPI. For more information, see "Creating or Editing KPIs".
(for initiatives and objectives) Use the "Related Documents area" to view and manage documents that provide supporting information to the initiative or objective.
This area is available only for initiatives.
Displays the key resources for an initiative, that is the users who are working on an initiative.
Use this area to view and manage the key resources:
To add a new key resource, click the New Row button to display the "Key Resource dialog".
To edit a key resource, select the key resource in the list and click the Edit Row button to display the "Key Resource dialog".
To delete a key resource, select the key resource in the list and click the Delete Row button.
Use this dialog to specify the color in which the cells that contain the KPI's actual values are displayed. The color that you choose reflects the value's performance levels.
Use these samples to select a color. When you select a color, a sample of the color and its hex value displays in the Customizations field.
Use this box to modify the selected color's hex value or enter the hex value corresponding to the desired color (for example, #FF0000 or #996600).
Use this dialog to:
Edit the properties for a column or hierarchy level to control the appearance and layout of a column or hierarchy level and its contents
Specify formatting to apply only if the contents of the column or hierarchy level meet certain conditions
Specify the interactions that are to occur when users click in a data view
Set the properties of a column that affect write back
This dialog is also displayed as:
For more information, see:
Use the "Column Properties dialog: Style tab" to format the content of columns and hierarchy levels.
Use the "Column Properties dialog: Column Format tab" to modify how folder and column headings are displayed in the analysis and to specify how repeated values display in the column.
Use the "Column Properties dialog: Data Format tab" to override the data's default display characteristics.
Use the "Column Properties dialog: Conditional Format tab" to add a condition, or filter, to the column or hierarchy level.
Use the "Column Properties dialog: Interaction tab" to specify what you want to happen when the user clicks a value for a column or hierarchy level.
Use the "Column Properties dialog: Write Back tab" to set the properties of a column that allows for writing back values from a table.
Use this button to affect the default property settings for columns and hierarchy levels, based on the specifications in this dialog. You need the appropriate privileges to save the properties as a systemwide default.
Select Restore properties defaults to return the property values for the column or hierarchy level back to the last saved default values.
To restore the defaults that were shipped with the product, you must manually delete the default formats file from the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog.
Select Save as the system-wide default for <name> to save these properties as the systemwide default for this column or hierarchy level in all analyses in which it is used.
Select Save as the system-wide default for this data type to save these properties as the systemwide default for all columns or hierarchy levels that have the same data type as this column or hierarchy level.
Click OK to save these properties for this column or hierarchy level in this analysis only.
The Save as Default button applies slightly differently to the various tabs of this dialog:
The properties on the Style, Column Format, and Data Format tabs are saved or restored when you select an option with this button.
The settings on the Conditional Format tab cannot be saved or restored.
On the Write Back tab, only the Enable Write Back property can be saved or restored.
On the Interaction tab, you can save and restore properties, but the display differs for action links. If you set the interaction mode to action links, then you can create action links and they are displayed in the Action Links area of the tab. If you save the default settings, click OK to close the dialog, then re-display the dialog, you will not see the action links in the Action Links area. You can click the Add Action Link button to display a list of the saved actions so that you can select one to use.
Use this tab of the "Column Properties dialog" to modify how folder and column headings are displayed in the analysis and to specify how repeated values display in the column or hierarchy level.
This dialog is also displayed as:
For more information, see Chapter 7, "Formatting Analyses, Views, and Dashboard Pages".
Not available for hierarchy levels. Use this box to hide the column in the analysis. You can hide columns whose appearance adds no value to the analysis. Hidden columns do not affect the aggregation of the values. For example, you want to build an analysis that includes only customers located in Illinois. To build the proper filter, you must include the column called Customers.State. Because this column was added for filtering purposes, only, and its appearance adds no value to the analysis, then you can hide this column.
Folder Heading and Column Heading
Not available for hierarchy levels. Use these fields to view or modify the name of the folder or column that is provided by the repository in which the column resides. To modify this field, you must first select the Custom Headings box, then you can specify a different heading to use. To modify the heading's appearance, click the Edit Format button.
Use this button to modify the corresponding heading's format. For example, you can modify the heading to be displayed in 14-point bold Helvetica font. Any formatting changes that you specify override the Oracle BI EE style sheet and any formatting preferences that you specified on the "Column Properties dialog: Style tab" for this column.
Use this box to enable the Folder Heading and Column Heading fields for editing. The fields will be read-only until you select this box.
You can reference variables in the Folder Heading and Column Heading fields. For the syntax to use, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
This box displays only for the columns and hierarchy levels that have the date/time data type. Use this box to include the Time Zone button with the column or hierarchy level. Click the box multiple times to move through the three different states. When the box is selected, the button is displayed. When the box is not selected, the button is not displayed. When the box appears to be not available, then the default system behavior is used.
The Time Zone button displays with the data column or hierarchy level in a view, and you can click the button to view the name of the display time zone. For more information about modifying the time zone, see "Display Time Zone" in "Column Properties dialog: Data Format tab".
Use the buttons in this area to affect the display of repeating data values for the column or hierarchy level.
The data in one column or hierarchy level of a folder might be repeated in relation to rows of data in other columns or hierarchy levels in the folder. For example, if one column lists customer names and another column lists the regions that those customers are in, then the region data could be repeated for each customer row. You can choose to display duplicate data only once, or display it for every row. Displaying repeating or duplicated data only once can make a table somewhat easier to read, and can make distinctions in that data more apparent.
You can select one of the following buttons:
Suppress — Displays repeating data only once and suppresses the duplicate rows in the column or hierarchy level.
Repeat — Displays repeating data for every row in the column or hierarchy level.
Default — Retains the default display characteristics of the column or hierarchy level.
Use this tab of the "Column Properties dialog" to add a condition to a column or hierarchy level. You specify a condition to affect the formatting of values based on certain criteria. The formatting that you specify for a column or hierarchy level on this tab will be visible in any view that can display data and its formatting, except for graphs, funnel graphs, and gauges. For information on conditional formatting in graphs, see "Graph Formatting Based on Columns".
This dialog is also displayed as:
For more information, see "Applying Conditional Formatting to Tables and Pivot Tables".
Use this button to begin the process of creating a conditional format by adding a condition to any type of column or to a hierarchy level.
When you access the "New Condition dialog" from the Conditional Format tab, the dialog shows the options that apply to conditional formats. For example, the Operator list contains the operators that are used in conditional formats, and you can apply presentation variables. For information on presentation variables, see "Using Variables".
When you have created a conditional format, you see it listed at the top of this tab. Use the buttons that are displayed with the conditional format to edit the condition, format the values, or delete the format.
Use this button to delete from the tab any conditional formats that you have created. This button is available only when at least one format exists.
Use this tab of the "Column Properties dialog" to override the data's default display characteristics by specifying custom formats. The options that display on this tab depend upon the data type (text, numeric, or date) of the column or hierarchy level. For example, if the data type is numeric, then you can add the thousands separator to the values.
This dialog is also displayed as:
For more information, see "Custom Date and Time Format Strings"
This box is displayed for all data types.
Use this box to specify that you want to enter an override format for the column or hierarchy level. Selecting this box enables the remainder of the settings on the tab.
This list is displayed for the text data type.
Use this list to specify how you want to display the text for the values. You can select from options such as plain text, HTML, or a link. Based on your choice, the Custom Text Format field displays the applicable HTML string used to display the data.
If you select the Custom Text Format option, then you can type the custom format into the Custom Text Format field.
This field is displayed for the text data type.
Use this field to view the HTML string that corresponds to the option that you selected in the Treat Text As list. This field is read-only for all options except the Custom Text Format option.
When you specify the Custom Text Format option, you use this field to write HTML calls that provide formatting. You can also type any valid HTML string, including JavaScript, VBScript, and so on.
The first character must be an at sign character (@). This allows devices that are incapable of displaying the custom format to display the data in the appropriate default format.
For example, the following example HTML code sets the width and height of a column or hierarchy level in tables and pivot tables. In the example, the text html enclosed in brackets ([html]) means to use HTML, and the at sign (@) character represents the dynamic contents of the column or hierarchy level.
@[html]<span style="width:200px; height:50px">@</span>
If you are unfamiliar with HTML, JavaScript, VBScript, and so on, then consult a third-party reference.
This list is displayed for the numeric data type.
Use this list to specify how you want to display the number values. You can select from options such as Currency, Percentage, and Month Name. The option that you select determines the fields that display in the Data Format tab.
This list is displayed if you selected the Currency option in the Treat Number As list.
Use this list to select the currency symbol that you want to be displayed in the column or hierarchy level. For example, you can select the British Pound or the Polish Zloty.
To use the symbol of a user's preferred currency, select the User's Preferred Currency option. (Users specify their preferred currencies in the "My Account dialog".)
This list is displayed if you selected the Number, Currency, or Percentage option in the Treat Number As list.
Use this field to specify how you want negative numbers to be displayed in the column or hierarchy level. For example, you can select negative numbers to be displayed as -123 or (123).
This list is displayed if you selected the Number, Currency, or Percentage option in the Treat Number As list.
Use this list to specify how many numbers you want to include after the decimal point when displaying the value in a view. For example, you can specify two decimal places. Decimal values are always rounded rather than truncated.
In this list, you can use the up to options to indicate the maximum number of decimal places to include. In the database, values for a single column or hierarchy level can be stored with various numbers of decimal places. Some might have 2, 4, or 6 for example. If you specify up to 4 in this list, then values are displayed with no more than 4 decimal places, but potentially with less if the value has less than 4 decimal places.
This check box is displayed if you selected the Number, Currency, or Percentage option in the Treat Number As list.
Select this check box if you want to include a separator, such as a comma, in numbers that are 1000 or greater.
This field is displayed if you selected the Custom option in the Treat Number As list.
Use this field to enter a custom number format. To enter a custom numeric format, you can use the number sign (#) to include significant digits, and the number zero (0) to include as many digits as specified, even if the number does not contain that detail.
For example, specifying ##.# shows 12.34 as 12.3, and specifying ##.000 shows 12.34 as 12.340.
This list is displayed for the date and time zone data type.
Use this list to specify how you want the date to display in the column or hierarchy level. For example, 5/8/2003 07:34:57 AM or 05/08/2003 7:34:57. If you select the Custom option, then you can create a date format in the Custom Date Format field.
This field is displayed for the date and time zone data type. For more information, see "Custom Date and Time Format Strings".
Use this field to enter a date format. This field is displayed if you selected the Custom option from the Date Format list.
This list is displayed for the date and time zone data type.
Use this list to select and apply a specific time zone to the column or hierarchy level. Note the following default conditions:
If you select the Default option and the administrator has specified a system default time zone, then the system default time zone will be used to display the time value in the column or hierarchy level.
If you select the Default option and the administrator has not specified a system default time zone, then the user's preferred time zone will be used to display the time value in the column or hierarchy level.
If you select the Data time zone option, then the time values are displayed in the column or hierarchy level exactly as they are stored in the database.
If you select a specific time zone (for example, GMT +05:45 Kathmandu) and the administrator has specified a system default time zone, then the system's default time zone will be converted into the specific time zone that you selected.
This field is displayed for the date and time zone data type.
Use this field to specify an offset for the time zone that you selected. For example, suppose you selected GMT +05:45 Kathmandu. You can specify an offset of 15 minutes to use when displaying time values for columns or hierarchy levels.
Use this tab of the "Column Properties dialog" to specify what you want to happen when the user clicks a column heading or value (for example, the user can click a column value to drill down into the data that was summed to create the column value).
This dialog is also displayed as:
For more information, see:
Column Heading: Primary Interaction and Value: Primary Interaction
Use this box to specify what happens when you click either the column heading or a value in the column or hierarchy level. The values that are available depend on the type of column and on column heading versus value.
Default (type) — Specifies what happens by default when you click the column heading or a value. When you first install Oracle Business Intelligence, the default is dependent on the type of column. You can change the default by selecting another option from this list, then clicking the Save as Default button to save that option as the default for the column.
None — Specifies that nothing happens when you click the column heading or a value. This option turns off drilling for attribute columns; it does not turn off drilling for hierarchical columns.
Drill — Not available for hierarchical column headings. Specifies that you drill up or down after clicking the column heading or a value for a column.
Action Links — For hierarchical column headings, this option is Drill + Action Links. Displays the Action Links area, where you add action links that apply when you click the column heading or a value.
Send Master-Detail Events — Available only for attribute column values and is shown as Drill + Send Master-Detail Events for hierarchical column values. Use this option to specify that data views in this analysis are to act as master views in master-detail relationships and send master-detail events. This option also displays the Specify channel field, which you must complete if you select this option.
For more information on master-detail relationships, see "What is Master-Detail Linking of Views?"
This field is displayed only if you select Send Master-Detail Events in the Primary Interaction field for a value.
Use this field to enter one or more channels on which data views are to send master-detail events. Note that the name of the channel is case sensitive.
The Action Links area is displayed if you select Action Link from the Column Heading: Primary Interaction box or Value: Primary Interaction box.
Displays the action links that have been added to a column heading or value, including the text of the action links, the actions associated with the links, and whether the action links are always enabled or enabled conditionally.
Use this area to view and manage action links:
To add a new action link, click the Add Action Link button to display the following options:
Action (where Action is the name of an action that has been saved as a default) — Use this option to add the action to the analysis. For more information on saving defaults, see the "Column Properties dialog".
New Action Link — Use this option to display the "New Action Link dialog", where you create a new action link.
To edit an action link, select the link in the list and click the Edit Action Link button to display the "Edit Action Link dialog".
To delete an action link, select the link in the list and click the Delete Action Link button.
To specify that, when only one action link is available at runtime, the action link is to be executed immediately rather than be displayed in a menu for selection, select the Do not display in a popup if only one action link is available at runtime box.
Use this dialog to specify properties for displaying values in various locations such as in a column or hierarchy level of data, in a view such as a table, and in a column or section that you are adding to a dashboard page.
In this dialog, a setting of Default (System) indicates that a user has not yet overridden the default values that were provided during installation. Each property has only one default setting at a time.
For table and pivot table views, the formatting that you specify in this dialog applies to the look of a table. The formatting is displayed slightly differently in a pivot table. For example, the default colors differ for tables and pivot tables.
For more information, see:
Chapter 7, "Formatting Analyses, Views, and Dashboard Pages"
"Changing the Properties of Objects Added to Dashboard Pages"
This dialog is also displayed as:
Note:
Not all components are available in each version of this dialog.The toolbar displays only in those instances in which you can copy and paste cell formatting properties from one location to another. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Clear Cell Format (restore defaults) — Use this button to remove the specifications that you have made and to return the settings to the values that they had when defaults were last saved.
The Clear Cell Format (restore defaults) and the Copy Cell Format buttons affect the settings in the following ways:
If the dialog has no tabs, then the button affects all the settings in the dialog.
If the dialog has multiple tabs, then the button affects only those settings in the tab in which the button is displayed.
Copy Cell Format — Use this button to copy the formatting specifications from the dialog, so that you can apply them elsewhere.
Paste Cell Format — Use this button to paste the formatting that you have copied into the appropriate location.
This box applies to totals that you include with tables and pivot tables. Use this box to specify custom text to insert into a total heading. Enter the text as follows
@ — Displays the value of the data
For example, if a total is specified for the Region column, and you enter the following text into the Caption field for the total heading:
- All values in the @
The total heading would display the following text for the Western Region:
- All values in the Western Region
"@" — Displays the @ symbol
"\"" — Displays the double quote
"\\" — Displays the \ symbol
\ — Displays the \ symbol
The double quote syntax is not limited to a single character. In general you can use a backslash escaped string inside double quotes. For example:
"1234567890\\abc\\d\"x\"yz!@#$%^&*()-+=_{}[];:'|?/><,.` ~"
Is displayed as:
1234567890\abc\d"x"yz!@#$%^&*()-+=_{}[];:'|?/><,.` ~
For more information, see "Adding Totals to Tables and Pivot Tables".
Use this box to select the font family.
Use this field to enter the font size.
Use this box to select the font color.
Use this box to select the font style, such as bold or italic.
Use this box to select the font effects, such as underline or strike through.
Use this box to select the type of horizontal alignment, such as left, right, or center.
Use this box to select the color of the background.
Use this box to select the type of vertical alignment, such as top, bottom, or center. Vertical alignment does not have any impact unless the column spans multiple rows of other columns.
Use this field to specify the image that you want to display inside of the cell. When you click the field, the Graphics dialog is displayed. For more information, see "Graphics dialog".
Use this box to select the position of the border of the cell, column, or section, such as none or all. You can select or deselect custom borders by clicking the top, bottom, left, and right borders near the Position list.
Use this box to select the style of the border, such as single, double, or thick.
Use this box to select the color of the border.
Use this field to specify the width of the cell, column, or section on the page.
Use this field to specify the height.
Use this field to specify the indent (that is, the left padding).
Use this field to specify the indent (that is, the right padding).
Use this field to specify the indent (that is, the top padding).
Use this field to specify the indent (that is, the bottom padding).
Use this box to select a custom cascading style sheet style to use for formatting.
Use this box to select a custom cascading style sheet class to use for formatting.
Use this tab of the "Column Properties dialog" to set the properties of a column that affect writing back values to the data source to expose the write-back capability in tables. If you want to use write back, then you must also use the Table Properties dialog: Write Back tab. Write back is not available for hierarchical columns.
For more information, see "Modifying Values and Performing Write Back".
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this box to allow users to modify values in the column, if the following are true:
If the column has been enabled for write back in the repository.
If the column has a data type of measure, text, or date and time.
Use care when allowing users to enter decimal values. Presentation Services simply sends the value that the user types to the Oracle BI Server, which must be configured to handle users by locale. For example, the Oracle BI Server must be aware of the locale for each user, so that it can properly handle a decimal value that includes either a period or comma as a decimal separator.
If the column has not been enabled for write back in the repository, then the Enable Write Back box is disabled.
When you select this box, additional options for write-back are displayed.
Use this box to select the width for the text field where users enter values, for text columns. Use the box to scroll among the values.
This box is not available on the Write Back Settings dialog.
Use this area to assemble different views for display on a dashboard. The views are displayed in separate containers within a compound layout. Each container has a toolbar.
Use this area also to view multiple compound layouts, each on its own tab. For more information, see "Creating Additional Compound Layouts".
Displays the views assembled for display on a dashboard, according the selected compound layout.
When you run a new analysis, the default assemblage of views can include a title view and either a table or pivot table view. The administrator might have configured a different default assemblage for your company.
The toolbar for each view contains the following buttons:
Format Container — Use this button to display the "Format Container dialog", where you format the container in a compound layout for the view. For example, you can place a green background behind the view in the compound layout. To format the view itself, click the Edit View button.
Edit View — Use this button to display the editor for the view.
Remove View from Compound Layout — Use this button to remove the view from a compound layout. The view remains as part of the analysis.
Use this dialog to send a message to the business owner of a Scorecard object, such as an initiative or objective.
For more information, see:
Displays the name of the person who is responsible for managing and improving the business value and performance of the scorecard object.
Use this box to enter the subject of your message.
Displays the options High, Normal, and Low to identify the importance and urgency of your message.
Use this box to enter the text of your message.
This pane to the right of the "Catalog page" displays the contents of folders and objects that you select in the "Folders pane" or the results of a search. Use this pane to perform tasks such as:
Expand the content of folders
Perform basic tasks on selected objects such as copy and rename
Perform object-specific tasks (create agents for KPIs, and run prompts for example) using the More link below objects.
For information, see "Managing Objects in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog".
Use this dialog to create a delivery profile.
You can create any number of delivery profiles. However, only one profile can be active at any given time.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this field to enter the name of the delivery profile. For example, for your office phone, you might use Phone - Office.
Use this area to indicate, for each of your delivery devices, what priority content is to be delivered to the device. To do so, next to each delivery device that you want to use when this profile is the active profile, select one or more of the priority content options — High, Normal, or Low.
For example, if you have a pager as one of your delivery devices, you might associate it with high priority content only. When you know that you will be away from your office frequently, and out of e-mail range, you might associate your e-mail device with low priority content.
Note:
Do not set the priority for devices that you do not want to use. Devices that do not have a priority selected are not used by the profile.Use this dialog to create a delivery device.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this field to enter the name of the device.
Use this box to select the device category. For example, if you are adding an e-mail device, select Email. The value in this box affects the values that are available in the Device Type box.
Use this box to select the type of device. For example, if you are adding an e-mail device, select either HTML Email for Plaintext Email.
The list of device types is specified on the "Administration: Manage Device Types page".
Use this field to enter the address for the device. For example, for an e-mail device, enter the e-mail address or for a phone, enter the phone number.
Note:
When typing a phone number for a device, do not use punctuation such as spaces, dashes, or parentheses.Use this dialog to create a new action.
For more information, see Chapter 10, "Working with Actions."
This dialog is also displayed as:
This button is not available only for all action types.
Displays one of the following dialogs:
For a Navigate to BI Content action, the "Select BI Content For Action dialog", where you select the Oracle BI EE content to which to navigate
For a Navigate to EPM Content action, the "Select the Hyperion resource you want this action to invoke dialog", where you select the EPM content to which to navigate
For an Invoke a Web Service action, the "Select Web Service Operation dialog", where you select a Web Service operation to be invoked
For an Invoke a Java Method action, the "Select Java Method dialog", where you select the Java method to be invoked
For an Invoke a Browser Script action, the "Select Script Function dialog", where you select the function to be invoked
Note:
Before a JavsScript function can be used in an action, your administrator must first include it in the JavasSript file that contains user-defined scripts.For an Invoke Agent action, the "Select Existing Agent dialog", where you select the agent to be invoked
Note:
In order for Hyperion resources, Web Service operations, EJBs, and functions to be exposed in their respective dialogs, some setup is required beforehand. For how to expose Hyperion resources, Web Service operations, EJBs, and functions in their respective dialogs, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Integrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.This field is available only for Navigate to a Web Page and Invoke an HTTP Request actions and only if URL aliases have been defined for these actions.
Use this field to enter the URL of the Web page.
Tip:
Copy the URL from the browser and paste it in this field.If URL aliases have been defined for Navigate to a Web Page and Invoke an HTTP Request, and you want to specify an alias for the URL, click the Show URL location aliases button (that is, the down arrow) and select the alias.
For more information on defining URL aliases, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Integrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this box to select one of the following options:
GET — Use this option to retrieve information from the URL. Any parameters added to the action are appended to the URL using the following syntax:
¶mName1+paramValue1¶mName2=paramValue2 (and so on)
POST — Use this option to post information to the URL. Any parameters added to the action are posted to the URL as name value pairs.
This field is available only for Invoke an HTTP Request actions.
This button is available only for Navigate to a Web Page and Invoke an HTTP Request actions
Use this button to display the Define Parameters area. It also automatically parses the specified URL for parameters and lists them in the Define Parameters area.
For example, this URL:
http://finance.google.com/finance?q=ORCL
Becomes this:
http://finance.google.com/finance?q=@{1}
And an action parameter with the name 1 and a default value of ORCL is displayed in the Define Parameters area.
Any part of a URL can be converted into a token as long as the token name matches the parameter name. When an action is executed, the value of the parameter is used in the final URL.
This box is available only for Invoke Server Script actions.
Use this box to select the script type — either JavaScript or VB Script.
This field is available only for Invoke Server Script actions.
Use this field to enter the path of the script to be executed. Use a path name relative to the value of the DefaultScriptPath element in the instanceconfig.xml file for Scheduler. (For more information on the DefaultScriptPath element, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.)
This field is available only for Invoke a Browser Script actions.
Use this field to enter the name of the JavaScript function to be executed. Click Browse to display the "Select Script Function dialog", where you can select a script.
This field is available only for Invoke Agent actions.
Displays the path to the agent that is to be invoked.
This box is available only for Invoke Agent actions.
Use this box to select one of the following options to specify the scope of the recipients:
of specified Agent — Specifies the recipients of the agent to be invoked (that is, the agent specified in the Path box).
of current Agent — Specifies the recipients of the current agent (that is, the agent to which the action is being added).
of both specified and current Agent — Specifies the recipients of both the agent to be invoked and the current agent.
common to specified and current Agent — Specifies the recipients that are common to both the agent to be invoked and the current agent.
of specified Agent, and not current Agent — Specifies the recipients of the agent to be invoked but with the recipients of the current agent excluded.
Use this area to define the action parameters.
Depending on the action type, some action parameters might be displayed automatically in this area. For example:
For an Invoke a Web Service action, the parameters are read and displayed from the Web Service Definition Language file.
For an Invoke a Browser Script action, the parameters are read and displayed from the script file, if they have been declared and published in the file.
For a Navigate to E-Business Suite action, these parameters are displayed:
FunctionCode — The name of the function that relates to the target E-Business Suite form, for example, GLXIQJRN.
ConnectionPool — The name of the connection pool for the Oracle E-Business Suite database in the Oracle BI repository, for example, EBS12.
You can also define optional parameters for passing the context from Oracle Business Intelligence to EBS forms.
This area includes the following columns:
Name — Use this column to view, edit, or enter the name of the parameter.
For Navigate to a Web Page and Invoke an HTTP Request actions, to embed a parameter value anywhere within the URL, enter the token @{Name} where 'Name' is the value specified in the Name column below. There is no limit to the number of parameters that can be embedded.
Prompt — Use this column to enter the prompt to be displayed to users, if the user is to provide the parameter value.
Value — Use this column to enter the parameter value. Click the Change type of value button to select one of the following types of values and then specify the value:
Value — Select this option to specify a value and then enter the value in the field.
Session Variable — Select this option to use the value of a session variable, and then enter the name of the session variable in the field, or click the Show popular Session variables button (to the right of this field) and select a session variable from a list of commonly-used variables.
Repository Variable — Select this option to use the value of a repository variable and then enter the name of the repository value in the field.
Request Column — Select this option to display the "Choose Request Column dialog", where you select the column in an analysis whose value is to be used as the value of an action parameter.
This option is available only when you are adding an inline action to an agent that will be conditionally executed based on an analysis.
Column Value — Select this option to use a column value in your analysis criteria and then click the Column Value button and select the column.
For example, suppose you have the Region and District columns in your analysis criteria and define an action link on the District column that maps a parameter to the Region column. When you execute that action link (by clicking on a district), the region value for that district is used. Note that in a pivot table, the mapped values depend on the current layout or state of the table.
This option is available only when you are adding an inline action to an analysis.
For more information on session and repository variables, see "Using Variables".
Fixed — Use this column to specify whether to allow users to see but not set the parameter. Select the box to allow users to see but not set the parameter. Deselect this box to allow users to see and set the value.
Hidden — Use this column to specify whether to hide the parameter from users. Select the box to hide the parameter from users. Deselect this box to show the parameter to users.
Optional — Use this column to specify whether the parameter requires a value before the action can be executed. Select this box to make the value optional. Deselect this box to make the value required.
Add Parameter — Use this button to add a parameter. (Whether you can add a parameter for an action, depends on the action type.)
Delete Parameter — Use this button to delete a parameter.
This area is available only for an action that invokes an agent that is conditional based on an analysis that filters its data by a column prompt.
Use this area to map any column of the specified agent (that is, the agent to be invoked) that contains a column prompt to any to column of the current agent (that is, the agent to which the action is being added). At runtime, the system generates a filter based on the data returned by the execution of the conditional analysis of the current agent.
For more on how filters work in an Invoke Agent action, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Integrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
This button is available only for actions where it is appropriate to display information to users. For example, this option is not available for actions added to agents.
Use this button to display the "Action Options dialog", where you specify information to display to users when they run an action.
This button is available only on the Edit Action dialog for named actions.
Use this button to display the dialog, where you save the action to the catalog as a new action with another name.
For more information about creating and deploying Web Service operations, EJBs, or scripts to be used in actions, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Integrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this dialog to create a new agent from a KPI.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter a name for the agent.
Use this field to enter a description of the agent.
Use this field to select a folder or create a new folder in which to save the agent. To create a new folder, click the New Folder option in the list to display the "Create New Folder dialog". To select a folder that is not listed, click the Folder button to display the "Select Agent Location dialog".
Trigger Agent if KPI Status is
Use this box to select the KPI status that is to initiate the agent to deliver its content and execute its actions.
Displays the dimensions that must be pinned. Select a value for each dimension.
Use this dialog to create a delivery device type. This dialog is displayed from the "Administration: Manage Device Types page".
For more information, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
This dialog is also displayed as:
Enter the name of the device type.
Use this box to select the category of the device type. Select from Mobile Phone, Pager, or Handheld Device.
Enter the domain or e-mail extension of the service provider, such as pagenet.net.
Use this dialog to assign a specific permission or build a specific set of permissions for a catalog object. For information about assigning detailed privileges that further refine the tasks users can perform, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
For more information, see:
Use this option to enable users to view, but not modify, the object.
Use this option to enable users to run or launch the programs or applications associated with the object, such as an agent or the actions for an action link.
Use this option to give the user authority to bypass any permissions set on the folder that would prevent the user from accessing the object. Note that this option does not change the folder's permissions. For example, if you grant users Traverse Folder permission to the /Shared Folders/Test folder, they cannot access objects in the/Shared Folders/Test folder but can access objects stored in lower-level folders, such as the /Shared Folders/Test/Guest folder.
Use this option to enable users to modify the object.
Use this option to enable users to delete the object.
Use this option to enable users to modify or assign other permissions to the object.
Use this option to enable users to specify the owner of the object.
This option displays for all object types; however, you can only apply it to Oracle BI Publisher objects. Use this option to allow the user to run the report. When the user runs the report, the report will be compiled using the most current data.
This option displays for all object types; however, you can only apply it to Oracle BI Publisher objects. Use this option to allow the user to schedule the report.
This option displays for all object types; however, you can only apply it to Oracle BI Publisher objects. Use this option to allow the user to view, but not run or modify, the report.
Use this dialog to specify a background image for the diagram in a custom view.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the location of the image.
Use this check box to specify whether to resize the image to fit the diagram.
Use this check box to specify whether to maintain the aspect ratio of the image.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Custom View tab" to specify supporting information for a custom view.
For more information, see:
Displays the name of the custom view.
Use this field to enter a description of the custom view.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the custom view. To specify the business owner, click the Set User button to display the "Business Owner dialog", where you can search for and select the business owner.
Use this table to view and manage the objectives and KPIs that are displayed in the custom view.
Use the "Related Documents area" to view and manage documents that provide supporting information to the custom view.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Custom View tab" to create a diagram that shows a customized view of your business and strategy data.
For more information, see:
Use this area to drag and drop objectives and KPIs that you want to show in your customized view.
Each node (that is, the representation of an objective or KPI) on the diagram shows the status of the objective or KPI by displaying the icon and color that represents the assessment range. A KPI node also displays the actual value of the KPI and the percent variance from the target.
To display options that allow you to work with a node, click the Options button (on the right side of the node) to display the "Node Options Menu".
To display additional performance data for the KPI, such as target value or variance, click the down arrow at the bottom center of the node. To collapse this data, click the up arrow.
To zoom in and zoom out of the diagram or to specify a background image for the diagram, use the toolbar buttons on the "Scorecard editor: Custom View tab".
To work with comments (if any), click the Comment button in the upper-right corner of a node to display the "Status window", where you can read the comments that previously have been added, add another comment, or reply to a comment. See "About Comments".
To work with status overrides (if any), click the red asterisk in a node to display the "Status window", where you can view the overrides that previously have been applied or apply another override. See "About Status Overrides".
Use this dialog to customize a condition that is based on an analysis that includes one or more prompted filters. (A prompted filter is a filter whose operator is set to Is Prompted.)
For more information, see "Agent editor: Condition tab".
This dialog is also displayed as:
Displays the prompted filters associated with the analysis.
Click the Edit button adjacent to a prompted filter to display the "Edit Parameter Filter dialog", where you edit the filter.
Use this box to customize the minimum or maximum gauge limit.
For more information, see "Gauge Properties dialog: Scale tab".
Use this box to specify the custom gauge limit by selecting one of the following options:
Static Value — Select this option to specify a static value, such as 1000. You can specify either an actual value or a percentage. The value you specify depends on the range of data points. For example, the maximum gauge limit should be more than the maximum data point so that all data points are shown on the gauge.
Variable Expression — Select this option to specify a string. When you select this option, the Default Value field is displayed in which you enter the string.
You can reference one or more variables in the string (or expression). For example, you might reference a presentation variable named MaxSales. For guidelines on referencing a variable in an expression, see Table 2-2. For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Column — Select this option to specify a measure column and then select the name of the column, for example, Dollars.
Note:
Only columns that are in the metadata repository or that are based on repository columns (such as Dollars*0.10) are displayed as selections.SQL Statement — Select this option to specify a SQL statement and enter the SQL statement, for example:
"Sales Measure"."Year Ago Dollars"*10
Use this dialog to set the value for one of the following items for a graph:
Position of a line scale marker
Low value of a range scale marker
High value of a range scale marker
To set the value, you can use a static value, a presentation variable, a measure column, or a SQL query. If a value is not valid, then the scale marker is ignored.
For more information, see "Scale Markers dialog".
Use this option to set the value to a hard coded value that you specify. If you select this option, then enter the hard coded value in the field to the right of the option.
Use this option to set the value to the value of a presentation variable. If you select this option, then enter the presentation variable in the field to the right of the option and a default value in the (default) field.
Use this option to set the value based on a measure column. If you select this option, then select the measure column in the box to the right of the option.
Note that using a measure column could yield numerous values. Only the first value is applied.
Use this option set the value based on the results of a SQL query. If you select this option, then enter the SQL query in the box beneath the option.
Note that the results could be a table but only the first row and first column cell value is applied.
Use this dialog to customize an agent subscription.
For more information, see "Customizing Your Agent Subscriptions".
Use "Customize Subscription to Agent dialog: Condition Parameters tab" to customize prompted filters for an analysis that is used in an agent condition.
Use "Customize Subscription to Agent dialog: Content Parameters tab" to customize prompted filters for an analysis that is the delivery content for an agent.
Use this tab of the "Customize Subscription to Agent dialog" to customize prompted filters for an analysis that is used in an agent condition.
For more information, see "Customizing Your Agent Subscriptions".
Displays the prompted filters that you can customize.
Modify operator/value for this parameter
Use this button to displays the "Edit Parameter Filter dialog", where you can customize the prompted filters.
Use this tab of the "Customize Subscription to Agent dialog" to customize prompted filters for an analysis that is the delivery content for an agent.
For more information, see "Customizing Your Agent Subscriptions".
Displays the prompted filters that you can customize.
Modify operator/value for this parameter
Use this button to displays the "Edit Parameter Filter dialog", where you can customize the prompted filters.
Use this Dashboard builder to build or edit dashboards. The process of building or editing a dashboard includes:
Adding and changing pages, objects, and other content on the dashboard
Changing the properties of the dashboard
For more information, see:
Use the tabs across the top of the editor to select the dashboard page that you want to edit.
Use the "Dashboard Objects pane" to select the objects that you want to include on a dashboard page and drag and drop them to the Page Layout area.
Use the "Catalog pane" to select objects from the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog that you want to include on a dashboard page and drag and drop them to the Page Layout area. This adds a shortcut to the content as saved in the catalog. If the content changes, then the change will be reflected on the dashboard page.
To locate the content, you can browse by either the catalog folder it is stored in, or by the dashboard on which it is located.
Use "Page Layout area" to layout and place the content (that is, objects from the Dashboard Objects pane and the Catalog pane) that you want to include on a dashboard.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Add Dashboard Page — Use this button to display the "Add Dashboard Page dialog", where you create a new page in this dashboard. The page is displayed in a new tab in the Dashboard builder.
Delete Current Page — Use this button to delete the current dashboard page.
Tools — Use this button to display a menu with the following options.
Dashboard Properties — Use this option to display the "Dashboard Properties dialog", where you specify properties of the dashboard and of dashboard pages.
Print and PDF Properties — Use this option to display the "Print Options dialog", where you specify page settings and header and footer content for the PDF output.
Page Report Links — Use this option to display the "Report Links dialog", where you specify the links to apply to all analyses in the dashboard page, unless customized settings have been specified for particular analyses.
Allow Saving Personal Customizations — Use this option to specify whether users can save personal customizations. For more information on allowing the saving of personal customizations, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Publish Page to Dashboard — Use this option to display the "Publish Page to Dashboard dialog", where you specify the dashboard to which you want to publish the current dashboard page. See "Publishing Dashboard Pages".
Preview — Use this button to view how a dashboard page will look to an end user. This is helpful if you want to see what the page will look like before you save the content.
Run — Use this button to exit the Dashboard builder and return to the dashboard in runtime.
Save — Use this button to save your changes to the dashboard.
Save Dashboard As — Use this button to save the dashboard by another name.
Use this area to layout and add the content that you want on a dashboard by dragging and dropping objects from the "Dashboard Objects pane" and "Catalog pane". After you drop an object to this area, you can modify the object using the buttons on its Toolbar.
This area is part of the "Dashboard builder".
Each object that you drag and drop to the Page Layout area is represented by a rectangle.
Each object dropped to the Page Layout area contains a toolbar that displays when you hover over the object. The Object Toolbar contains the following buttons:
Properties — Use this button to select from various options for modifying the object. What this button displays depends on the type of object. For some objects a properties dialog is displayed. For other objects, a menu of options is displayed. See "Properties Buttons for Objects".
Delete — Use this button to delete the object from the dashboard page.
Vertical Layout — This button is available for sections only. Use this button to arrange the objects in the section so that they are stacked one on top of another.
Horizontal Layout — This button is available for sections only. Use this button to arrange the objects in the section so that they are positioned side-by-side.
Each object that is represented on the "Page Layout area" has a toolbar that contains a Properties button. What the button displays depends on the type of object. The following sections describe, for each type of object, what the Properties button displays.
This button displays the following options:
Break — This option is available only if the page has more than one column and only for columns after the first column. Use this option to display the "Break dialog", where you add page and column breaks to the page layout.
Column Properties — Use this option to display the "Column Properties dialog", where you specify the properties for the column, such as cell alignment, border color and so on.
This button displays the following options:
Condition — Use this option to display the "Section Condition dialog", where you specify the condition to be used to determine whether the section is to be displayed. See "Using Conditions to Determine Whether Sections Are Displayed in Dashboard Pages".
Permissions — Use this option to display the "Section Permissions dialog", where you specify which accounts are granted or denied access to the section.
Format Section — Use this option to display the "Section Properties dialog", where you specify the properties for the section, such as cell alignment, border color and so on.
Rename — Use this option to display the "Rename dialog", where you rename the section.
Drill in Place — Use this option to specify how the results are displayed when a user drills in an analysis.
To:
Show the new results directly in the dashboard, replacing the original analysis, click this option until a check mark is displayed next to the option. This is the default behavior. The area occupied by the original analysis resizes automatically to hold the new results.
Replace the entire dashboard with the new results, click this option until the check mark is removed.
This option applies to all drillable analyses within the section. The user can click the browser's Back button to return to the original analysis or the dashboard.
Use this option for prompts that are created for hierarchical columns.
For more information, see "Drilling in Views".
Collapsible — Use this option to specify whether the user can expand and collapse this section on a dashboard page or whether the section is always expanded.
Show Section Header — Use this option to specify whether to display the header for the section, which initially includes the title of the section. You can hide the title using the Show Section Title option.
Show Section Title — Use this option to specify whether to display the title of the section.
To format the title, use the Rename option to display the "Rename dialog".
This button displays the following options:
Section Condition — Use this option to display the "Section Condition dialog", where you specify the condition to be used to determine whether the alert section is to be displayed.
Permissions — Use this option to display the "Section Permissions dialog", where you specify which accounts are granted or denied access to the section.
Format Section — Use this option to display the "Section Properties dialog", where you specify the properties for the alert section, such as cell alignment, border color and so on.
Use this button to display the "Action Link Properties dialog", where you set the properties of an action link.
Use this button to display the "Action Link Menu Properties dialog", where you set the properties of an action links menu.
Use this button to display the "Link or Image Properties dialog", where you specify properties for a text link or image link that you are adding to a dashboard page.
Use this button to display the "Embedded Content Properties dialog", where you specify the URL and other information about content that you want to embed on a dashboard page.
Use this button to display the "Text Properties dialog", where you specify properties for a text object, including the text and formatting tags.
Use this button to display the "Folder Properties dialog", where you add a view of a Catalog folder and its contents.
BI Publisher Report Properties
Use this button to display the "BI Publisher Report Properties dialog", where you specify the information for adding an Oracle BI Publisher report.
This button displays the following options:
Display Results — Displays the following options to specify how to display the results of the analysis:
Embedded in Section — Use this option to execute the analysis automatically and display the results directly in the dashboard page
Link - Within the Dashboard — Use this option display a link that users must click to execute the request and see the results within the dashboard
Link - In a Separate Window — Use this option display a link that users must click to execute the request and see the results in a new window
Report Links — Use this option to display the "Report Links dialog", where you select which links are displayed with the analysis on the dashboard page.
Show View — Use this option to specify how to display the analysis, either as a default compound view or as one of the available views. (Note that the icon representing the object changes to indicate the type of view.) For more information on views, see. "Adding Views for Display in Dashboards".
Rename — Use this option to display "Rename dialog", where you rename the analysis.
Edit Analysis — Use this option to edit the analysis in the "Analysis editor".
This button displays the following options:
Edit — Displays the "Prompt editor", where you create prompts.
Scope — Displays the following options to specify scope of the prompt:
Dashboard — Use this option to specify that the prompt applies to the entire dashboard.
Page — Use this option to specify that the prompt applies to the dashboard page.
This button displays the following options:
Edit Pinnings — Displays the "Dimension Pinnings dialog", where you pin (or set) the value of one or more KPI dimensions.
Edit View — Displays the scorecard object in the "Scorecard editor".
Format View — Displays the "Scorecard Content Properties dialog", where you specify how the scorecard object is to be formatted.
Use this pane to select the dashboard objects that you want to include on a dashboard page and drag and drop them to the "Page Layout area".
For more information, see "Adding Content to Dashboards".
This pane is part of the "Dashboard builder".
Use the list of dashboard objects to decide what to include on a dashboard page. Drag and drop an object from the list to an appropriate location in the page layout area on the right side of the Dashboard builder.
For more information on dragging and dropping, see "Dragging and Dropping Objects to the Page Layout Area in the Dashboard Builder".
Table B-2 lists and describes the dashboard objects that you can include on a dashboard page.
Table B-2 List of Dashboard Objects
| Dashboard Object | Description |
|---|---|
|
Column |
Used to align content on a dashboard. (Sections within columns hold the actual content.) You can create as many columns on a dashboard page as you need. Note that the columns used in the Dashboard builder are not related to the columns used in the Analysis editor. |
|
Section |
Used within columns to hold the content, such as action links, analyses, and so on. You can drag and drop as many sections as you need to a column. |
|
Alert Section |
Used to add a section in which to display Alerts from agents, if any. On users' My Dashboard, an Alert section is added automatically to the first page, if you do not manually place one there. You cannot disable the appearance of an Alert section on the first page of users' My Dashboard. You can add an Alert section to an additional dashboard page so that section will then be displayed on both dashboard pages. |
|
Action Link |
Used to add an action link. An action link is a link that you embed in an analysis, dashboard page, or KPI that, when clicked, runs an associated action. For more information, see Chapter 10, "Working with Actions." |
|
Action Link Menu |
Used to add an action link menu. An action link menu let users choose, from a list of action links, the right action to be executed. For more information, see Chapter 10, "Working with Actions." Tip: If you add an action link to an action link menu and later decide that you do not want the link to be displayed in the menu, you can simply drag and drop it elsewhere on the page. |
|
Link or Image |
Used to add text links and image links and specify what should happen when a user clicks them. For example, you can direct users to another Web site or dashboard, open documents, launch applications, or perform any other action that the browser supports. You can also add an image or text only, without any links. |
|
Embedded Content |
Used to add embedded content. Embedded content is any content that is displayed within a window (called a frame) inside the dashboard, as opposed to content that is accessed by clicking a link. Content that you might want to embed includes analyses, Excel charts, documents, Web sites, tickers from Web sites, and so on. When you embed content into a dashboard, the required HTML is automatically added to the target content. Analyses are embedded by default. Embedding an analysis in a dashboard causes it to execute automatically and to display the results within the dashboard. This provides access to current results. Note: Some third-party Web sites, because of the way they have been created, cannot be embedded within another Web page. If you see unexpected results when viewing an embedded Web site, then you might need to click the browser's Back button until an Oracle Business Intelligence screen reappears, or close and then reopen the browser. Then, remove the embedded Web site from the dashboard. |
|
Text |
Used to add plain text or, if allowed at your organization, HTML. See the administrator to find out if adding HTML is allowed at your organization. If you want to add embedded content, which is content that is displayed in a window within the browser, then use the Embedded Content object instead. Then, using the Embedded Content feature, specify the name and location of the target, and the required HTML is wrapped around the target for you. |
|
Folder |
Used to add a view of a Catalog folder and its contents. For example, you might add a folder that contains a collection of saved analyses that you run frequently. Then from the dashboard, you can open the folder, navigate to a saved request, and click it to run it. |
Use this dialog to add hidden named prompts to a dashboard or a dashboard page.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Embed New Hidden Dashboard Prompt
Use this button to access the "Open dialog", which allows you to browse and select the named prompt that you want to add to the dashboard. After you select a prompt, its path displays in the Prompts Path table.
Use this button to access the "Open dialog", which allows you to browse and replace the currently selected prompt with another prompt. After you select another prompt, its path is displayed in the Prompts Path table.
Use this button to delete the selected prompt.
Displays the paths of the hidden prompts that you added to the dashboard. You can select a prompt and then click the Edit or Remove button to replace or delete the prompt.
Use this dialog to change the properties of a dashboard and its pages.
For more information, see "Changing the Properties of a Dashboard and its Pages".
Use this option to select a style for the dashboard. Styles control how dashboards and results are formatted for display. The administrator might have created styles that you can choose from. If not, analyses are formatted using a default style.
For more information about styles, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this field to enter a description for the dashboard. Descriptions are displayed when administrators use the Catalog Manager. The description is not displayed on the dashboard.
Click this button adjacent to the Filters and Variables heading to display the "Dashboard Filters and Variables dialog", where you add hidden named prompts to the whole dashboard. See "Adding a Hidden Dashboard Prompt to a Dashboard or Dashboard Page".
Use this button to display the "Report Links dialog", where you select which links are to be displayed with all analyses on the dashboard, unless customized settings have been specified for an individual dashboard page or analysis.
Displays the pages in the dashboard. Use this area to perform operations (such as hide or rename) on dashboard pages using the dashboard pages toolbar buttons.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Rename — Use this button to display the "Rename dialog", where you specify a new name for the page in the dashboard.
Select a prompt to capture default filters and variables — Use this button to display the "Filters and Variables - page dialog", which allows you to add hidden named prompts to the dashboard page. See "Adding a Hidden Dashboard Prompt to a Dashboard or Dashboard Page".
Permissions — Use this button to display the "Permission dialog", where you specify which accounts have which levels of access to the contents of the dashboard page.
The Permissions button is displayed for shared dashboards only, and only if your user ID is authorized to access the security features.
Delete — Use this button to delete the page from the dashboard. After you click the button, you see a page that prompts you to confirm the deletion.
Specify Who Can Save Shared Customizations — Use this button to display the Permission dialog, where you specify which accounts can save shared customizations for the page.
Specify Who Can Assign Default Customizations — Use this button to display the Permission dialog, where you specify which accounts can assign default customizations for the page.
For more information on setting these permissions, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Note:
These operations are not reversed when you click Cancel in this dialog.Use this box to specify whether the page is to be displayed when the dashboard is shown. This option is helpful when you are working with a dashboard page and want to hide it from users until your changes are complete. When you select this option, the page remains visible to any users who are currently viewing it.
Use this box to specify whether the Page Options menu for the page contains the Add to Briefing Book option. For more information on the Add to Briefing Book option, see "Dashboard page".
Use these buttons to specify the order of the pages on the dashboard.
To move a dashboard page up in the list, click the Move Up button.
On the dashboard, this moves the tab for the page to the left.
To move a page down in the list, click the Move Down button.
On the dashboard page, this moves the tab for the page to the right.
Use a dashboard page to view and navigate a dashboard.
For more information, see:
Use the tabs across the top of the viewer to select the dashboard page that you want to view and navigate.
The toolbar contains the Page Options button, which displays the following options:
Edit Dashboard — Use this button to display the "Dashboard builder", where you modify the dashboard, if you have the appropriate permissions.
Permissions to modify dashboards (personal and shared) are granted by the administrator.
For more information on the Dashboard builder, see "What Is the Dashboard Builder?"
Print — Use this option to print the current dashboard page as either HTML or PDF.
Refresh — Use this option to refresh the results of analyses included in the dashboard page.
Add to Briefing Book — (This option is not available on an empty dashboard page or if the Show Add to Briefing Book box in the "Dashboard Properties dialog" has not been selected for the page.) Use this option to display the "Save Briefing Book Content dialog", where you add the contents of a dashboard page to a briefing book.
For more information, see "What Are Briefing Books?" and "Adding Content to New or Existing Briefing Books".
Create Bookmark Link — Use this option to create a bookmark link.
This link is not available if the administrator has disabled it. For more information on controlling the display of this option, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
For more information, see "What Are Bookmark Links?" and "Creating Links to Dashboard Pages".
Create Prompted Link — Use this option to create a prompted link.
This link is not available if the administrator has disabled it. For more information on controlling the display of this option, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
For more information, see "What Are Prompted Links?" and "Creating Links to Dashboard Pages".
Apply Saved Customization — Use this option to apply a saved customization — either a personal saved customization or a shared saved customization.
For more information, see "Applying Saved Customizations".
Save Current Customization — Use this option to save your current customization.
Note:
Values that you pin for KPI dimensions referenced in scorecards are not saved with this option. For more information on pinning values, see "What Are Dimensions and Pinned Dimension Values?"For more information, see "Saving Customizations".
Edit Saved Customizations — Displays the "Edit Saved Customizations dialog", in which you edit details of your saved customizations.
For more information, see "Editing Saved Customizations".
Clear My Customization — Use this option to clear your current customization.
For more information, see "Clearing Your Current Customization".
Use this pane to add, organize, and manage the prompt's columns. You can use column prompts, image maps, currency prompts, and variable prompts.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Prompt editor".
Use this table to view high-level information about the prompt's columns. You can also use this table to select columns for editing or deleting, arrange the order in which the prompts are displayed to the user, or insert row or column breaks between prompt items.
Note the following Definition Table components.
Label — This column displays the prompt label that you specified when creating the item. This field is read-only. To edit this field, select the table row and click the Edit button.
Type — This column displays the prompt type that corresponds to the item. The prompt types are: column, image, currency, or variable. This field is read-only.
Prompt For — This column displays the data column that corresponds to the item. This field is read-only.
Description — This column displays the items description that you entered in the Edit Prompt or New Prompt page. You can edit this column by placing your cursor in the field and typing.
Required— When this column contains a green check mark, it indicates that the user must select or enter a value for this prompt item. The content designer designates a prompt as required by Selecting the Require user input check box in the "New Prompt dialog". When no check mark is displayed in this column, the user does not have to select or enter a value and can select to skip the prompt item. This field is read-only.
New Column— This column indicates how the items in the prompt are structured on the page. When you select a prompt's New Column check box, the corresponding item is moved to a new column on the page and to the right of the item before it in the table. When you deselect the check box, the corresponding item is displayed below the item before it in the table.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Preview — Use this button to view and test the prompt. When you preview the prompt, it will display in a new browser window and include data from the subject area.
New — Click this button to add a column to the prompt. After you click this button, you then choose which prompt type you want to add (for example, Column Prompt or Image Prompt).
The page that displays after you click the New button will depend upon the prompt item type that you select. Note the following:
Select Column Prompt, Variable Prompt, or Currency Prompt to display the "New Prompt dialog".
The Currency Prompt option is available only if the administrator has configured the userpref_currencies.xml file as described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Select Image Prompt to display the "Image Map Prompt Properties dialog".
Open — Click this button to display the "Open dialog", where you can open a saved Catalog object.
Insert Page Break — Click this button to insert a new prompts page after the selected prompt item. This functionality, as well as the New Column option in the Definition table, allows you to arrange a complex prompt into an intuitive, easy-to-use interface.
After you insert a new prompts page, you can highlight the page's row in the table and click the Edit button to display the "Edit Page Settings dialog". Use this dialog to modify the page title, instructions, and page formatting.
Edit — Click this button to display the "New Prompt dialog", where you can modify the prompts preferences. For example, click this button if you want to change a column's display option from Radio Button to Checkbox.
Delete — Click this button to delete the prompt item that you selected in the Definition Table.
Use this dialog to pin (or set) the value of one or more KPI dimensions. You set values of KPI dimensions, for example, when you add a strategy map that contains one or more KPIs that are dimensioned to a dashboard.
Pinning is optional. Typically, it is best not to pin most of the dimensions so that the data will be controlled by the point of view settings.
For more information, see:
Displays a list of the dimensions to be pinned.
To pin a dimension, click the down arrow to the right of the dimension and select one of the following options:
A specific value
Use Variable — Use this option to display the "Select Variable dialog", where you specify a variable to use to set the value. For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Not Pinned — Use this option to specify that, initially, all dimension values are to be used. However, if, on a dashboard page, Scorecard, or KPI Watchlist, a control is provided, a user can dynamically change the value to explore the data.
Use this pane to view the prompt's layout and design. The Display pane is updated as you use the "Definition pane" to arrange the prompt items and the "Prompt editor" to add and modify prompt items. The items displayed in the Display pane do not access the prompt's data source and, therefore, do not include the columns' data selection options. To test the prompt with data selection options and view the resulting dashboard or analysis, click Preview.
For more information about creating and adding prompts, see:
This pane is part of the "Prompt editor".
Use this button to access the"Edit Page Settings dialog" to specify the prompt page's title and instructional text, as well as the text and tables formats (for example, font size, cell color, and border width).
Use this dialog to work with values as part of the "Select Values dialog".
Use this area to work with values in the following ways:
Enter values into the list of selected values.
Copy values from a previously saved list (for example a list of values in Excel) into the list of selected values.
Copy values from the selected list of values.
Separate values that you enter with carriage returns (Enter key) or pipe (|) characters. Values that you copy in can be separated by carriage returns (the Enter key), | (pipe) characters, or tabs.
Press the Tab key to move the focus to the OK button.
Use this dialog to edit a map from the Background Maps tab of the "Administration: Manage Map Data page". Before editing a background map, add layers using the Layers tab. A background map is a non-interactive map that serves as a base for the map view. It might display a satellite image or a map with roads. (A background map is referred to as a "tile" in MapViewer.)
The functions of the Administration page are described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this field to enter the name of the map.
Use this field to enter a description of the map, which is displayed in the following locations:
On the Maps tab of the Administration page.
As a tooltip for the map when selecting a map from the list, when editing the map view.
Use this area to specify the layers from the Oracle Database that will be available on the map and their zoom level. The first time that you display this dialog after adding a map, this area lists any appropriate layers that are specified on the Layers tab, with their default zoom level settings.
The layers are listed from bottom to top, in terms of how they are applied to the map. A sample order is Countries, States, Cities. The lower level layers generally have the lower zoom levels. For example, if you have a States layer and a Cities layer, then include lower zoom levels for State than City.
This area contains the following components:
Click the Add Layers button to display a list of the layers that have been imported on the Layers tab and associated with a BI column, then select the layers to add to the map. When you add a layer that is part of the map definition from MapViewer, the layer displays at its default zoom levels. If the layer is not part of the map definition, then specify the zoom levels yourself.
Click the Sort Layers By Zoom Level button to list the layers in ascending or descending order based on visibility on the map. The sort order that is specified here does not affect the order in which layers are applied on the map. Instead, the sorting order affects the zoom levels. For example, the States layer might have zoom levels 1 through 3 and the Cities layer has zoom levels 4 through 9. The lower layers have the lower zoom level numbers. The zoom levels that you specify correspond to the tick marks on the zoom slider on the map.
Click the Turn On Layer Visibility or Turn Off Layer Visibility button to control the visibility of layers on the map. Use the buttons to indicate whether the layer is visible in the Preview map in this dialog only. The layer is still visible on a map view. You can modify the zoom levels for a layer with a visibility turned off.
Click a cell under a zoom level for a layer to see one of the following:
If you click a blue cell that is between other blue cells, then you see a popup menu with Clear Left and Clear Right buttons, which allow you to change the zoom level in either direction. For example, if you click the cell for zoom level 4 and click the eraser on the right, all cells to the right are cleared for that zoom level.
If you click a blue cell that at the end of a line of blue cells, then the cell turns white to indicate that it is no longer part of that zoom level.
If you click a white cell, then you increase the zoom level on either side of the existing blue cells. For example, suppose cells 4 through 6 are colored blue to reflect the zoom level. If you click in cell 2, then the zoom level becomes 2 through 6.
If you do not set any zoom levels for a layer, then that layer will not display on the map.
Hover over the layer name to display a More menu from which you can make the following selections:
Delete — Deletes the layer from the Interactive BI Layers area. The layer continues to be available on the Layers tab and can be added to this area again.
Move Up or Move Down — Moves the layer up or down so you can specify the order in which layers are applied to the map.
Reset to Default Visibility — Resets the current visibility range for this layer as defined in the underlying map definition. If this layer is not natively associated with the map, then this option is disabled for that layer.
Use the yellow border that surrounds the column of boxes for a zoom level to determine which zoom level is currently displayed in the map area.
Use this area to specify how the map will be displayed to users. Use the panning and zooming controls to affect the display of the map. If you hover over the zoom slider, then you see tooltips that specify the names of the layers that are currently associated with that zoom level.
Use this dialog to edit a briefing book. You can reorder content, delete content, and change the content type, the number of navigation links to follow, and the content description.
For more information, see:
Displays the contents of the briefing book. To edit or delete content, select the content and then use the toolbar buttons. To reorder content, select the content and drag and drop it to the desired location.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Edit Page — Use this button to display the "Page Properties dialog", where you can change the content type, the number of navigation links to follow, and the content description of the currently selected content.
Delete Page — Use this button to delete the currently selected content.
Use this dialog to:
Specify custom text for headings for a column's folder and for a column.
Specify the aggregation rule for the column totals for an attribute or measure columns or for a KPI-related formula.
Edit the formula for an attribute or measure column. A column formula specifies what the column values represent. By editing this formula, you can present analysis results in a variety of ways.
Create formulas that calculate KPI actual values, target values, and thresholds.
You cannot customize headings, specify the aggregation rule, or edit the formula for a hierarchical column or for a hierarchy level; however, you can specify a hierarchical column within a formula for an attribute or measure column.
For more information, see:
Use the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab" to customize headings, specify the aggregation rule, and edit the formula for a column.
Use the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Bins tab" to combine values for the column into sets.
Use this tab of the "Edit Column Formula dialog" to perform "binning," which allows you to combine values for the column into sets. For example, suppose that the Region column has a value EASTERN. You can specify "My Home Region" instead as the text that displays for that value in the view that displays that column's data.
Binning differs from groups in that groups allow the view to display each member that is part of the group. For information, see "What are Groups?"
For more information, see "Editing the Formula for a Column".
Use this button to display the "New Filter dialog", where you can create a filter expression to display as a CASE statement in the Formula area of the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab".
You can combine multiple values or ranges of values from a given column into bins. When you add and name the bins, all instances of the various values that comprise the bin in the result set are replaced by the bin name. Aggregations are performed accordingly as well. For example, you can specify that all values over $10M are displayed as "My10M."
Displays the list of bins that you have created for this column using the Add Bin button. Use the following buttons within this list:
Edit Bin Filter — Displays the "Edit Filter dialog", where you can edit the filter for the bin.
Edit Bin Name — Displays a dialog in which you can edit the name for the bin.
Delete — Removes the bin from the list.
Move Up or Move Down — Moves the bin up or down one place within the list. The order of bins in the list is significant. You can include a certain value within multiple bins. However, the value is used only by the first bin that encounters it.
Create a bin for all other values
Use this box to create an entry in the Bins list called "All other values" and to display the dialog in which you can enter a name for this bin. This bin includes all values that have not yet been included in another bin in the list. You cannot edit the filter for this bin nor can you reorder it. It must be the last bin in the list.
Treat result as a numeric value or expression
Use this box to indicate that binned numeric values that you specify are treated as numbers, rather than as the default of text. For example, suppose that you specify 35 as the bin name. If you do not select this box, then the name is treated as text, rather than as the number 35 when it is displayed in views. If you select this box, then the value 35 is treated as a number, which affects operations that are specific to data types such as sorting.
Use this button to remove the bins that you have created. When you click this button, a message prompts you to decide whether to keep the CASE statement in the formula on the Formula tab:
If you select Yes, then you clear all bins from the Bins tab and the formula with the CASE statement is available for you to edit on the Formula tab.
If you select No, then you clear all bins and the formula on the Formula tab returns to its default value.
The Bins tab is not affected by the button bar in the Formula area in the Formula tab. However, if you create a CASE statement using the Bins tab, the button bar will be hidden when you click the Column Formula tab. The button bar is only displayed if you clear all bins.
Use this tab of the "Edit Column Formula dialog" to:
Specify custom text for headings for the column's folder and for the column.
Specify the aggregation rule for the column totals for an attribute or measure columns or for a KPI-related formula.
Edit the formula for an attribute or measure column. A column formula specifies what the column values represent, for example, "Sales Measures"."Dollars". By editing this formula, you can present analysis results in a variety of ways.
Create formulas that calculate KPI actual values, target values, and thresholds.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Not available for KPIs.
Use this field to enter the text for the heading for the column's folder. To enable this field, select the Custom Headings box.
Not available for KPIs.
Use this field to customize the heading to reflect the data in the column. To enable this field, select the Custom Headings box. For example, if you want to change the column heading to "Dollars Increased by 10%", select the Custom Headings box and then, in the Column Heading field enter Dollars Increased by 10%.
Not available for KPIs.
Use this box to enable the Folder Heading and Column Heading fields so that you can customize the headings to suit your needs. For example, if you change the formula of a column, you might want to change the column heading to something that is more representative of the column.
Use this box to select the aggregation rule for the:
Column totals for attribute or measure columns. For example, if you want column totals to show the minimum value of the rows in the result set, then select Min. If you want them to show the sum of all the values in the result set, then select Sum, which is the default.
KPI-related formula
For a list of the valid values, see "Aggregation Rules and Functions".
Displays the primary subject area as well as any related subject areas that have been added to the "Subject Areas pane". Use this area to select columns to use in formulas. To insert a column in a formula, select the column and click the Add Column button (the arrow button between the Available and Column Formula areas). Note that when you insert a column, if you have something highlighted in the Column Formula area, it will be replaced.
Use this area to perform these tasks:
Create or edit the formula for an attribute or measure column.
Create the formula to calculate a KPI actual value, target value, or range.
When you have text selected in the Column Formula box, it will be replaced by values that you select elsewhere, such as in the Available list or by inserting functions or filters. The selected text is also displayed in the Insert Function and Insert Filter dialogs when you invoke them.
You can enter the formula manually or use these components:
f(. . .) — Use this button to display the "Insert Function dialog", where you select a function from a tree of function groups. For example, you can build a formula based on a SQL function, such as RANK("Sales Measures"."Dollars").
For information about SQL functions, see Appendix A, "Logical SQL Reference."
Filter. . . — Use this button to display the "Insert Filter dialog", where you can add a SQL filter. For example, you can build a formula that uses the SQL FILTER function to filter the data, such as FILTER("Sales Measures"."Dollars" USING ("Markets"."Region" = 'EASTERN REGION').
Column > — Use this button to select a column from a list of the available attribute and measure columns that are included in the analysis criteria to use in the formula. This is helpful for example, if you have cleared the formula area and want to get back to where you started.
Variable > — Use this button to select the type of variable (Session, Repository, or Presentation) to add. The "Insert Variable dialog" is displayed, where you specify the name of the variable.
For example, you can build a formula using a presentation variable, such as "Sales Measures".Dollars + @{PercentIncrease}{1.50}, where PercentIncrease is the name of the presentation variable and 1.50 is its default value.
+ — Use this button to insert the addition operator to add values.
- — Use this button to insert the subtraction operator to subtract values.
x —Use this button to insert the multiplication operator to multiply values.
/ — Use this button to insert the division operator to divide values.
% — Use this button to insert the percent sign to divide values by 100.
( — Use this button to insert the left parenthesis to enclose data in brackets.
) — Use this button to insert the right parenthesis to enclose data in brackets.
||— Use this button to insert the concatenation operator.
Available only for measure columns and only when the dialog is invoked from the Criteria tab. The default is that the box is not selected. Use this box to specify that a measure column be treated as an attribute column. This setting forces a Group By of the column values when the measure column is positioned outside the Measures area to an edge of the view This setting is not applied to a measure column in the Columns and Measures area of a table or the Measures area for a pivot table or graph.
This box is required to facilitate functionality in this release that specifies to not show all the detail when a measure column is moved to an edge but rather to aggregate the measure column to the grain of the edge. For example, aggregating dollar values to the Region grain.
Suppose that you have an analysis that contains the Region, Units, and Dollars columns. Using the Bins tab of the Edit Column Formula dialog for Units, you create one bin for values greater than or equal to 10 million and you specify that bin name as X. All other values use the bin name of Y. These bins create a CASE statement in the formula for this column.
When you display that analysis in a table on the Results tab, you see values for X and Y in the Units column. If you display that analysis in a pivot table with the Units column on the Measures edge, you also see values for X and Y. If you move the Units column to another edge, such as the Row edge of a pivot table, then you see only values for X. This is because the values of the column were aggregated for each region and none are now less than 10 million.
To resolve this problem and have views display data as in previous releases, you select the Treat as an Attribute Column box to specify that the measure column be handled as an attribute column, which prevents the aggregation of the values.
All analyses will be upgraded from Release 10g with all measure columns having the Treat as an Attribute Column box selected, to ensure that the measure columns are treated as attribute columns, as they were in Release 10g.
To manually enter a variable in an expression in the Formula area, follow the guidelines for referencing variables in expressions that are described in Table 2-2.
Use this dialog to set up the control for a dimension in the point of view area of a scorecard. Specifically, you can specify:
A default value for the dimension
Whether a control for the dimension is to be displayed in the point of view area
The label to be displayed in the point of view area for the dimension
For more information, see:
Displays the name of the dimension in the database, for example, "A - Sample Sales"."Products"."P1 Products".
Use this field to enter a user-friendly label for the dimension's point of view control when no specific value has been set for the dimension. For example, you might enter Products for the dimension "A - Sample Sales"."Products"."P1 Products". Note that you do not need to specify a label for:
A dimension that is pinned to a specific value (the value will be displayed instead). You can pin the dimension to a specific value using the Default Value box.
A dimension for which you prevent the display of a control in the point of view area. (You use the Prompted field to prevent the display of a point of view control.)
Use this box to select one of the following options:
A specific value for the dimension. If you specify a specific value, the value is for the dimension label.
Search — Use this option to display the "Search Members dialog", where you search for a value for the dimension.
Not Pinned — Use this option to specify that, initially, all dimension values are to be used. However, if you select the Prompted box, you later can change the value using the point of view control.
If you select a specific value and:
Prevent the display of a control for this dimension in the point of view area by deselecting the Prompted box, then you are pinning the dimension to a constant value for this scorecard, and users will not be able to change the value.
Display a control for this dimension in the point of view area by selecting the Prompted box, then you are pinning the dimension to an initial value for this scorecard, and users will be able to change the value.
Use this check box to specify whether a control for this dimension is to be displayed in the point of view area of the scorecard:
Select this box to specify that a control for this dimension is to be displayed in the point of view area.
Deselect this box to prevent the display of a control for this dimension in the point of view area. You should prevent the display of a control in the following cases:
If you have pinned the dimension to a specific value or to all dimension values and you do not want users to change this setting.
If a dimension that is equivalent to this dimension is used in another KPI in the Scorecard and this dimension should share a point of view control with the other dimension.
In this case, you must also complete the Prompted By box.
For example, suppose two KPIs used in the Scorecard both have a Quarter dimension. The Quarter dimensions have the same values but come from different databases. In this case, for one of the Quarter dimensions, you should deselect the Prompted box for one of the Quarter dimensions and in the Prompted By box select the other Quarter dimension so that both dimensions share one control.
Note:
Before you set up dimensions to share a point of view control, ensure that their values match exactly. After you to set up the shared control, test the control to ensure that it sets the value of each dimension that it controls.This box is available only if you have deselected the Prompted check box. Use this box to select the dimension whose control in the point of view area this dimension is to share.
Use this dialog to specify the information for adding a footer or header to PDF and HTML output, when printing a dashboard page. Each header and footer can contain as many as three lines.
For more information, see:
Use these buttons to apply Bold, Italic, or Underline to characters in the footer or header.
Use this button to insert a line break between characters in the footer or header.
Use this option to work with HTML codes, as described in "Working with HTML Markup".
Use this menu to select a field to include in the header or footer, such as the author name, date, or page number.
Use these fields to enter the text for the header or footer.
You can reference variables in these fields. For the syntax to use, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Click this button to display the "Edit Format dialog", in which you specify formatting for the text in the footer or header.
Display in browser when applicable
Use this option to specify whether to display the header or footer in the HTML output. If you clear this box, then the header or footer is displayed in the PDF output only.
Use this dialog to edit a layer from the Layers tab of the "Administration: Manage Map Data page". One important task is to associate the layer of spatial data with data for Oracle BI EE.
Spatial data is managed in MapViewer and stored in an Oracle Database. In order to display data for Oracle BI EE on a map, you must associate a spatial layer with the appropriate columns of data from the Oracle BI Server. The combinations of BI data columns are referred to as "BI Keys". When you associate the layer of spatial data with data for Oracle BI EE, that layer becomes available for use with the specified columns in the specified subject areas.
The functions of the Administration page are described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this field to enter the name of the layer.
Displays the location of the layer in the data source from MapViewer.
Use this button to display the "Import Layers dialog", in which you select a source location to associate with the layer. Your selection is reflected in the Location box.
Use this field to enter the description of the layer, which is displayed in the following locations:
On the Layers tab of the Administration page.
When you hover over the layer name in the Map Formats area when editing the map.
Use this box to select the column of spatial data from MapViewer to associate with data for Oracle BI EE. Each column value corresponds to a shape that is stored in the Oracle database. For example, a MY_CITIES layer might have a layer key called CITY. By default, the selected value is a "best guess" at the appropriate column. Use the list to select the appropriate column.
Click the Sample Data link to display an actual value for that column that you can use as an example.
If the box is empty, then the administrator must define the key column for the shapes in the spatial table for that layer in MapViewer. The map is drawn only where common values exist between the spatial data column and the associated column of Oracle BI EE data. Otherwise, the map might show a white area to indicate a missing value. To verify that common values exist for the two columns, display the column of Oracle BI EE data in the Oracle BI Administration Tool and review its values. In MapViewer, verify that the associated layer contains all the appropriate geometry definitions for the values in the corresponding column of Oracle BI EE data.
The following list provides the reasons why a white area might be drawn, using the country of Mexico as an example:
The column has a null value for the country of Mexico, but a shape exists for Mexico in the spatial column.
The column has a value for the country of Mexico, but no shape exists for Mexico in the spatial column.
The column has a value for the country of Mexico and the shape exists for Mexico in the spatial column, but the names are mismatched. The BI column might have the value MEX and the spatial column might have MXC.
Available only when multiple columns are specified for one key. Use this field to enter a single ASCII character (such as a comma or underscore) to function as a delimiter for combining the BI data columns that form a key.
Use this box to specify whether the layer is a point geometry layer or a polygon layer. The specification for a point or polygon layer affects the formatting that can be applied to that layer.
Use this area to select the columns of data from the Oracle BI Server to associate with the layer. You can have multiple columns associated with a single layer. You can select multiple columns from one subject area or from multiple subject areas. The columns and delimiter that you select must exactly match the name of the Layer Key value. Suppose the Layer Key value is STATE_CITY. You must select the STATE and CITY BI data columns and specify the underscore character as the delimiter for use in creating the BI Key to associate with the layer.
Click the following options:
Add New BI Key — Displays the list of available subject areas. When you select one, the "Select BI Key Columns dialog" is displayed in which you select one or more columns of BI data to associate with the layer.
Delete BI Key — Deletes the selected key from the Key area.
Edit BI Key — Displays the "Select BI Key Columns dialog" where you edit the BI data columns for the selected key.
Sample Data — Displays an actual value for that column that you can use as an example. Ensure that the values for the data column match those from the spatial data column.
When a content designer creates a map view, a default main map is selected as the basis for that map view. If at least one data column from the analysis is associated with a layer that is associated with a main map, then that main map is selected by default.
Use this box to specify whether to display the fully qualified name of the column in the BI Key Columns Area or simply the column name.
Use this dialog to modify the page title, instructions, and page formatting. For more information, see "Definition pane".
Use this field to enter the title that you want to display on the prompt page. You can format this title by clicking the Format button.
Use this field to enter instructions for the prompt page. For example, "Use this page to specify sales measure prompt values."
Click this button to display the "Edit Format dialog", in which you specify the formatting options that you can apply to the prompt page. For example, you can specify a font size and style for the title and a background color for the cell.
Use this dialog to edit a prompted filter that is associated with an analysis on which a condition is based.
For more information, see:
Displays the name of the column on which the filter is built.
Use this box to select the operator to apply to the value specified in the Value field. For guidelines on operators, see "Operators".
Use this field to specify the value to use when applying the filter. You can type a value or click the Show list of values button to search for one or more specific values.
To specify a session or repository variable as the value, click the Value label and select Session Variable or Repository Variable. The Value field label changes to either Session Variable or Repository Variable. Then, enter the name of the session or repository variable.
For more information on session and repository variables, see "Using Variables".
Use this button to display the "Select Values dialog", where you can select one or more values from a list of available values.
Use this button to add another Value field.
Use this button to delete the corresponding value and field.
Use this dialog to edit the action parameters associated with an action.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this area to define the action parameters. It includes the following components:
Name — Use this column to view or enter the name of the parameter.
For Navigate to a Web Page or Invoke an HTTP Request actions, to embed a parameter value anywhere within the URL, enter the token @{Name} where 'Name' is the value specified in the Name column below. There is no limit to the number of parameters that can be embedded.
Prompt — Use this column to enter the prompt to be displayed to users, if the user is to provide the parameter value.
Value — Use this column to enter the parameter value. Click the Change type of value button to select one of the following types of value and then specify the value:
Value — Select this option to specify a value and then enter the value in the field.
Session Variable — Select this option to use the value of a session variable, and then enter the name of the session variable in the field, or click the Show popular Session variables button (to the right of this field) and select a session variable from a list of commonly-used variables.
Repository Variable — Select this option to use the value of a repository variable and then enter the name of the repository value in the field.
Request Column — Select this option to display the "Choose Request Column dialog", where you select the column in an analysis whose value is to be used as the value of an action parameter.
This option is available only when you are editing the parameters for an inline action added to an agent that will be conditionally executed based on an analysis.
Column Value — Select this option to use a column value in your analysis criteria and then click the Column Value button and select the column.
For example, suppose you have the Region and District columns in your analysis criteria and define an action link on the District column that maps a parameter to the Region column. When you execute that action link (by clicking on a district), the region value for that district is used. Note that in a pivot table, the mapped values depend on the current layout or state of the table.
This option is available only when you are adding an inline action to an analysis.
For more information on session and repository variables, see "Using Variables".
Fixed — Use this column to specify whether to allow users to see but not set the parameter. Select this box to allow users to see but not set the parameter. Deselect this box to allow users to see and set the value.
Hidden — Use this column to specify whether to hide the parameter from users. Select this box to hide the parameter from users. Deselect this box to show the parameter to users.
Optional — Use this column to specify whether the parameter requires a value before the action can be executed. Select this box to make the value optional. Deselect this box to make the value required.
Add Parameter — Use this button to add a parameter. (Whether you can add a parameter for an action, depends on the action type.)
Delete Parameter — Use this button to delete a parameter.
Use this page to edit the customizations saved for a dashboard page. You can:
Rename customizations
Change which customization to use as your default
Change permissions for those customizations that have been shared with others
Delete customizations
For more information, see:
This area displays the customizations, both personal and shared, that have been saved for the dashboard page.
To rename a customization, overwrite the old name with the new name.
To set a customization as your default, select the button in the My Default column for the customization. To have no personal customizations as your default, select the button in the My Default column for the No Personal Customizations entry.
Use this button to display the "Saved Customization Permissions and Defaults dialog", where you specify the accounts that have permission to use the customization and whether the customization is to be the default customization for the accounts.
Use this button to delete the selected customization.
Use this dialog to specify the URL and other information about content that you want to embed on a dashboard page.
For more information, see "Adding Content to Dashboards".
Use this field to enter the location and name of the content to embed.
These are examples:
http://www.oracle.com /dashboardfiles/piegraph.xls
The URL that you specify should begin with http:// unless you plan to use an item that is saved on the Web server. If you use a network path to indicate the location of the item, then ensure that you use the exact path. Items that are embedded on a shared dashboard must be located on a network drive that is accessible to all users.
Use this field to specify the width of the embedded content in the dashboard. Note the following about width and height specifications:
If you do not specify a value, then the system uses the default settings (300 by 150 pixels). If you have only specified one value, then the system will use the default value for the non-specified value.
You can specify the value in either pixels (px) or percent (%). Because browsers cannot fully interpret percent values, only the width percentage is rendered. If you specify the height in percentage, then 150 pixels is substituted for the height value.
If you do not specify either pixels or percent, then the value is interpreted in pixels.
You can enter spaces within the value. For example, you can enter either 130px or 130 px.
Use this field to specify the height of the embedded content in the dashboard. Adjust the height setting for the best display results.
Select this box to indicate that the scroll bars for the embedded content will not be displayed. If you do not select this box, then scroll bars are automatically added to the window if they are needed.
Use this dialog to add e-mail recipients who are to receive the delivery content of an agent.
For more information, see:
Email address for content delivery (separate multiple addresses with commas)
Use this field to enter the e-mail address of each e-mail recipient who is to receive the delivery content of the agent. Use commas to separate multiple addresses.
Use this dialog to enter a variable expression or SQL query to use to set a gauge threshold.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this box to enter the expression or SQL query.
You can reference one or more presentation variables in the expression. For guidelines on referencing a variable in an expression, see Table 2-2. For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Use this editor to create or edit a named filter.
For more information, see:
Use the "Subject Areas pane" to select the attribute column or measure column to be included in the filter. If your repository is configured for double columns, typically, you choose a display column on which to filter. However, you can choose a code column on which to filter but only if the code column is exposed in the Presentation layer in the Oracle BI EE repository. For more information on the Presentation layer, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Metadata Repository Builder's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
After you select a column, the "New Filter dialog" displays where you specify the new filter's criteria.
Use the "Catalog pane" to search for and drag and drop named filters from the catalog to the Filter editor. When you add a named filter to the Filter Editor, you are given the choice of either copying a catalog reference to the named filter or copying the named filter's contents to the analysis. When you include a reference to the named filter, you cannot modify the filter. When you include a copy of the named filter, you can modify the filter's contents and either save the filter as an inline or named filter.
Use this area to work with a filter just as you would in the "Filters pane".
Use this dialog to create or edit a named filter or inline filter.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Analysis editor: Criteria tab".
This pane also displays as the Saved Filter pane on the "Filter editor".
The toolbar contains the following buttons.
Create a filter for the current subject area — Use this button to choose an attribute column or measure column from a list of the columns that are currently selected for the analysis. You can also select the More columns option to display the "Select Column dialog", where you can select an attribute column or a measure column from the current subject area. If your repository is configured for double columns, typically, you choose a display column on which to filter. However, you can choose a code column on which to filter but only if the code column is exposed in the Presentation layer in the Oracle BI EE repository. For more information on the Presentation layer, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Metadata Repository Builder's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
After you select a column, the "New Filter dialog" displays where you specify the new filter's criteria.
Remove All Filters — Use this button to delete all of the filter items in the Filters pane. To delete a selected filter item, you must go to the listing of filter items in the Filters pane and click the Delete button for the item that you want to remove.
More Options — Click this button to access the following options:
Save Filters — Use this option to save the filter and all of its contents to the catalog. Filters saved to the catalog are called named filters and can be added to other analyses and dashboards. If you save the filter as a named filter and then continue to work on the filter within the Filters pane, any changes that you make will not automatically be saved to the catalog. To re-save the named filter, you must again click the Save Filters option. Note that selecting the Save Filters option does not save the analysis and inline filter upon which you are working. To save the inline filter with the analysis, go to the Analysis Editor's toolbar and click the Save button.
Add EVALUATE_PREDICATE Function — Use this option to display the "New EVALUATE_PREDICATE Function dialog", where you create a function.
The filter item toolbar is the collection of buttons that displays when you hover over a filter item within the list of filter items. It includes the following buttons:
Edit Filter — Use this button to display the "Edit Filter dialog", where you edit the filter item's criteria.
Copy Filter — Use this button to copy the filter item. When you click this button, a copy of the filter displays below the original filter item. You can use this functionality to save time by copying an existing filter item upon which to base a new filter item rather than creating a new filter item from scratch.
Delete— Use this button to delete the filter item.
Click the operator to toggle between AND and OR. When you add a filter item, the default operator is AND. The AND operator means that the criteria specified in each filter must be met. This is the default method for combining column filters. The OR operator means that the criteria that is specified in at least one of the column filters must be met.
If you have specified three or more filters and click on AND, then Oracle BI EE automatically groups the filter item with the filter item above it. Grouped filters are indented in the filters list. You can click the operator to group the filters in several layers. Grouped filters are always processed before ungrouped filters.
This button displays when you hover over a collection of grouped filters. Use this button to specify what you want to do with the corresponding group. If you are working with a multi-level group, then ensure that you are clicking on the correct Edit Filter Group button. Note the following options:
Ungroup — Use this option to ungroup the highlighted filters group. If you are working with a group that has several layers of groupings, then clicking this option will only ungroup the highlighted group.
Delete Group — Use this option to delete the highlighted filter group from the filter.
Duplicate Group — Use this option to copy and paste the highlighted filter group. When you click this option, Oracle BI EE pastes the copy below the copied filter group. The copied filter group is also nested within the filter group from which it was copied.
Use this dialog to add a view of a catalog folder and its contents, such as saved analyses, or a list of briefing books to a dashboard page. For example, if you have a collection of saved analyses that you run frequently, you can open the folder in the dashboard, navigate to a saved analysis, and click it to run it.
For more information, see:
Displays the path to the folder whose view you want to add to the dashboard page, for example, /Shared Folders/Briefing Books. Click the Browse button to display the "Open dialog", where you select the folder.
Use this option to specify whether to show an expanded view of the folder.
Use this option to specify whether to add an RSS feed option to the folder.
The RSS feed option allows a user to access the dashboard's catalog folder from an RSS 2.0 compatible reader that supports HTTP basic authentication. If Oracle BI Presentation Services uses HTTPS protocol, then the RSS Reader that you use must also support the HTTPS protocol. An RSS reader is a third-party program that allows the user to aggregate information from different web-based locations into one browser window (for example, news feeds or events listing).
When the RSS link is added to the dashboard's catalog folder, an XML button that provides the catalog's URL is displayed for that folder. When a user accesses a catalog folder from an RSS reader, the reader prompts the user to log in to the Oracle BI Server.
You can include an RSS feed option to a catalog folder that is displayed on a dashboard page. Users must have the proper privilege to add the RSS feed option to a dashboard page's catalog. The RSS Feeds privilege is granted by the administrator.
Use this pane to display and navigate the content of personal (My Folders) and shared folders that all users can access. Administrators can display the catalog root folder that contains all system, object, and user data and settings. You can also use this pane to move objects by dragging and dropping them to different areas within the Catalog. You can drag and drop objects within the Folders pane or from the Folders pane to the "Catalog area".
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Catalog page".
Use this button to display all folders in hierarchical directories.
Use this button to list, excluding their hierarchy, these folders:
My folders — Contains all the objects that you have created.
Shared folders — Contains folders for agents, common objects such as reports, and the contents of the subject area.
My <object> folder — Depending on the object, contains all the analyses, reports, agents, and scorecards that you have created or modified, or the agents to which you are currently subscribed. (Note that agents that you have been designated a recipient of are not included in the My Agent Subscriptions folder.)
Contains all of your personal folders.
Contains folders to which you have the permissions to access.
Use this dialog to set formatting properties for a graph, such as the font family for text.
For more information, see "Graph Properties dialog: Titles and Labels tab".
Note:
Depending on what you are formatting, this dialog might be displayed without tabs. If so, then it contains only the components in the "Font Format: Item dialog: Font Format tab".Use "Font Format: Item dialog: Display Options tab" to set properties for the display of titles, scale labels, and data labels.
Use the "Font Format: Item dialog: Font Format tab" to set properties for displaying text.
This tab is not available for the vertical axis 2 of a pareto graph.
Use the "Font Format dialog: Number Format tab" to override the default numeric format in which data labels are currently displayed.
Use this tab of the "Font Format: Item dialog" to set properties for the display of titles, scale labels, and data labels in a graph.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
This box is available only for titles.
Use this box to specify whether items are to be automatically truncated or truncated by a specified number of characters. If you select Specify, then enter the number of characters in the characters field.
This box is available only for scale labels.
Use this box to select the number of degrees scale labels are to be rotated.
This box is available only for scale and data labels. It is not available for the vertical axis 2 of a pareto graph.
Use this box to select the abbreviation to use for scale and data labels. For example, if you select Million(m) for a scale label of 120,000,000, then the label is abbreviated to 120M.
This box is available only for data labels.
Use this box to specify whether to hide or show data labels. Data labels are displayed when you hover the mouse over elements in a graph or gauge.
Data labels are enabled by default for selected 2D graph types. Data labels have no effect on graphs such as 3D bar and column.
Use this tab of the "Font Format: Item dialog" to set properties for displaying text.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Clear Cell Format (restore defaults) — Use this button to remove the specifications that you have made and to return the settings to the values that they had when defaults were last saved.
The Clear Cell Format (restore defaults) and the Copy Cell Format buttons affect the settings in the following ways:
If the dialog has no tabs, then the button affects all the settings in the dialog.
If the dialog has multiple tabs, then the button affects only those settings in the tab in which the button is displayed.
Copy Cell Format — Use this button to copy the formatting specifications from the dialog, so that you can apply them elsewhere.
Paste Cell Format — Use this button to paste the formatting that you have copied into the appropriate location.
Use this box to select the font family.
Use this field to enter the font size.
Use this box to select the font color.
Use this box to select the font style, such as bold or italic.
Use this box to select the font effects, such as underline or strike through.
Use this tab of the "Font Format: Item dialog" to override the default numeric format in which data labels are currently displayed.
Note:
The numeric format is inherited from the representative column in the Criteria tab. If two or more columns are selected for the same axis, then numeric formatting is not inherited.For more information, see:
Use this box to specify that you want override the default numeric format in which data labels are currently displayed.
Use this box to specify whether data labels are numbers, percentages, or currency.
This box is available only if you select Currency in the Treat Numbers As box.
Use this box to select the currency symbol to show in data labels.
Use this option to specify whether to display negative data labels using a minus sign (for example, -123) or parentheses (for example, (123).
Use this box to select the number of decimal places (to a maximum of 6) in which to display numbers (for example, 120,000,000.000).
Use this box to specify whether to separate each magnitude of a thousand by a comma. (for example, 1,000,000,000.00
Use this dialog to edit the properties of gauge.
For more information, see:
Use the "Gauge Properties dialog: General tab" to set properties related to the gauge canvas, such as, legend location.
Use the "Gauge Properties dialog: Style tab" to set properties that control the appearance of the gauge, such as width and height of the gauge.
Use the "Gauge Properties dialog: Scale tab" to set properties for gauge limits and tick marks.
Use the "Gauge Properties dialog: Titles and Labels tab" to set properties that control the display of titles, footers, and labels for the gauge or gauges in a gauge set.
Use this tab of the "Gauge Properties dialog" to set properties related to the gauge canvas, such as legend location.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the number of gauges display per row in a gauge set.
Use this box to specify whether a legend is to be displayed and its location. Select one of the following options:
Default — Use this option to display the legend in the default location, that is, to the right of the gauge canvas.
None — Use this option to specify that no legend is to be displayed.
Top — Use this option to display the legend at the top of the gauge canvas.
Right — Use this option to display the legend to the right of the gauge canvas.
Bottom — Use this option to display the legend at the bottom of the gauge canvas.
Left — Use this option to display the legend to the left of the gauge canvas.
Listen to Master-Detail Events
Use this box to specify whether the gauge is to act as a detail view in a master-detail relationship and listen for master-detail events. This box also displays the Event Channels field.
To specify that a gauge is to act as a detail view in a master-detail relationship and listen for master-detail events, select this box and then specify the channel or channels in the Event Channels field.
For more information on master-detail relationships, see "What is Master-Detail Linking of Views?"
This field is displayed only if you select the Listen to Master-Detail Events box.
Use this field to enter the name of one or more channels on which the gauge is to listen for master-detail events raised by one or more master views. The channel name is case sensitive and must match exactly the channel name specified in the master view. Separate channels with commas, for example, channel a, channel b.
Use this tab of the "Gauge Properties dialog" to set properties that control the appearance of the gauge, such as width and height of the gauge.
For more information, see:
This box is available only for dial gauges.
Use this field to enter length of the dial arc in degrees. The maximum value is 360 degrees.
Use this box to specify the size of the gauge — Fit to Canvas, Small, Medium, Large or Custom.
If you select Custom, then you must complete the Width and Height fields, where you specify the width and height in pixels.
This field is enabled only when you select Custom in the Gauge Size box.
Use this field to enter the width of the gauge in pixels.
This field is enabled only when you select Custom in the Gauge Size box.
Use this field to enter the height of the gauge in pixels.
This area is available only for dial gauges.
Use this area to specify, for each measure in the gauge, the type and color of the indicator. The indicator is the part of the gauge that points to the value that is plotted.
In the first box, select the type of indicator and then, in the second box, select the color. The types of indicators are:
Needle — Use this option to use a needle to point to the value that is plotted.
Line — Use this option to use a line to point to the value that is plotted.
Fill — Use this option to fill the area inside the dial gauge to the value that is plotted. This option is ignored if the gauge has thresholds or if the gauge shows more than one measure column.
Gauge Colors and Border: Background
This box is available only for dial gauges.
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the gauge background.
Gauge Colors and Border: Border
This box is available only for dial gauges.
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the border around the gauge.
Canvas Colors and Border: Background
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the canvas background.
Canvas Colors and Border: Border
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the border around the canvas.
Use this tab of the "Gauge Properties dialog" to set properties for the following parts of a gauge:
Gauge limits — The minimum and maximum points on the gauge value axis.
Tick marks — The markings along the value axis of the gauge. They can identify regular intervals, from the minimum value to the maximum value, and can also indicate threshold values. (You set threshold values in the "Settings pane".)
For more information, see:
Use this area to specify the gauge limits as follows:
Select the Default box to use the default gauge limits.
Select the Specify box to specify custom gauge limits. Then, in the Minimum field enter the lowest point and in the Maximum field enter the highest point.
Click the Customize Gauge Limit button to the right of the Minimum or Maximum field to display the "Customize Gauge Limit dialog", where you specify the custom gauge limit. You can specify the limits as an actual value or a percentage.
Displays the following options to specify the number of tick marks to display:
Dynamic — Select this box to let the system automatically calculate (based on the data) the number of tick marks to display.
Specify — Select this option to specify the number of tick marks to display.
This box is not available for bulb gauges.
Use this box to specify whether major tick marks are to be shown.
To show major ticks, select this box and then specify the number of major tick marks to show.
This box is not available for bulb gauges.
Use this box to specify whether to show minor tick marks.
Minor tick marks show only in dial gauges that show one measure.
To show minor ticks, select this box and then specify the number of minor tick marks to show.
Use this tab of the "Gauge Properties dialog" to set properties that control the display of titles, footers, and labels for a gauge or gauges in a gauge set.
If the canvas consists of a gauge set, then titles and footers are displayed for each gauge. Titles and footers are optional.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the title for the gauge or gauge set. The title is displayed at the top of the canvas.
Use measure name as graph title
Use this box to use the name of the measure column or columns (for example, Dollars) for the title of the gauge or gauge set.
Use this field to enter a title to be displayed above each gauge.
You can use a token (@n) to include the results from the designated column in the gauge title. For example, @1 inserts the results from the first column, and @3 inserts the results from the third column.
Use this field to enter a footer to be displayed beneath each gauge.
You can use a token (@n) to include the results from the designated column in the gauge footer. For example, @1 inserts the results from the first column, and @3 inserts the results from the third column.
Use this button (which is displayed next to each Title field and the Footer field) to display the "Font Format: Item dialog", where you can format the title or footer.
Use this button (which is displayed next to the Legend, Scale Labels and Data Labels labels) to display the "Font Format: Item dialog", where you can format the legend, scale labels, or data labels.
The Format Label button for scale labels is not available for bulb gauges.
Use this pane to learn how to use Oracle Scorecard and Strategy Management to drive and assess corporate performance, to link to the Oracle Business Intelligence glossary, and to link to information about how to create scorecards.
For more information, see "Viewing Overview Information".
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor: Overview tab".
Use this link display overview information about scorecarding.
Use this link to display a glossary of Oracle Business Intelligence terms.
Use link to display information on how to create scorecard components, such as objectives, initiatives, perspectives, and views.
Use this dialog to edit the properties of a graph.
For more information, see:
Use the "Graph Properties dialog: General tab" to set properties related to the graph canvas, such as legend location.
Use the "Graph Properties dialog: Style tab" to set properties that control the appearance of the graph, such as the style.
Use the "Graph Properties dialog: Scale tab" to set properties for axis limits and tick marks.
Use the "Graph Properties dialog: Titles and Labels tab" to set properties that control the display of titles and labels for the graph.
Use this tab of the "Graph Properties dialog" to set properties related to the graph canvas, such as legend location.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the width of the graph canvas in pixels.
Use this field to enter the height of the graph canvas in pixels.
Use this box to specify whether a legend is to be displayed and its location. Select one of the following options:
Default — Use this option to display the legend in the default location, that is, to the right of the graph canvas.
None — Use this option to specify that no legend is to be displayed.
Top — Use this option to display the legend at the top of the graph canvas.
Right — Use this option to display the legend to the right of the graph canvas.
Bottom — Use this option to display the legend at the bottom of the graph canvas.
Left — Use this option to display the legend to the left of the graph canvas.
This component is not supported for radar, funnel, and pie graphs.
Use this area to specify whether to enable zooming and scrolling on the horizontal and vertical axes:
Enable for Horizontal Axis — Use this option to enable zooming and scrolling on the X axis.
Enable for Vertical Axis — Use this option to enable zooming and scrolling on the vertical axis.
When you enable zooming and scrolling for an axis, the Zoom button (from which you can zoom and scroll) is displayed in the graph area when you hover the mouse over the graph.
For more information on how to zoom and scroll, see "Zooming and Scrolling in Graphs".
Listen to Master-Detail Events
Use this box to specify whether the graph is to act as a detail view in a master-detail relationship and listen for master-detail events. This box also displays the Event Channels field.
To specify that a graph is to act as a detail view in a master-detail relationship and listen for master-detail events, select this box and then specify the channel or channels in the Event Channels field.
For more information on master-detail relationships, see "What is Master-Detail Linking of Views?"
This field is displayed only if you select the Listen to Master-Detail Events box.
Use this field to enter one or more channels on which the graph is to listen for master-detail events raised by one or more master views. The channel name is case sensitive and must match exactly the channel name specified in the master view. Separate channels with commas, for example, channel a, channel b.
This box is not supported for funnel graphs.
Use this box to specify whether to show an initial rendering effect. The rendering effect varies from graph to graph. In a horizontal graph, for example, the bars start at the horizontal axis and move up to the current measurement level.
Use this dialog of the "Graph Properties dialog" to set properties for the following parts of a graph:
Axis limits — The minimum and maximum points on the vertical and horizontal axes.
Tick marks — The markings along the value axes of the graph. They can identify regular intervals, from the minimum value to the maximum value.
This tab is not available for pie graphs or funnel graphs.
For more information, see:
Note:
If a graph has both vertical and horizontal axes (for example in a scatter graph) or two vertical axes (for example in a line-bar graph), this tab contains sub-tabs so that you can set the scale properties for both axes.This area is disabled for a pareto graph.
Use this box to specify the limits of the vertical or horizontal axis. Select one of the following options:
Default (Dynamic) — Use this option to let the system determine the scale and set the axis to zero for positive numbers.
Specify — Use this option to specify to the minimum and maximum axis limits. Then in the Minimum field, enter the minimum axis limit and in the Maximum field, enter the maximum axis limit.
Displays the following options to specify the number of tick marks to display:
Dynamic — Select this box to let the system automatically calculate (based on the data) the number of tick marks to display.
Specify — Select this option to specify the number of tick marks to display.
Note that the color you select color for the horizontal and vertical gridlines on the "Graph Properties dialog: Style tab"also is applied to the major and minor tick marks.
Use this box to specify whether to show major tick marks. If you select this box, then specify the number of major tick marks to show.
This box is disabled for vertical axis 2 of a pareto graph.
Use this box to specify whether to show minor tick marks. If you select this box, then specify the number of minor tick marks to show.
This box is disabled for a pareto graph.
Use this box to specify whether to use a logarithmic scale.
Displays the "Scale Markers dialog", where you define the scale markers for the graph.
For a time series line graph, you cannot set scale properties (that is, axis limits or major and minor ticks) for the horizontal axis.
For a Pareto graph, you cannot specify:
Axis limits for either vertical axis 1 or vertical axis 2
Whether to show minor tick marks for vertical axis 2
Whether to use a logarithmic scale
By definition, vertical axis 2 of the pareto graph ranges from 0% to 100%. In addition, vertical axis 1 is synchronized with vertical axis 2, so it cannot be changed.
Use this dialog of the "Graph Properties dialog" to set properties that control the appearance of the graph, such as the style.
For more information, see:
This box is not enabled for bubble and radar graphs.
Use this box to select the graph style. The options are:
For bar, line-bar, or pareto graphs: Default, Rectangle, Triangle, Cylinder, Diamond, Gradient or Pattern Fill
For a line or time-series line graph: Default, Standard Line, Stepped Line, or Curved Line
For an area or pie graph: Default, Solid Fill, Gradient Fill, or Pattern Fill
For a scatter graph: Default, Standard Scatter, or Scatter-with-Lines
Style and Conditional Formatting
Displays the "Style and Conditional Formatting dialog", where you specify formatting.
Use this box to specify whether the graph is to be three-dimensional.
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the plot area background.
Use these boxes to specify whether to display the default gridlines or gridlines that you specify.
If you select the Specify option, then, for the major grid and for the minor grid, specify the gridlines that you want and their color using the following boxes:
Horizontal Line — Use this box to display a horizontal gridline.
Vertical Line — Use this box to display a vertical gridline.
Color — Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the horizontal and vertical gridlines. This color also is applied to the major and minor tick marks, which you specify on the "Graph Properties dialog: Scale tab".
If you select the Specify option only and do not select any checkbooks for the major and minor grid, no gridlines (not even the ones shown by default) are displayed.
Note that, for a pareto graph, enabling the horizontal major or minor gridlines shows only the gridlines corresponding to vertical axis 1.
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the legend background.
Use this box to specify whether the legend is transparent (that is, has no background color).
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the border around the legend.
Canvas Colors and Borders: Background
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the canvas background.
Canvas Colors and Borders: Show Gradient
Use this box to specify whether the canvas background color is to gradually fade from the specified color at the top to white at the bottom.
Canvas Colors and Borders: Border
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the border around the canvas.
Use this dialog of the "Graph Properties dialog" to set properties that control the display of titles and labels for the graph.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter a title for the graph.
Use this button to specify whether to use the measure name or names as the graph title.
Use this field to enter a title for the vertical axis 1.
Use this button to specify whether to use the measure name or names as the vertical axis 1 title.
Use this field to enter a title for the vertical axis 2.
Use this button to specify whether to use the measure name or names as the vertical axis 2 title.
Use this field to enter a title for the horizontal axis.
Use this button to specify whether to use the column name or names as the horizontal axis title.
Use this button (which is displayed next to each Title field) to display the "Font Format: Item dialog", where you can format the title.
Use this button (which is displayed next to the Legend, Vertical Axis 1 Scale Labels, Vertical Axis 2 Scale Labels, Horizontal Axis Labels and Data Labels labels) to display the "Font Format: Item dialog", where you can format the legend, scale labels, or data labels.
For time series line graphs, no data formatting options are available for the time axis labels or data labels. You can modify font characteristics, but any other formatting selections will be ignored.
For a time series line graph, labels that display on the time axis are locale-sensitive. For example, month and day names use the appropriate locale-sensitive short names.
Use this dialog to select images to display for the following:
Individual KPI performance thresholds
A column cell
You can select a standard image or manually enter a path to a custom image.
Use this box to indicate that no image is included in the column's layout. If you are creating a KPI threshold, select this option to display only KPI values and omit symbols that reflect performance levels or states.
Use this field to specify a custom image to include in the column's layout or with the KPI threshold. To do so, enter one of the following:
The URL to a custom image.
The fmap syntax to reference a custom image that is stored locally in the Oracle Business Intelligence environment. For more information on the fmap syntax, see "Storing Custom Files Locally and Using the fmap Function to Reference Them".
Note:
If you are working in a secured environment, then you must specify a custom image that is stored locally in the Oracle Business Intelligence environment using the fmap syntax. (A secured environment is one in which the HardenXSS element is set to true in the instanceconfig.xml file. See your administrator for more information.)The custom image should be one that is accessible to all users who will view or edit the scorecard.
Custom images can be used for both conditional and unconditional column results.
Use this pane to select an image distributed with Oracle Business Intelligence. To select an image, click the radio button next to the image that you want to include in the column. These images are useful in conditional formatting, such as meters and trend arrows. The left pane shows the categories of images. When you click an image category, the right pane shows the images in that category.
Use this field to specify where you want the image to be displayed relative to the column's data or heading.
Select Choose Image Only if you want the column to contain the image without the text. Choose Default to use the image's default position, which is usually to the left of the column's data or heading.
Use this page to:
Quickly navigate to the area of the application where you can complete a specific task (for example, create a dashboard).
Access your objects or the objects to which you have been given permission to view or edit.
View your alerts.
Access Oracle Business Intelligence documentation and other Oracle product information.
Download Oracle applications that can integrate or interact with Oracle BI EE.
Quickly perform pre-defined searches (for example, search for all of your dashboards or Scorecard objects) or access the full-text catalog search option.
For more information, see:
Provides links to initiate the most popular creation tasks by category (for example, Published Reports or Actionable Intelligence). Click the More link to access a list of the category's other creation tasks. Oracle BI EE populates this list of categories based on what is installed on your company's system and the pieces to which you have been given the rights to access.
Provides the ability to search the folders and objects to which you have permission to access. You can click the Catalog Folders [Search] link to access the catalog search interface where you can search for an object by name, location, and type. For more information about the catalog and how to search it, see "Managing Objects in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog".
This section also gives you the ability to quickly perform pre-defined searches of the catalog by clicking any folder/binocular button. For example, click My Scorecards folder/binocular button to access a list of all of the Scorecard objects located in your My Folders location. After you click a folder/binocular button, the Catalog page displays and contains the results of your search, as well as the pre-defined search's criteria defaulted into the Search fields.
This section contains the following links:
Oracle BI EE Documentation — Click this link to access the Oracle Business Intelligence documentation library, which contains the complete set of Oracle BI EE guides in HTML and PDF formats.
Help Table of Contents — Click the drop down button to choose which product document's table of contents you want to access. Oracle Fusion Middleware User's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition displays in this list, as well as the tables of contents for products that integrate with Oracle BI EE (for example, Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher Enterprise and Oracle Marketing).
Oracle Technology Network — Click this link to access the Oracle Technology Network (OTN), where you can search for technical articles about Oracle products, participate in discussions about Oracle products, ask the user community technical questions, and search for and download Oracle products.
Download BI Desktop Tools — Displays options that allow you to integrate with Microsoft Office. The options available depend on the products that you are eligible to download:
Oracle BI for MS Office — Use this option to download Oracle Business Intelligence Add-in for Microsoft Office, which enables you to access and run Oracle BI EE analyses directly within your Microsoft Office workspace. For information on installing and configuring the Oracle Business Intelligence Add-in for Microsoft Office, see Appendix D, "Integrating with Microsoft Office."
Template Builder For Word — Use this option to download the Template Builder For Word add-in, which facilitates the design of RTF templates for use in published reporting. For more information, see "Creating an RTF Template Using the Template Builder for Word" in the Oracle Fusion Middleware Report Designer's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher.
Analyzer For Excel — Use this option to download the Analyzer For Excel add-in, which enables you to download the results of a report query to Excel and also to upload a spreadsheet to use as a report layout. For more information, see "Using the BI Publisher Analyzer for Excel" in the Oracle Fusion Middleware Report Designer's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher.
Oracle Hyperion Smart View for Office — Use this option to download the Oracle Hyperion Smart View for Office add-in, which enables you to view, import, manipulate, distribute and share data in Microsoft Excel, Word and PowerPoint. For information on configuring to download Oracle Hyperion Smart View for Office, see "Configuring to Download Oracle Hyperion Smart View for Office" in the Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
After you have installed or configured a product, the product download link will no longer display in the list.
(This section is available only when one or more alerts are delivered to the Oracle BI EE Home page.)
Displays your alerts (up to a maximum of five), including the priority (High, Normal, or Low) and last delivery date and time for each alert.
To view the latest occurrence of an alert, click its name. The "Alert dialog" is displayed, where you can view information about the alert as well as the content of the alert. You can also edit and run the agent that generated the alert, if you have the appropriate permissions.
Each alert has the following links:
View — Use this link to display the Alert dialog, where you can view information about the alert as well as the content of the alert. You can also edit and run the agent that generated the alert, if you have the appropriate permissions.
Clear — Use this button to delete the alert.
More — Displays the following options:
Edit Agent — (This option is available only if you have permission to modify the agent.) Use this option to display the agent in the "Agent editor", where you can edit the agent.
Run Agent — (This option is available only if you have permission to execute the agent.) Use this option to run the agent that generated the alert.
Subscribe to this feed — Use this option to display the browser's page that lets you subscribe to an RSS feed. Using this page, you can subscribe to an Oracle BI Alerts feed (that is, the channel that contains the delivered agents). For more information, see "Subscribing to an RSS Feed for Alerts".
View all alerts — Use this option to display the "Alerts dialog", where you can view and manage all your alerts.
If more than five alerts have been delivered, the View All Alerts link is displayed. Click this link to display the "Alerts dialog", where you can view and manage all your alerts.
To configure an agent to deliver an alert to the Home page, you must select the Home Page and Dashboard option on the "Agent editor: Destinations tab". For more information about creating agents, see "Creating Agents".
Contains a list of the dashboards that you have recently viewed, created, or updated. Note that these dashboards display in the first row of this section. Click the More Dashboards link to access additional dashboards that you recently created and updated. All other recently created or updated objects display below the dashboard row.
The links that are included with an individual object (for example, Edit and Properties) are displayed based on the object's type and your permissions for that object. For example, if you can view but not edit a dashboard, only the Open link will display with the dashboard. If a dashboard that you created displays in this section, then the Open and Edit links display with the dashboard. Click the More link to access a list of more dashboard options, such as Properties.
Contains the objects that are accessed the most often by you and the users assigned to the groups to which you belong.
The links that are included with an individual object are displayed based on the object type and your permissions for that object. For more information about how Oracle BI EE determines the object's links, see the Recent component in this topic.
Use this dialog to specify information for the map column. For more information, see "Creating or Editing an Image Prompt" and "Other Prompt Types".
Use this field to enter a caption for the image map prompt. The caption will display as the prompt's field label. For example, "Click a region to see sales data." You can include HTML markup tags in the caption, such as <b>, <font>, and <table>.
Use this field to enter a description that will be saved with the prompt. Descriptions are displayed when administrators use the Catalog Manager.
Use this field to specify the location of the image file.
The image file must reside on a web server. Oracle recommends that you put the image files in the directory that contains all Web resource files (for example, app\res\region3.jpg). Placing the image files with the Web resource files prevents a security warning message from displaying when the user accesses the image from the dashboard or analysis
However, if you are using a Web server, such as WebServices, where the resource files are located in the deploy directory, then you must put the image file in the deploy directory and the directory that contains all Web resource files.
You can reference variables in this field. For the syntax to use, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Use this field to specify the HTML <map> tags. In the map tags, you indicate the map region's shape, X and Y coordinates, and region name.
Use this link to extract the values that you specified in the HTML <map> tags and put them in a table where you can link the regions to data columns and values.
Use this dialog to import maps to the Background Maps tab of the "Administration: Manage Map Data page".
The functions of the Administration page are described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this box to select the connection to a data source in MapViewer that contains the predefined background maps, layers, or images from which you want to select. Each data source can contain a set of background maps, layers, and images. The sets are not related to each other. (In MapViewer, background maps are referred to as "tiles.")
The list of connections includes all those that have been defined during the configuration of MapViewer. This box is not available for the Add Layers dialog.
Use this list to select one or more background maps, layers, or images, depending on which dialog is displayed.
Use this dialog to specify how strongly an initiative drives an objective or how strongly an objective is driven by an initiative.
For more information, see:
This dialog also displays as:
Displays the name of the initiative that drives the objective.
Displays the name of the objective that is driven by the initiative.
Use this box to specify whether the strength of the relationship between the objective and initiative is Strong, Moderate, or Weak.
For example, an initiative called "Upgrade Out Of Date Software" might moderately drive an objective called "Improved Employee Productivity".
Use this box to specify whether changes in performance or value in one object are directly proportional (Direct) or inversely proportional (Inverse) to changes in performance or value in the other object.
For example, in a relationship between an objective named Reduce Customer Complaints to 4% and an initiative named Improve Quality Control, the proportionality would be inverse because improvements in quality control should result in lower numbers of customer complaints.
Use this pane to create, modify, and delete initiatives.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor".
Displays the initiatives that have been defined for the scorecard and the KPIs that measure their progress hierarchically. It also shows the statuses of initiatives and KPIs using the appropriate colors and symbols that you specified for assessment mappings. For more information on assessment mappings, see "Defining Assessment Mappings for Scorecards".
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Create Initiative — Use this button to display the "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab", where you create a new initiative as a child of the selected initiative.
Open — Use this button to open the selected object for editing or viewing, depending on the current mode.
Delete — Use this button to delete the selected object, if you have the appropriate permission.
Displays options for working with the object. The options vary depending on the object and whether Scorecard editor is in edit or read-only mode:
Open — Use this option to display the object for editing or viewing, depending on the current mode.
Create Initiative — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab", where you create a new initiative as a child of the selected initiative.
Delete — Use this option to delete the selected object, if you have the appropriate permission.
Analyze — This option is available only when you select a KPI. Use this option to create an analysis based on the KPI. The analysis is automatically saved in the catalog in the My Folders/Drills folder.
Note:
Because the My Folders/Drills folder is used for temporary storage, the analysis may not persist after your Oracle Business Intelligence session ends. To preserve the analysis, copy it to another directory. For example, to preserve an analysis that you plan to use in a shared dashboard, copy it to a folder in /Shared Folders.Create Agent — This option is available only when you select a KPI. Use this option to display the "Create New Agent dialog", where you create an agent from the KPI.
Contact Owner — Use this option to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the object.
Use this dialog to add a SQL FILTER function to a column formula in the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab".
For more information, see:
Displays the SQL function in the form:
FILTER(expr USING filter_expressions)
Where:
expr is an expression that contains at least one measure column. For example, the expression "sales + 1" is allowed if "sales" is a measure column. The expression "productid" is not allowed if "productid" is a scalar attribute.
filter_expressions is a Boolean expression (evaluates to TRUE or FALSE) and does not contain any measure columns. Also, this expression cannot contain any nested queries.
Note:
If you selected some text in the Formula area before clicking Filter, then it is incorporated in the inserted SQL function, replacing the expression token (expr). For example, if you had selected "Sales Measures".Dollars before clicking Filter, then the SQL function would look like this: FILTER("Sales Measures"."Dollars" USING filter_expressions).A complex filter statement might replace the filter_expressions token as follows:
FILTER("Sales Measures".Dollars USING ((Periods."Year" = '1999') AND ((Markets.District = 'CINCINNATI DISTRICT") OR (Markets.District = 'DENVER DISTRICT'))))
Use this area to define filter_expressions by adding a single filter expression or building a complex filter statement using multiple filter expressions.
For each filter expression that you want to add, select a column from the Subject Areas pane. The "New Filter dialog" is displayed where you create the filter to add to the filter expression.
As you define the filter_expressions, you can use the following:
Operator to toggle between AND and OR to specify the relationship between multiple filter expressions.
Filter item toolbar to manage a filter expression. The filter item toolbar is the collection of buttons that displays when you mouse over a filter expression. It includes the following buttons:
Edit Filter — Use this button to display the "Edit Filter dialog", where you edit the filter expression's criteria.
Copy Filter — Use this button to copy the filter expression. When you click this button, a copy of the filter expression is displayed below the original filter expression.
Delete— Use this button to delete the filter expression.
Use the "Subject Areas pane" to select columns to add to the filter expression.
Use the "Catalog pane" to select filters from the catalog to add to the filter expression.
Use this dialog to select a function to add to a formula in the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab".
For more information, see:
Use this tree to select a function to add to a formula. Expand a function group to show a list of functions within that group.
Displays the name of the function that is currently selected in the Functions tree.
Displays the syntax of the function that is currently selected in the Functions tree.
Displays descriptions of the arguments for the syntax.
Displays an example of the function.
Displays a description of the function that is currently selected in the Functions tree.
When you click the f(...) button in the Edit Column Formula: Column Formula dialog (or the Edit Formula dialog), if:
Some text is selected in the Formula area, then the selected text is incorporated into the inserted function formula when you click OK.
If no text is selected in the Formula area, then the function's expression is inserted and the first argument (denoted by tokens expr or expr1) is automatically selected when you click OK.
Use this dialog to add a variable (either session, repository, or presentation) to a formula in the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab" or in the "New EVALUATE_PREDICATE Function dialog".
For more information, see:
"How Can I Use the EVALUATE_PREDICATE Function with a Filter?"
"Adding the EVALUATE_PREDICATE Function to an Inline Filter"
This field is available only if you have selected Session and Repository as the variable type that you want to add.
Use this field to enter the name of the session or repository variable, for example USER.
This field is available only if you have selected Presentation as the variable type that you want to add.
Use this field to enter the name of the presentation variable, for example MyFavoriteRegion.
To type-cast (that is, convert) the variable to a string, enclose the name in single quotes, for example:
'user.displayName'
This field is available only if you have selected Presentation as the variable type that you want to add.
Use this field to enter a default value for the presentation variable, for example EASTERN REGION.
When you click OK in this dialog, the appropriate expression for the variable is created and inserted in the Formula area. For example:
@{MyFavoriteRegion}{EASTERN REGION}
Use this dialog to provide values for action parameters and to run an action.
For more information, see:
Use this dialog to identify a user who is a key resource on an initiative.
For more information, see:
Displays the name of a user who is a key resource on the initiative. Click the Set User button to display the "Select Key Resource User dialog", where you search for and select the user.
Use this field to enter the percentage of full time hours the user will devote to this initiative, for example, 80%.
Use this editor to create and modify KPIs that monitor your company's performance and goals. The KPIs that you create define performance targets and evaluate the performance of objectives and initiatives.
For more information, see:
This editor is also displayed as:
Use the "KPI editor: General Properties page" to enter the business owner, the actual value, the target value, and to turn on trending to compare KPI values with those from a previous period.
Use the "KPI editor: Dimensionality page" to specify dimensions that determine how Oracle BI EE aggregates data in the KPI.
Use the "KPI editor: Thresholds page" to specify the performance thresholds and range of values that determine how KPI performance is evaluated and represented. Also use this page to create action links for the KPI.
Use the "KPI editor: Related Documents page" to attach any relevant document or business intelligence object stored in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog.
Use this page of the "KPI editor" to add or remove KPI dimensions. This page also allows you to pin a value to a dimension.
Dimensions are based on attribute columns and hierarchical columns and determine how Oracle BI EE aggregates data in the KPI. For example, if you are creating a KPI for product sales, you could add dimensions that allow the user to view sales by both a specific region and a specific year.
Note that almost all KPIs should include a Time dimension, except constants or metrics defined only to be current snapshots like "Inventory On Hand" or "Current Phone Support Wait Time." It is not necessary to pin the time dimension to a specific value. It is a best practice to leave Time unpinned within the KPI definition. For more information, see the below description for the Value field. An unpinned Time dimension allows a dashboard or scorecard user to select the time period to display and enables the creation of trend and historical charts or tables.
For more information, see "What Are Dimensions and Pinned Dimension Values?"
This page is also displayed as:
Displays the column name that you chose for the dimension. To add a dimension to the KPI, click the Add button.
Use the down arrow to browse or search for and choose a value to pin to the dimension. When a user views the KPI, the pinned value aggregates the KPI. Select Not Pinned to do one of the following:
Allow the watchlist or scorecard designer to pin the dimension values when adding the KPI to a watchlist or scorecard.
Provide the user with a field to select the dimension's value from the point of view area in the watchlist, scorecard, or dashboard.
Note that when the designer pins a dimension value, that value cannot be changed when a user adds the KPI to a watchlist or scorecard. Only the designer or user with the appropriate permissions can access the KPI editor to modify a dimension's pinned value.
Oracle suggests that you create KPIs that are not pinned in their initial definition. Such KPIs are more flexible, reusable, and prevent you from creating and managing many over-specific KPIs. Suppose you create a Sales KPI without pinned region or time dimension values. You can then specify usages of the same KPI definition by pinning different region and time dimension values within scorecards, scorecard views, KPI watchlist rows, or dashboards.
Use to access the KPI's subject area where you can select another attribute or hierarchical column as a dimension.
Use to delete the highlighted dimension from the KPI.
Use this page of the "KPI editor" to specify the actual value (collected or calculated value) and the target value (desired value) of the KPI. You can enter, insert, or calculate these values.
Also use this tab to assign the business owner responsible for the KPI and specify if the KPI should support trending. Trending allows you to compare previous values to current values. For example, you can compare your December 2008 sales to the current year's sales.
To analyze KPIs by multiple dimensions (for example, Product, Geography, and Time), ensure that the data you use to calculate actual and target values is also dimensioned by Product, Geography, and Time.
For more information, see "How Are KPIs Evaluated?"
This page is also displayed as:
Use this field to view and select the userID of the person responsible for the business performance of the KPI. Business owners have the ability to override the KPI's statuses.
Click the Set User button to search for and select a business owner.
Use this button to open the "Select Business Owner dialog", where you can search for the person whom you want to assign as the KPI's business owner.
Use this field to specify a value to compare to the target value. Consider the following options:
Click the down-arrow button to access the subject area list and select a measure or a column that contains a measure-based formula. For example, "Sales Measures"."Dollars".
Place the cursor in the field and enter the actual value.
Click Edit Actual Value Formula to access the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab" to create a formula that calculates the actual value. For example, ((Sales - Cost)/Sales) * 100.
Use this field to specify the value that you want the KPI to achieve. The target value is a quantifiable goal for each measure. Consider the following options:
Click the down-arrow button to access the subject area list and select a measure or a column that contains a measure-based formula. For example, "Sales Measures"."Dollars".
Place the cursor in the field and enter the actual value.
Click Edit Target Value Formula to access the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab" to create a formula that calculates the actual value. For example, ((Sales - Cost)/Sales) * 100.
Use this button to access the subject area list. From this list you can browse for and select a column for the value.
Use this button to access the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab" to create a formula that calculates the value.
Use this option to indicate the direction in which change occurs (up or down), the extent of the change (as a value and percentage), and if the change indicates an increase or decrease in performance. If trending is enabled, users will see a trend icon on nodes in Scorecard diagrams, in KPI watchlists, and in other tables within Scorecard that reference this KPI. Users will also see a history chart on the KPI Details and KPI Overview tabs in Scorecard.
To use trending, ensure a time dimension is defined in the subject area.
Displays an example of how the numeric data displays in the KPI. Click Edit to access the dialog where you specify the data format settings for the KPI.
Use this option to select the period of time that you want to use for trend analysis. The period that you select determines the time periods displayed in history charts on the KPI Details tab and KPI Overview tab in Scorecard.
For example, to compare Units Shipped quarterly, select "Fiscal Time"."Quarterly". In this example, the KPI trends upward, downward, or unchanged based on the KPI values from one quarter to the next. Any KPI change values are computed using "Quarterly" as the period of analysis.
Use this field to enter the tolerance value for the trend. This field allows you to prevent reporting non-significant trends, such as expenses being over-budget by $100.
The tolerance value that you enter must be a literal and can be expressed either as a percentage or absolute value (for example, 5,000 or 5%). The tolerance level must be met before the KPI displays the performance as improving or worsening.
Use this field to specify how to measure tolerance value that you entered in the Tolerance field. Choose % Change to measure it by percent or Change to measure tolerance by the actual value.
Use this page of the "KPI editor" to view and add links to business intelligence objects or web pages that provide additional information about or can be used in conjunction with the KPI. After you add related documents to a KPI, the related documents display in the "KPI editor: Related Documents page" and on the "Scorecard editor: KPI Details tab".
This page is also displayed as:
Displays the link to the related item. Click this link to access the related document, or click Edit to modify the link.
Displays the location of the related item. The location is either a location within the catalog or a URL to a location outside of the catalog.
Displays the type of item. "Catalog" displays if the item is located in the catalog, or "Web" displays if the item is located outside of the catalog.
Use to access the "Add a Related Document dialog" to add an item to the Related Documents table.
Use to remove the highlighted row from the Related Documents table.
Use this page of the "KPI editor" to indicate if high, low, or target KPI values are desirable, specify the ranges and status symbols that gauge and represent KPI performance, and create or assign action links that the user can click to initiate a predefined process based on KPI status.
KPI status is determined by comparing the actual value against the target value and then placing the result in a corresponding range that defines levels of performance status (for example, good, warning, or critical).
This page is also displayed as:
For information about the Scorecard editor, see "Scorecard editor".
Use this list to specify if high, low, or closer to target values indicate the KPI's performance goal.
For example, select High values are desirable for a Customer References KPI or Low values are desirable for an Unresolved Support Calls KPI.
Use this field to identify the values that indicate performance levels. For example, to indicate that sales below 120 indicate critical performance but that sales above 120 reflect acceptable performance, enter 120 in the field that corresponds to the critical status.
You can use the following as thresholds:
The Actual Value or Target Value that you specified for the KPI.
Values that you enter.
Values calculated by a formula that you define in the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab". To define a formula, click the Edit Formula button.
Variables. See "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab". For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Measures representing other business metrics from the subject area.
Use this button to define threshold values by building a formula on the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab".
Use this button to remove the corresponding threshold, or to add another threshold above or below it.
Use this field to modify the default name of the performance level.
Select icon to display for this status
Use this button to access the "Graphics dialog" where you can select an icon to represent the corresponding status.
Select the text color to display for this status
Use this button to access the "Color Selector dialog" where you can select a text color to represent the corresponding status.
Use this button to display the "Action Links dialog"wherever the KPI displays, such as on strategy nodes, initiatives, KPI Watchlist, or on the scorecard views on dashboards. This dialog specifies the processes or operations to be performed or invoked if the status of a KPI corresponds to a specific performance state. Action links display from the right-mouse click wherever the KPI displays, such as on initiatives or a KPI Watchlist.
For example, if a KPI for quarterly revenue is less than a particular amount, an action is triggered that automatically schedules a mandatory meeting of sales directors and managers.
Use this option to specify whether to display the assessment scores to which each KPI status is mapped.
Displays the assessment scores to which each KPI status is mapped. For example, a KPI with 3 statuses displays assessment scores of 100, 50, and 0 by default. These scores are used in Scorecard to determine the scores of objectives and initiatives. For more on scoring in Scorecard, see "Understanding Initiative or Objective Performance Assessment"
Use this editor to create a KPI watchlist.
This editor is also displayed as:
For more information, see:
Use the "KPI Watchlist editor: Performance tab" to build the watchlist by dragging and dropping KPIs from the catalog pane to the KPI Watchlist. The KPI watchlist displays the KPIs' performance levels and other KPI data.
Use the "KPI Watchlist editor: Details tab" tab to supply a description of the KPI watchlist, specify a business owner, and attach any necessary related documents.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the watchlist in the default location.
Save As — Use this button to name and save the watchlist to another location.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", which you can use to quickly contact the watchlist's business owner.
Use this tab of the "KPI Watchlist editor" to specify supporting information for the KPI watchlist.
For more information, see:
Displays the name of the KPI watchlist.
Use this field to enter a description of the KPI watchlist.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the KPI watchlist. To specify the business owner, click the Set User button to display the "Business Owner dialog", where you can search for and select the business owner.
Use the "Related Documents area" to view and manage documents that provide supporting information to the KPI watchlist.
Use this tab of the "KPI Watchlist editor" to add KPI instances to the watchlist. When you add a KPI to the watchlist, you add an instance of the KPI. You can then assign default dimension values to the KPI's instance. From this tab you can also modify the KPI stored in the catalog, or view the KPI instance as an analysis.
Use this table to add KPIs to and manage KPIs in the watchlist.
Use this pane to specify the layout of data in data views (graphs, gauges, funnel graphs, pivot tables, and tables).
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the following editors:
Components Common to All Data Views
Note:
This section describes the components that are common to all data views. Additional components are available in the Table and Pivot Table editors (see "Additional Components Common to the Table and Pivot Table Editors") and in the Graph, Funnel, and Gauges editors (see "Additional Components Common to the Graph, Funnel, and Gauge Editors").Use drop targets to modify the way that data is arranged in a view. By dragging columns from one drop target and dropping them in another, you can rearrange the data to suit your needs.
The drop targets that are displayed in this pane depend on the type of view. For more information, see "Understanding Drop Targets".
Use this button to display the Properties dialog for a drop target. For example, if you click the button beside the Sections drop target, then the "Section Properties dialog" is displayed. If you click the button beside the view type name for tables and pivot tables, then the Properties dialog for that type of view is displayed.
Additional Components Common to the Graph, Funnel, and Gauge Editors
Use this box to specify whether the members of the columns dropped in the Sections drop target are to be displayed as a section slider rather than as unique views. Select this box to display the members as a section slider. Deselect this box to display the each member as a unique view. For more information on section sliders, see "Defining Section Sliders in Graphs and Gauges".
This box is available only for line bar graphs.
Use this box to specify whether to display the lines and bars using the same scale or two separate scales, one for the lines and one for the bars.
Select this box to use one scale for both the lines and bars. The measure column that has the higher values is used for the scale.
Deselect this box to use two scales.
Use this box to specify whether a legend is to be displayed to show the color variation of the columns dropped in the Vary Color By (Horizontal Axis) drop target.
Additional Components Common to the Table and Pivot Table Editors
Use this button to add a grand total for that drop target for the entire view for attribute columns and hierarchical columns and to display the following options:
None — Use this option to exclude totals.
Before — Use this option to include totals before the data items. For example, if you add a total on a row that contains regions and select Before, the total is shown before individual districts in the region are listed. (For pivot tables only.)
After — Use this option to include totals after the data items. (For pivot tables only.)
At the Beginning — Use this option to stack all the totals at the top of the view. (For pivot tables only.)
At the End — Use this option to stack all the totals at the bottom of the view (For pivot tables only.)
Labels Only (no totals) — Use this option to display labels for totals, but not the total values. (For pivot tables only.)
Format Labels — Use this option to display the "Edit Format dialog" where you specify the custom text to insert into a totals heading using the Caption field and where you format the labels.
Format Values — Use this option to display the "Edit Format dialog" where you specify the formatting of the totals values.
Use this button to display the following options:
Format Headings — Use this option to display the "Edit Format dialog", where you apply cosmetic formatting to the headings.
For more information about the cosmetic formatting that you can apply to headings, see "What is Cosmetic Formatting?"
Format Values — Use this option to display the "Edit Format dialog", where you apply cosmetic formatting to the values.
Hidden — Use this option to hide the column from the output, or, for the Measure Labels element in a pivot table, to hide the measure labels. For more information on the Measure Labels element, see "Understanding Drop Targets".
Hidden columns do not affect the aggregation of the values.
Show Data As — Use this option to display a measure as either an actual or a relative value. You can display the relative value of the measure, compared to the total, without the need to explicitly create a calculated item for it.
For more information, see "Displaying Relative Values for Measure Columns in Pivot Tables".
Note:
The Show Data As options is available only for items that are stored or calculated measures.Select one of the following options:
Values — Use this option to display the actual values of the measure column.
Percent of — Use this option to convert a stored or calculated measure into a percent of one of the following:
Column — Shows the percentage of the column that the value constitutes.
Row — Shows the percentage of the row that the value constitutes.
Section — Shows the percentage of the section that the value constitutes.
Page — Shows the percentage of the page that the value constitutes.
Column Parent — Shows the percentage of the column parent that the value constitutes.
Row Parent — Shows the percentage of the row parent that the value constitutes.
Layer — Displays a menu from which you select the column in the view from which you obtain the percentage that the value constitutes.
Note:
The number of decimal places is dependent upon the type of measure.Index of — Use this option to convert a stored or calculated measure into an index value of one of the same options that are available for Percent of. For example, Column shows the index value of the column that this value constitutes.
Aggregation Rule — Use this option to override the default aggregation rule for a measure in tables and pivot tables by selecting the aggregation rule to apply, as described in "Aggregation Rules and Functions". For attribute columns, ensure that Report-Based Total is selected. This option is not available for the Prompts or Sections drop targets.
Display as Running Sum — Use this option to display numeric measures as running sums, where each consecutive cell for the measure displays the total of all previous cells for that measure. This option is a display feature only that has no effect on actual pivot table results.
For more information, see "Displaying Running Sums for Measure Columns in Pivot Tables".
Duplicate Layer — Use this option to duplicate a column. You create a duplicate that applies only to this view. The duplicate does not retain filters, selection steps, or formatting that were applied to the original.
Remove Column or Remove Duplicate — Use this option to remove the item on which you have clicked, such as a column or duplicated item. The column is removed from this view and all other views for the analysis. The duplicate is removed from this view only.
Place Value in New Row — Use this option to display section values on different rows. Where section values are displayed together in a row, you can specify that a section value is displayed on a new row.
Hide Repeated Values —Use this option to display column values for a section once and hide repeated values until the values change. When the section column value changes, it is displayed indented to the right to show the hierarchical structure.
Format Measure Label — This option is available only for the Measure Labels element in a pivot table. Use this option to display the "Edit Format dialog", where you apply cosmetic formatting to measure labels. For more information on the Measure Labels element, see "Understanding Drop Targets".
The following list describes the aggregation rules that are available for measure columns in the "Layout pane" and for columns in the "Edit Column Formula dialog: Column Formula tab". The list also includes functions that you can use when creating a calculated item.
Default — Applies the default aggregation rule as in the Oracle BI repository or by the original author of the analysis. Not available for calculated items.
Server Determined — Applies the aggregation rule that is determined by the Oracle BI Server (such as the rule that is defined in the Oracle BI repository). The aggregation is performed within Presentation Services for simple rules such as Sum, Min, and Max. Not available for measure columns in the Layout pane or for calculated items.
Sum — Calculates the sum obtained by adding up all values in the result set. Use this for items that have numeric values.
Min — Calculates the minimum value (lowest numeric value) of the rows in the result set. Use this for items that have numeric values.
Max — Calculates the maximum value (highest numeric value) of the rows in the result set. Use this for items that have numeric values.
Average — Calculates the average (mean) value of an item in the result set. Use this for items that have numeric values. Averages on tables and pivot tables are rounded to the nearest whole number.
First — In the result set, selects the first occurrence of the item for measures. For calculated items, selects the first member according to the display in the Selected list. Not available in the Edit Column Formula dialog.
Last — In the result set, selects the last occurrence of the item. For calculated items, selects the last member according to the display in the Selected list. Not available in the Edit Column Formula dialog.
Count — Calculates the number of rows in the result set that have a nonnull value for the item. The item is typically a column name, in which case the number of rows with nonnull values for that column are returned.
Count Distinct — Adds distinct processing to the Count function. This means that each distinct occurrence of the item is counted only once.
None — Applies no aggregation. Not available for calculated items.
Server Complex Aggregate — Applies the aggregation rule that is determined by the Oracle BI Server (such as the rule that is defined in the Oracle BI repository). The aggregation is performed by the Oracle BI Server, rather than within Presentation Services. Not available for calculated items.
Report-Based Total (when applicable) — If not selected, specifies that the Oracle BI Server should calculate the total based on the entire result set, before applying any filters to the measures. Not available in the Edit Column Formula dialog or for calculated items. Only available for attribute columns.
Use this pane to view the legend for a cause & effect map or strategy map.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Cause & Effect Map tab: Diagram tab" or the "Strategy Map tab: Diagram tab".
Displays and explains the symbols used on the cause and effect map or strategy map to indicate the proportionality. That is, whether changes in performance or value in the cause and effect relationship are directly proportional (direct) or inversely proportional (inverse) and strength (strong, moderate, or weak) of cause & effect relationships.
Use this dialog to specify properties for a text link or image link that you are adding to a dashboard page.
For more information, see "Adding Content to Dashboards".
Use this field to enter the text to display for the text link or image link.
Entering a caption for an image link is optional. If you do enter one, then you must also specify, in the Image Layout box, where the caption is to be displayed relative to the image.
Use this field to specify what is to happen when the user clicks the text or image:
To add text or an image only, without any links, leave the field empty.
To specify that an analysis or dashboard should be displayed when the user clicks the link or image, specify the destination as Analysis or Dashboard, and click Browse to display the "Open dialog" where you select the analysis or dashboard.
To specify that another action should occur, such as opening a Web site, document, or program, specify the destination as a URL and type the full path into the field that follows the Destination options.
A link is defined as any URL that the browser can interpret. URLs can point to Web sites, documents, images, FTP sites, newsgroups, and so on. Depending on the browser, the following are examples of valid URLs:
http://home.netscape.com/index.html ftp://ftp.microsoft.com news:news.announce.newusers
See Table B-3 for more information about the kinds of internal or external content to which you can link.
Note:
Administrators should create a virtual directory on the Presentation server for shared documents called \DashboardFiles that maps to a shared network directory of the same name. This allows users with the appropriate permissions to publish files to this folder, and reference these files by their relative URL names rather than by their fully qualified network share names, for example, \DashboardFiles\AnnualReport.doc instead of \\SharedServer\CommonShare\DashboardFiles\AnnualReport.doc.Use this box to specify whether the information is to be displayed in the Current Window or in a New Window for the browser.
For every action except sending mail and executing a program, you can control how the link should be displayed. Select the current window when you want the action to occur in the display pane of the dashboard. This leaves the dashboard active but in the background. Choose a new window when you want the action to take place in a new browser window. This opens another instance of the browser.
Use this field to enter the location and name of the image to be displayed. Specify the location as a URL. These are examples:
http://imageserver/MyImage.gif /DashboardFiles/image.gif
If the image is not on the local server, then the URL must include http://. If the image is for use in a shared environment, then ensure that the image is located on a network drive that is accessible to all users.
Use this box to select where to display the image, such as to the right or left of the caption or above or below the caption, if you entered a caption.
You can reference variables in the Caption, Destination and Image fields. For the syntax to use, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Table B-3 provides information about the kinds of internal or external content to which you can link:
Table B-3 Link Options for Adding a Text Link or Image Using the Dashboard Editor
| Link Option | Comments |
|---|---|
|
Web site or document |
You need to locate the URL, or address, for the site or document. You can copy the destination address from the browser's address or location box, and then paste it. For a Web site, you can omit the http:// portion of the address if the URL resides on the Web server, such as your intranet site. If the URL resides on your company's Web server, then you can enter the relative address of the file. For example: \DashboardFiles\Logo.gif |
|
Local or shared document |
If the document is for use in a shared environment, then ensure that it is located on a network drive that is accessible to all users. Examples of the kinds of documents that you can open are spreadsheets that contains recent sales reports, a slide presentation that introduces a new product, a Microsoft Word document that contains your company's annual report, a graphic file that contains a map from the airport to your corporate headquarters, and so on. For example, if the document is for your use only, a sample location might be: c:\mycomputer\reports\report.doc For a shared document, specify the UNC name, for example: \\ALLUSERS\reports\report.doc |
|
Send email to a specified user |
You need to know the mailto URL, for example: mailto:support@oracle.com When the user selects this link, the browser will launch the mail application with the To: field filled in. (The browser controls the launching of the mail program.) |
|
Execute a program |
If the program is for use in a shared environment, then ensure that it is located on a network drive that is accessible to all users. You can use this feature to download and run an application. (The operating system controls the launching of the application.) For example, if you want to launch Microsoft Word for your use only, a sample location might be: c:\MSOFFICE\OFFICE\winword.exe For a multiuser-licensed program on a shared drive, specify the UNC name for the location, for example: \\ALLUSERS\SOFTWARE\MSOFFICE\OFFICE\WORD\winword.exe |
|
Refresh your browser using JavaScript |
Your browser needs to support JavaScript in order to use the following example. javascript:window.location.reload() In the Target area, choose the option Current Window. |
Use this dialog to edit the properties of a map view, such as its size and the options that are available on the toolbar.
For more information, see "Editing Map Views".
Use the "Map Properties dialog: Canvas tab" to specify the size of the map.
Use the "Map Properties dialog: Tools tab" to specify which tools are available for display with the map.
Use the "Map Properties dialog: Interaction tab" to specify whether to automatically create formats when drilling in a map.
Use the "Map Properties dialog: Labels tab" to specify whether to show the labels for certain layers on the map view.
Use this tab of the "Map Properties dialog" to specify the size of the map.
For more information, see "Editing Map Views".
Use this box to specify the size of the map within its container. You can select either Default, Custom, or a predefined size. If you select Default or a predefined size, then no other options are available and the map is sized to fit its container. The container is whatever area is holding the map, such as the area in the Map editor or the section of a dashboard page.
Use this field to specify the width of the map in pixels.
Use this field to specify the height of the map in pixels.
Use the Interaction tab and the Labels tab of the "Map Properties dialog" to do the following:
Specify whether to automatically create formats when users drill in a map. This setting applies to the entire map view, rather than to specific formats.
Specify whether to show the labels for certain layers on the map view.
The tab is also displayed as:
For more information, see "Editing Map Views".
Automatically create formats when drilling
Available on the Interaction tab. Use this box to specify whether to automatically create formats each time that you drill in a map. The formats that you create are listed in the Map Formats pane and are based on the formats that exist on the base drill layer. For example, if you have a Region color fill format and a Region pie graph format and you drill on that layer, then you automatically create a new color fill format and a new pie format with the drill action.
You can also specify this option in the Map Formats area of the Map View editor. The option is updated in both places when you make a change in either place.
Show Labels for Spatial Layers
Available on the Labels tab. Use this box to specify whether to show labels for all layers or specific layers on the map view. The tab includes a box for each layer on the map view. The labels are displayed in the same order as that of the layers listed in the Map Formats area of the Map View editor. Custom point layers have labels hidden by default.
Use this tab of the "Map Properties dialog" to specify which tools are available for display with the map.
For more information, see "Editing Map Views".
Use this box to specify the display of the following buttons on the toolbar:
Pan Hand
Zoom In, Zoom Out
Use this box to specify the display of the following options on top of the map:
Pan Buttons
Zoom Slider
Use this box to specify the display of the following options in the Information panel of the map:
Distance Indicator
Map Overview
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Mission tab" and the "Scorecard editor: Vision tab" to specify supporting information for the mission or vision statement.
For more information, see:
The tab is also displayed as:
Displays the name of the mission or vision statement.
Use this field to enter a description of the mission or vision statement.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the mission or vision statement. To specify the business owner, click the Set User button to display the "Business Owner dialog", where you can search for and select the business owner.
Use the "Related Documents area" to view and manage documents that provide supporting information to the mission or vision statement.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Mission tab" and the "Scorecard editor: Vision tab" to enter and format your mission statement or vision statement.
For more information, see:
The tab is also displayed as:
This toolbar contains buttons (such as Bold, Increase Font Size) for formatting your mission or vision statement.
Use this dialog to specify your personal preferences, such as your locale, time zone, preferred currency, and delivery options for the delivery of alerts by agents. The options that display on this dialog depend upon your privileges.
Note:
If the Delivery Devices and Deliver Profiles tabs already contain devices and profiles, then do not make any changes to these tabs without first consulting the administrator, as any changes you make will override the delivery device and profile information that was configured for you.For more information, see:
Displays the user ID that is shown in the user interface.
Displays the name that is shown in the user interface.
Use the "My Account dialog: Preferences tab" to specify your account's display preferences.
Use the "My Account dialog: BI Publisher Preferences tab" to specify your Oracle BI Publisher preferences.
Use the "My Account dialog: Delivery Options tab" to configure your devices and profiles for the delivery of alerts.
Use the "My Account dialog: My Application Roles tab" to view a list of the roles to which you have been assigned by the administrator.
Use the "My Account Dialog: Delegated Users tab" to view a list of users who have been given the privileges to access your analyses and dashboards, if the administrator has configured this functionality.
Use this tab of the "My Account dialog" to modify the Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher preferences.
For more information, see:
Use this box to select a locale for reports. This locale can be different than the locale that you specified in the "My Account dialog: Preferences tab".
The reports that you view and create will use the locale that you specify here. The locale usually corresponds to the language that you specify in the User Interface Language field that you selected in the "My Account: Preferences tab" or the country from where you are working. For example, your specified language is English and your locale can be English - United States or English - Canada. The locale that you select determines the date and time formats, daylight saving time settings, and currency formats settings.
Use this box to select the time zone that you want to apply when viewing or creating reports. This time zone can be different than the time zone that you specified in the "My Account: Preferences tab."
This option is useful if you do not reside in the same physical location as the default time zone that was set by the administrator, and you want to select another time zone.
Use this tab of the "My Account dialog" to view a list of users who can use the "Act As" functionality to access your analyses and dashboards. You cannot modify this list. This tab is available only if the administrator has configured this functionality.
Depending upon the privileges, users can inherit your user privileges, which allows them to change your default dashboard and modify your content and preferences, or they are granted restricted access to only view your analyses and dashboards. When users are granted restricted access, they maintain their own user privileges when accessing your business intelligence content.
For more information, see:
Use this tab of the "My Account dialog" to configure your delivery devices and delivery profiles. Your delivery devices, along with your delivery profiles, control how you will be reached when an alert is generated by an agent.
For more information, see:
Use this area to configure your delivery devices. To do so, in the first box, select the category of the device, either Email, Phone, Pager, Handheld, or Other), and then to:
Create a device, click the Create Device button to display the "Create Device dialog", where you create a device.
If you want a device to be the default device for the category, select the Default option in the Default column to the right of the device name.
Note:
When the destinations specified for agents are specific devices, the default devices you specify here override the devices in your active delivery profile. For example, if an agent is defined to be delivered to e-mail devices, the default e-mail device you specify here will be used rather than any e-mail devices you specify in your active delivery profile. (The destinations for agents are specified on the "Agent editor: Destinations tab").Delete a device, select the device name and then click the Delete Device button.
Edit a device, select the device name and then click the Edit Device button. The "Edit Device dialog" is displayed.
Use this area to configure your delivery profiles. Click the Create Delivery Profile button to display the "Create Delivery Profile dialog", where you create a delivery profile.
If you want a delivery profile to be your active profile, click the Active option in the Active column to the right of the profile name.
To delete a delivery profile, select the profile name and then click the Delete Profile button.
To edit a delivery profile, select the profile name and then click the Edit Profile button. The "Edit Delivery Profile dialog" is displayed.
Use this tab of the "My Account dialog" to view a list of the application roles to which you are assigned. You cannot modify this list. See the administrator to be added to or removed from application roles.
An application role defines a set of permissions. Any user or group assigned to an application role is granted the permissions associated with that role. For example, you might belong to a role that allows you to view and not create business intelligence content.
Use this tab of the "My Account dialog" to specify your account's display preferences.
For more information, see:
Use this box to select the dashboard that you want to display when you sign in to Oracle BI Enterprise Edition. Note the following options:
Default — Select this option to set your company's default dashboard, as specified by the administrator, as your default dashboard. In some cases, the administrator might require you to use only the company's default dashboard as the dashboard that displays when you sign into Oracle BI EE.
Home Page — Select this option to set the Home page as your default dashboard. You might select this option if creating objects or maintaining the catalog is your primary job responsibility.
My Dashboard — Select this option to set your My Dashboard that you have created and saved as your default dashboard.
Saved Dashboards — This list contains the names of all of the dashboards that have been created and saved to the catalog's dashboards subfolders (for example, Shared Folders then Marketing subfolder then Dashboards subfolder). You can set any of the dashboards that are displayed in this list as your default dashboard.
Use this box to select a locale. The locale usually corresponds to the language that you specify in the User Interface Language field or the country from where you are working. For example, your specified language is English and your locale can be English - United States or English - Canada.
The locale that you select determines the date and time formats, daylight saving time settings, and currency formats settings.
Use this box to select the language in which you want the Oracle BI EE interface to display. The language that you specify here persists, unless, for example, it is overridden for the session by the language that you specify in the "Sign In page". If your language is overridden, then the cause of the override displays in a second box within this field.
Use this box to select the time zone that you want to apply when viewing content. This option is useful if you do not reside in the same physical location as the default time zone that was set by the administrator, and you want to select another time zone. For example, suppose that the Oracle BI Server that sends you alerts resides in the US Pacific time zone, but your work location is in the US Central time zone. After you set the Central time zone as your preferred time zone setting, the delivered time on your alerts is displayed in Central time.
Your account's time zone will automatically apply to any items that you create, modify, run, receive, and print. The date and time columns included in analyses are displayed according to the content designer. The content designer can force a specific time zone to be displayed in the column or can allow your default time zone to be displayed in the column. A clock button will display in the column heading, and when you hover over this button, the name of the time zone used in the column is displayed.
For more information on how the administrator sets the Oracle BI Server time zone, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Metadata Repository Builder's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
This box is available only if the administrator has configured the userpref_currencies.xml file as described in Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this box to select the currency in which to view currency columns in dashboards and analyses.
This selection:
Takes effect in your current session.
Is saved to the catalog and remains in effect for all sessions until you again modify and save it.
Applies to all currency columns that have been converted by the Oracle BI Server and for which the currency data format has been set (by the content designer) to use the user's preferred currency.
The administrator defines the currency options that are available in this box.
Use this option to select whether content for Oracle BI EE is rendered in a browser in a way that facilitates the use of a screen reader.
For information, see Appendix E, "Accessibility Features."
Use this dialog to create a new action link to add to an analysis.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this field to enter the text to display as the link to execute the associated action.
Displays the action to be associated with the action link.
Use this button to select the type of action that you want to create. If you selected:
Navigate to BI Content, first the "Select BI Content For Action dialog" is displayed, where you select the Oracle BI EE content to which to navigate, and then the "Create New Action dialog" is displayed.
Invoke a Web Service, the "Select Web Service Operation dialog" is displayed, where you select a Web Service operation to be invoked, and then the Create New Action dialog is displayed.
Invoke a Java Method, the "Select Java Method dialog" is displayed, where you select the Java method to be invoked, and then the Create New Action dialog is displayed.
Any other action type, the Create New Action dialog is displayed.
Use this button to display the "Open dialog", where you select an existing action to add to the analysis.
This button is available only for named actions that have parameters that are not fixed or hidden.
Use this button to display the "Edit Parameter Mapping dialog", where you edit the action parameters.
Displays these options:
Edit Action — Use this option to display the "Edit Action dialog", where you can edit the action.
Remove Action — Use this option to remove the action.
Save Action As — Use this option to display the "Save Action As dialog", where you can save the action to the catalog. If the action is an inline action, then the action is saved to the catalog rather than saved with the analysis. If the action is a named action, then you can save the action with the same name or another name.
Use this box to specify one of the following options:
Always — Use to specify that the action link is always to be enabled.
Conditionally — This option is not available when you are adding an action link to a column heading. Use to specify that the action link is to be enabled only under certain conditions. Selecting this option displays the Conditions area.
For more information, see "About Conditionally Enabling Actions".
(Displayed only if the Conditionally option is selected.)
Use this area to create one or more conditions to be used to conditionally enable the action link.
To create a condition, you select either an attribute column or a hierarchical column on which to base it but with these restrictions:
If you select an attribute column, you can add multiple conditions.
If you select a hierarchical column, you can add only one condition.
You cannot combine conditions based on attribute columns with a condition based on a hierarchical column and vice versa.
If you add multiple conditions, then each additional condition you add is combined with the previous condition using the AND operator. The AND operator means that the criteria specified in each condition must be met. This is the default method for combining conditions. You can change the AND operator to OR by clicking AND. The OR operator means that the criteria specified in at least one condition must be met.
Depending on how you construct the condition combinations with the AND and OR operators, some conditions might be grouped. Grouped conditions are bounded by boxes.
This area includes the following components:
New Condition — Use this button to first select the column on which to base the condition and then display the "New Condition dialog", where you can create a new condition.
Edit Filter — Use this option to display the "Edit Condition dialog", where you edit the condition.
Copy Filter and Paster Filter — Use these options to add a copy of the condition to the list of conditions. The copy is added below the condition that you copied with the AND operator between them.
You can then edit the copy of the condition. You can also change the operator to OR.
This option is useful to quickly add an additional condition to the list by modifying an existing one.
Delete — Use this button to delete the condition.
AND or OR — Use this button to toggle between the AND and OR operators.
Edit Filter Group — This button displays only for a group of conditions.
Displays these options:
Ungroup — Use this option to ungroup the group of conditions.
Delete Group — Use this option to delete the group of conditions.
Duplicate Group — Use this option to duplicate the group of conditions
Use this dialog to create or edit a calculated item or a group.
For more information, see "Working with Groups and Calculated Items".
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this field to specify the label for the calculated item or group when it is displayed in a view. This label can differ from the name under which the object is stored in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog.
Use this box to select an attribute column or hierarchical column, which is included in the analysis, whose values you want to use for the calculated item or group. This field is read-only if you displayed the dialog from the Layout pane or from a location in which a column was already selected.
Use this box to select the function for the calculated item. Many of the functions are those described in "Aggregation Rules and Functions".
In addition, you can select Custom Formula, which provides a toolbar with which you select mathematical operators to include in the function for the calculated item. You can also enter the following functions: Absolute, Ceiling, Floor, Round, Sqrt.
A formula creates a dynamic custom grouping within the view. All measures referenced in a formula must be from the same column and must be present in the results. Formulas can be inserted into, or combined with, other calculated items.
Instead of specifying a named item for attribute columns, you can specify $n or $-n, where n is an integer that indicates the item's row position. If you specify $n, then the measure is taken from the nth row. If you specify $-n, then the measure is taken from the nth to the last row.
Use this area to select members to move to the Selected List area. The "Catalog pane" is displayed so you can select members or groups from there. When you move a member to the Selected List area, it is displayed with a green check mark beside it in the Available List area.
Use this button to display the Search area of the "Select Values dialog", where you can locate members.
Use this area to view the values that you have selected from the Available area and moved to the Selected area. If you selected Custom Formula, then use the toolbar of mathematical operators at the bottom to create the formula for this calculated item. Use the following operators:
+ Plus sign, for an addition operation in the formula.
- Minus sign, for a subtraction operation in the formula.
* Multiply sign, for a multiplication operation in the formula.
/ Divide By sign, for a division operation in the formula.
% percent sign, for include a percent in the formula.
$ Dollar sign, for acting upon the row position of an item in the formula.
( Open parenthesis, to signify the beginning of a group operation in the formula.
) Close parenthesis, to signify the ending of a group operation in the formula.
Use this button to display the "Edit Format dialog" where you format the calculated item or group. If you apply formatting in this dialog, this formatting is applied first, then conditional formatting is applied.
Use this box to suppress the display of the members that you have included in the calculated item in the view. For example, suppose that you have a pivot table that is displaying Region on the row edge, and it is currently showing the values Eastern, Western, and Central. Suppose that you create a new calculated item called "Other Regions" that is the sum of Western + Central. If you select Hide Details, then only two members are shown in the pivot table: Eastern and Other Regions.
If you select this box for a custom formula, then an implicit remove selection step is created using the items from either the custom formula or from the Selected list.
Use this tab to see the steps that will be saved as a group, if you select the Steps button. This tab is available only if you are editing a group that you have previously saved as a list of selection steps.
Use this tab to see the members that have been specified by the selection steps.
Steps (generate results dynamically at runtime)
Click this button to save the selection steps for a group. The results of the selection are refreshed at runtime.
Results (generate results now and display every time)
Click this button to save a group as a list of members, rather than as a list of steps.
To select multiple values, press the Ctrl key, then click the values.
To select a range of values, click the first value in the range, press the Shift key, then click the last value in the range.
To move one or more values from the Available List area to the Selected List area, use the Move or Move All button. You also can double-click a single value in the Available List area to move it to the Selected List area.
For a group, the following options are displayed when you click Move. These options are not available when you create a nested group.
Add — Use this option to add the group to the analysis. You will see an "Add: group-name" step in the Selected List area. You will see an outline value for the group in a table or pivot table.
Add Members — Use this option to add the members of the group to the analysis. You will see an "Add: Members of group-name" step in the Selected List area. You will not see an outline value in a table or pivot table; you will see the members of the group.
To remove one or more values from the Selected List area, use the Remove or Remove All button. You also can double-click a single value in the Selected List area to remove it.
Use this dialog to create or edit a condition.
For more information, see Chapter 9, "Working with Conditions."
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this list to select whether the condition is to be based on an Analysis or KPI.
Use this button to display one of the following dialogs, where you select the analysis or KPI on which to base the condition:
For an analysis, the "Select Analysis dialog" is displayed.
For a KPI, the "Select KPI dialog" is displayed.
Displays the following:
Selected Analysis — If the condition is based on an analysis, then use this button to view the analysis.
Information about the analysis or KPI on which the condition is based.
Displays the prompted filters associated with the analysis. (A prompted filter is a filter whose operator is set to Is Prompted.)
Click the Edit button adjacent to a prompted filter to display the "Edit Parameter Filter dialog", where you edit the filter.
Displays the KPI dimensions whose values were set to Not Pinned in the KPI. Use the Value fields to specify values for these dimensions.
This area is available only if the condition is based on an analysis.
Use this area to specify the evaluation criteria as follows:
Operator — Use this box to select the operator to apply to the row count. Valid operators are:
is equal to — Use to evaluate whether the number of rows in the analysis is equal to the number of rows specified
is not equal to — Use to evaluate whether the number of rows in the analysis is not equal to the number of rows specified
is less than — Use to evaluate whether the number of rows in the analysis is less than the number of rows specified
is greater than — Use to evaluate whether the number of rows in the analysis is greater than the number of rows specified
is less than or equal to — Use to evaluate whether the number of rows in the analysis is less than or equal to the number of rows specified
is greater than or equal to — Use to evaluate whether the number of rows in the analysis is greater than or equal to the number of rows specified
is between — Use to evaluate whether the number of rows in the analysis is between the range of rows specified
is not between — Use to evaluate whether the number of rows in the analysis is not between the range of rows specified
Row Count — Use this box or boxes to specify the row count to be evaluated. For a range of rows, the start and end values that you specify are included in the range.
This area is available only if the condition is based on a KPI.
Use this box to specify the KPI status on which the condition is to be evaluated.
Use this button to test whether the condition evaluates to true or false. Displays the Test Condition dialog, which provides the results of the condition evaluation.
Use this dialog to create a new condition step as part of working with selection steps.
For more information, see "Working with Selections of Data".
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use to select from a list of condition types for the specified dimension column. The following list describes the categories of condition steps that you can create. The components in this dialog differ slightly, depending on which type you select.
Exception — Conditions that select members using comparisons of values for measure columns. Sample conditions are "Sales > Cost" and "Sales <= Cost + 10%."
Top/Bottom — Conditions that select the specified number of members after ranking the members by the specified measure column. You can specify an exact number of members or a percentage of the total members. Sample conditions are "Top 10 based on Sales" and "Top 5% based on Cost."
Match — Conditions that select members based on matches with text strings and attribute values. A sample condition is "Name contains abc." You can use this condition only with columns that have a string data type.
Time/Ordinal — Conditions that select members based on ranges of time and on hierarchical levels. A sample condition is "From July 2000 to December 2000." Available only for columns with a data type that relates to time.
Use this box to select the type of action to create for the members that the condition step specifies. You can select to add the selected members to the selection, keep only the selected members and remove all others, or remove the selected members from the selection.
Use the box beside the action type to select the column for whose members you are creating the condition step.
Use this area to select the operator, based on the type:
For Exception, depends on the type. Sample values include Within, Not Within, Between, Greater than, and Equals.
For Top/Bottom, whether the members have a ranking of top or bottom.
For Time/Ordinal, either:
Whether to use the last or first number of time periods, using the value in the Number field.
Whether the members start with, end with, or come before or after the column value in the Time Period field.
For Match, whether the members contain, begin with, end with, or match the string in the Text field.
Enter the number of time periods, such as 3, when creating condition steps of type Time/Ordinal.
Select the column value on which to base the condition, when creating condition steps of type Time/Ordinal.
Enter the percentage to use for the rank or range, such as 5, when creating condition steps of type Exception or Top/Bottom.
Enter the value to use for the comparison, when creating condition steps of type Exception.
Enter the string to use for matching with the members, when creating condition steps of type Match. Select Match Case to provide case-sensitivity for the matching.
Use this box to specify that an analysis prompt, a dashboard prompt, or a variable can override the values that you specify in this condition step. Depending on what you are overriding, you can override certain values with a prompt, a presentation variable, a session variable, or a repository variable.
If you select a variable type, then enter the name of the variable in the field. For example, suppose that you have a column called EMPLOYEE_ID. You can specify USER as the session variable with which to override the value of that column. When a user logs in, the column value is set to his login name. For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
In a list of steps for a column, specify that only one step in the list be able to be overridden by a prompt or presentation variable.
For information, see Chapter 6, "Prompting in Dashboards and Analyses."
Use this list to select the name of the measure column whose data values you want to compare, when creating condition steps of type Exception or Top/Bottom.
Use this area to qualify all of the dimensions of the analysis other than the dimension whose members you want to select, when creating condition steps of type Exception or Top/Bottom. For each dimension, you select which of its members to include. You can select specific members, or All, which specifies to aggregate the members when creating the condition. For example, suppose that you are qualifying the Region dimension. You can select a specific region, such as East, whose value is used in the condition. If you select All, then the values of all regions are aggregated and used in the condition.
You can use the For area to create a qualified data reference (QDR). A QDR is a qualifier that limits one or more of the dimensions to retrieve a single value for a measure column. A QDR is useful when you want to temporarily reference a measure column value without affecting the current status of the dimensions.
When you specify a QDR, you can specify multiple members for limiting the dimensions. When you specify multiple members, the measure column value is aggregated using the default aggregation from the Oracle BI Server. For example, suppose that you want to create a condition for displaying those Regions in which Units is greater than 100. Suppose that you create a QDR for the Year dimension that specifies 2000 and 2001 and that the default aggregation is Sum. If the values for 2000 and 2001 for the Central region are 50 and 60 respectively, then both those years are displayed, because their sum exceeds the 100 units that was indicated.
Use this list to select either addition or subtraction, to enter the number and to specify whether the number is a percent, when creating certain condition steps of type Exception.
Use this box to select the part of the member that you want to match when creating condition steps of type Match. Options include any label, member ID, long label, medium label, and short label.
To create a new step that is based on a hierarchy, use the "New Hierarchy Selection Step dialog".
Use this dialog to specify the name, description, and location of the dashboard that you are creating.
For more information, see "Creating Dashboards".
Use this field to enter a name for the dashboard.
Use this field to enter a description for the dashboard.
Use this list to select a folder for the dashboard in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog. If the folder you want is not in the list, click the Browse Catalog link (at the bottom of the list) to display the "Select Location dialog", where you can browse for the folder that you want.
If you choose a folder in which no dashboards have been saved, then a new "Dashboards" folder is automatically created in that folder in which to save the new dashboard. For example, if you choose folder named /Shared Folders/Sales in which no dashboards have been saved, a new Dashboards folder is automatically created and the Location entry changes to as /Shared Folders/Sales/Dashboards.
If you save the dashboard in the Dashboards subfolder directly under /Shared Folders/first level subfolder, the dashboard will be listed in the Dashboard menu in the global header. If you save it in a Dashboards subfolder at any other level (such as /Shared Folders/Sales/Eastern), it will not be listed.
Displays the following options:
Add Content Now — Select this option to add content to the new dashboard now. The new dashboard that contains one blank page is displayed in the "Dashboard builder" for editing.
Add Content Later — Select this option to add content to the new dashboard later. An an empty dashboard is created (but not displayed) to which you can add content later.
See "Editing Dashboards".
Use this dialog to create or edit the EVALUATE_PREDICATE function's formula.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Displays the primary subject area as well as any related subject areas that have been added to the "Subject Areas pane". Use this area to select columns to use in the formula. To insert a column in a formula, select the column and click the Add Column button.
Use this area to create the EVALUATE_PREDICATE function's formula.
You can enter the formula manually or use these components:
Variable > — Use this button to select the type of variable (Session, Repository, or Presentation) to add. The "Insert Variable dialog" is displayed, where you specify the name of the variable.
+ — Use this button to insert the addition operator to add values.
- — Use this button to insert the subtraction operator to subtract values.
x —Use this button to insert the multiplication operator to multiply values.
/ — Use this button to insert the division operator to divide values.
% — Use this button to insert the percent sign to divide values by 100.
( — Use this button to insert the left parenthesis to enclose data in brackets.
) — Use this button to insert the right parenthesis to enclose data in brackets.
||— Use this button to insert the concatenation operator.
To manually enter a variable in an expression in the Formula area, follow the guidelines for referencing variables in expressions described in Table 2-2.
Use this dialog to create or edit a column filter, to specify a condition under which an action link is to be enabled, or to specify a condition for applying graph formatting.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Note:
When this dialog is displayed as the New Condition dialog or the Edit Condition dialog, not all components are available.Displays the name of the column for the filter.
Use this button to display the "Edit Column Formula dialog" where you can modify the column's formula for use with the filter that you are creating.
Use this button to select the time zone.
Use this list to select the operator to apply to the value specified in the Value. For guidelines, see "Operators".
Note that, if your repository is configured for double columns, and you are creating the filter on a display column and select the contains all, contains any, does not contain, begins with, ends with, is LIKE (pattern match), or is not LIKE (pattern match) operator, then filtering will always be done by display values, not code values. For more information on double columns, see "Understanding the Double Column Feature".
Use this field to specify one or more values to use when applying the filter or condition. You can:
Type values.
Select values from the list box or calendar.
To search for specific values from the list box, click Search in the list box. The "Select Values dialog" is displayed, where you can search for and select values.
If your repository is configured for double columns, and you are creating the filter on a display column, then by default you specify display values. However, if your organization allows the display of code values, then you can specify code values rather than display values, but only if you use one of the following operators:
is equal to / is in
is not equal to / is not in
is between
To specify code values, select the Select by Code Column check box.
Note:
If you create or modify a filter or condition using code values and, subsequently, the code column for that value is removed from the Presentation layer using the Administration Tool, then filtering by code values remains in effect (although the code values will not be visible). When you edit the filter or condition, the code value (for example, 1) will be converted to the equivalent display value (for example, Excellent).For more information on double columns, see "Understanding the Double Column Feature".
Available only if your repository is configured for double columns, you are creating the filter on a display column whose code column is exposed in the repository Presentation layer, and you selected either the is equal to / is in, is not equal to / is not in, or is between operator.
Use this box to allow code values to be specified in the Value field. When this box is selected, the list box displays both the code values and the display values (for example, 1 - Beverages) for selection and the Filter by box is selected but disabled. When this box is deselected, the list box displays only the display values (for example, Beverages).
Available only if your repository is configured for double columns and you selected either the is equal to / is in, is not equal to / is not in, or is between operator.
Use this box to specify whether the column is to be filtered by code values or display values. Select this box to filter by code values. Deselect this box to filter by display values.
Use this link to view the complete list of values without the filter applied.
Use this link to view a list of values with the filter applied.
Available if you selected the is based on the results of another analysis operator.
Use this field to specify the saved analysis whose results are to be the basis for the filter.
Available if you selected is based on the results of another analysis in the Operator field.
Use this list to select the appropriate operator to determine the analysis' column results that will set the filter.
This field displays if you selected the is based on the results of another analysis operator.
Use this list to view a matching column name in the analysis, if there is one. If you want to use another column, then select it instead. The values in this column will set the filter.
Available for all operators except is prompted or the is based on the results of another analysis.
Click this button to add a SQL expression or a session, repository, or presentation variable to the filter. You can add one or more of these options. When you select an option, a corresponding field is displayed where you specify either a SQL expression or the name of the variable.
When this dialog is displayed as the New Conditions dialog from the "Column Properties dialog: Conditional Format tab", you can add only a presentation variable.
For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Available if you selected SQL Expression from the Add More Options list.
Enter or paste a SQL expression.
Available if you selected Session Variable from the Add More Options list.
Enter the name of the session variable that you want to use, for example USER.
Available if you selected Repository Variable from the Add More Options list.
Enter the name of the repository variable that you want to use, for example prime_begin.
Available if you selected Presentation Variable from the Add More Options list.
Enter the name of the presentation variable that you want to use, for example MyFavoriteRegion.
Available if you selected Presentation Variable from the Add More Options list.
(Optional) Specify a default value to be used if no value is returned by the presentation variable.
Click this button to delete the corresponding value and field.
Click this button to remove all values and codes. If you added a SQL expression or variable to the filter, then clicking the Clear Values button will delete all related values and field.
Select this option to protect the filter's value from being overridden by either a prompt value or when the user navigates to another analysis. When the user navigates from one analysis to another analysis, any prompt values that were specified in the first analysis transfer to the second analysis.
Select this option to convert the filter that you have built to a SQL WHERE clause that you can edit manually. Note that after you convert a filter to SQL code, you can view and edit the filter item as SQL code in the "Advanced SQL Filter dialog", only. You can no longer view and edit the filter in the Edit Filter dialog.
Use the guidelines shown in the following table when choosing an operator and specifying the required values. The operator list from which you can choose is populated based on the function you are performing (for example, creating a filter or creating a dashboard prompt) and the type of column that you selected.
| Operator | Usage Guidelines |
|---|---|
| is equal to / is in | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results will include only records where the data in the column matches the value in the filter. |
| is not equal to / is not in | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results will include only records where the data in the column does not match the value in the filter. |
| is less than | Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify a single value. Results will include only records where the data in the column is less than the value in the filter. |
| is greater than | Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify a single value. Results will include only records where the data in the column is greater than the value in the filter. |
| is less than or equal to | Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results will include only records where the data in the column is less than or the same as the value in the filter. |
| is greater than or equal to | Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results will include only records where the data in the column is greater than or the same as the value in the filter. |
| is between | Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify two values. Result will include only records where the data in the column is between the two values in the filter. |
| is null | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Do not specify a value. The operator tests only for the absence of data in the column. Results will include only records where there is no data in the column.
Sometimes it might be useful to know whether any data is present, and using the is null operator is a way to test for that condition. For example, suppose your business has a worldwide address book and you want to extract the United States addresses only. You could do this by checking for the presence or absence of data in the "State" field. This field should be unpopulated (null) for non-United States addresses and populated (not null) for United States addresses. You can obtain a list of United States addresses without the need to check the column for a specific value. |
| is not null | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Do not specify a value. The operator tests only for the presence of data in the column. Results will include only records where there is data in the column. |
| is ranked first | Valid for a column that contains text or dates. Specify a single value. Results will include only the first n records, where n is a whole number specified as the value in the filter.
This operator is for ranked results. For example, you could use this operator to obtain a list that contains the first ten brand names in alphabetical order. |
| is ranked last | Valid for a column that contains text or dates. Specify a single value. Results will include only the last n records, where n is a whole number specified as the value in the filter.
This operator is for ranked results. For example, you could use this operator to obtain a list of the dates of the last ten sales transactions. |
| is in top | Valid for a column that contains numbers. Specify a single value. Results will include only the first n records, where n is a whole number specified as the value in the filter.
This operator is for ranked results. For example, you could use this operator to obtain a list of the top ten sales in dollars. |
| is in bottom | Valid for a column that contains numbers. Specify a single value. Results will include only the last n records, where n is a whole number specified as the value in the filter.
This operator is for ranked results. For example, you could use this operator to obtain a list of the customers reporting the fewest numbers of problems. |
| contains all | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results will include only records where the data in the column contains all of the values in the filter. |
| does not contain | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results will include only records where the data in the column does not contain any of the values in the filter. |
| contains any | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results will include only records where the data in the column contains at least one of the values in the filter. |
| begins with | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value. Results will include only records where the data in the column begins with the value in the filter. |
| ends with | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value. Results will include only records where the data in the column ends with the value in the filter. |
| is LIKE (pattern match) | Valid for a column that contains text. Specify a single value or multiple values. Requires the use of a percent sign character (%) as a wildcard character. You might specify up to two percent sign characters in the value. Results will include only records where the data in the column matches the pattern value in the filter. |
| is not LIKE (pattern match) | Valid for a column that contains text. Specify a single value or multiple values. Requires the use of a percent sign character (%) as a wildcard character. You might specify up to two percent sign characters in the value. Results will include only records where the data in the column does not match the pattern value in the filter. |
| is prompted | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Choosing this operator for a filter's column flags it as ready to be filtered by a prompt. This means when a prompt is used, results will include only records where the data in the column that is prompted matches the user's choices.
Note: This operator is required for columns included in prompts where no prefiltered values are desired. |
| is based on the results of another analysis | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. This operator constrains the filter by using the value of a column from the same subject area in another saved request. |
| prompt user | Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Choosing this operator allows the user to select the dashboard or analysis' prompt operator at runtime. |
Use this dialog box to specify the folder to create in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog.
Use this dialog to define the column, variable, or currency prompt.
For more information, see "Creating or Editing a Column Prompt".
This dialog is also displayed as:
Components Common to Column, Currency, and Variables Prompts
Note:
This section describes the components that are common to column, currency, and variable prompts. Additional components are available for the column and variable prompts. See "Additional Components for Column and Variable Prompts".Use this field to enter an appropriate label for the prompt. For example, "Please select a date range," "Please select a currency," or "Please select a percentage by which to calculate the region's dollars." You can include HTML markup tags in the caption, such as <b>, <font>, and <table>.
Use this field to enter a short description of the prompt. This description is displayed as tool tip text, which is displayed when the user mouses over the prompt's label in the dashboard or analysis.
Additional Components for Column and Variable Prompts
This field displays for column prompts, only.
Use this field to view information about the column that you selected. You can edit the formula that displays in this field by clicking the Edit Formula button. For more information, see "Edit Column Formula dialog".
This field displays for column prompts, only.
This button displays for attribute and measure column types, but not for hierarchical columns; however, if you are creating a column or variable prompt and choose to modify the column's formula, you can specify a hierarchical column in the column's formula.
Use this button to display the "Edit Column Formula dialog" where you can modify the column's formula for use with the prompt.
If you added a SQL case statement to the analysis' column instance and you want to use that case statement within the prompt, then you must specify the same SQL case statement in the prompt's column formula.
For example, on the analysis' column, you can use the Edit Formula functionality to create a "Beverage Type" bin to group a long list of beverages into two categories called "Carbonated Beverages" and "Fruit Juices and Non-Carbonated Beverages." When building the prompt, you then add the same bin or SQL case statement to the prompt's column formula. When the prompt is completed and previewed, the "Carbonated Beverages" and "Fruit Juices and Non-Carbonated Beverages" items are displayed in the prompt's value list.
Use this field to set the time zone.
This field displays for variable prompts, only.
Use this field to select the type of variable that you want to create and to type a name for the variable. This variable name will be the name that you add to the analysis or dashboard where you want the variable prompt's value specified by the user to display. Currently, you can create only presentation variables.
This field displays for display columns, only.
Displays the name of code column that is mapped to the display column.
For more information on display and code columns, see "Understanding the Double Column Feature".
This field displays for column prompts, only.
Use this list to select the prompt's operator. For more information about each operator, see "Operators".
Note the following items:
If you want the user to select the operator at runtime, then select the *Prompt User operator.
If you are creating a dashboard prompt for an Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher report that receives its data from an Oracle BI Server or SQL Server, then you must set the operator to is equal to/is in.
If you are creating a prompt that will include a group in the prompt's value selection list, the Operator must be set to either is equal to/is in or is not equal to/is not in. For more information about groups, see "Working with Groups and Calculated Items".
If your repository is configured for double columns, and you are creating the prompt on a display column and select the contains all, contains any, does not contain, begins with, ends with, is LIKE (pattern match), or is not LIKE (pattern match) operator, then filtering will always be done by display values, not code values. For all other operators, filtering will be done by code values. For more information on double columns, see "Understanding the Double Column Feature".
This field displays for column and variable prompts.
Use this list to specify the user interface component where the user selects the prompt values (for example, prompt the user with radio buttons to select only one prompt value or prompt the user with a text box that requires the user to enter one or more specific prompt values). The input option that you select will determine the fields that display in the dialog. For a description and example of each user input option type, see "What Types of User Input Options Can I Use With a Column or Variable Prompt?"
This field displays for column and variable prompts.
Use this field to specify which data values you want to display in the user input method that you selected. For example, if you selected the Choice List user input method and the All Column Values option, the user will select the prompt's data value from a list that contains all of the data values contained in the data source.
Note that for attribute columns and measures column, all choice list values type are available.
The User Input Values options are:
All Column Values – Indicates that users can choose from a list that contains all the existing values or members.
If the number of column values exceed the number that is specified in the Page Values box, the list that displays in the view will contain a Search link that the user clicks to access the Select Values dialog. Users can use the search to locate more values.
Custom Values – Indicates that users can select from a list of prompt values that you created rather than the values supplied by the column.
Specific Column Values – For attribute columns and measures column, this option indicates that users can choose from a list that displays the values that you have selected for the column. This option is useful when prompting for multiple columns, or when the results already contain a filter. It prevents the user from choosing values that would result in no data. For example, suppose an analysis contains a country column and a city column, and already contains the filter Country=France. By selecting limited values for the city column prompt, the choices are constrained to cities in France only, which prevents the possibility of the user choosing a city that is not located in France, such as Country=France and City=Rome.
This list can also contain a group as a selection option. Users can also click Search from the list of values to search for a value that does not display in the list of values. You can click the Plus button to display the Select Values dialog where you can search for and select the desired values to display to users. In the Column Values pane, you see all values for the column and you can select only those that you want users to choose from. If you are using either the is equal to/is in or the is not equal to/is not in operator, then you can expand the Catalog pane to browse and add a saved group. When you select a group, it will be presented as one value in the list of values. For example, if the group is named Sales by Region and contains the Eastern and Southern members, within the prompt's list of values you will see Sales by Region and when you select this value, the analysis will contain the Eastern and Southern members.
For hierarchical columns, this choice indicates that a list is displayed from which users can choose among the members that you have selected for the column. This list can also contain a group as a selection option. See the above paragraph for more information.
SQL Results – Indicates that users can choose from a list that contains the values that you have specified through a SQL statement. A box is displayed where you can enter a SQL statement that creates the list of values from which users can choose. You will likely want to enter a WHERE clause as part of the SQL statement to limit the number of values from which users can select and include sorting commands to have the values display in a logical order.
If the SQL statement returns a list of values that exceeds the number that is specified in the Page Values box, a Search link will display and when the user clicks this link, the Select Values dialog displays. Users cannot search in the Select Value dialog, but they can display more values to select from.
Members of Groups – This option is not available for hierarchical columns.
Indicates that users can choose from a list that contains all members included in a specified group or groups. For example, if the group you select is named Sales by Region and contains the Eastern and Southern members, at runtime you will see Eastern and Southern regions listed in the prompt's list of values.
All Column Values and Specific Groups – This option is not available for hierarchical columns. This option is available for the is equal to/is in or the is not equal to/is not in operators, only.
Indicates that users can choose from a list that contains all column values and the groups that you have selected. When you select a group, it will be presented as one value in the list of values. For example, if the group is named Sales by Region and contains the Eastern and Southern members, within the prompt's list of values you will see Sales by Region and when you select this value, the analysis will contain the Eastern and Southern members.
Note:
If you have a prompt with a choice list value that contains a group and the prompt is then used to override a Keep only or Remove selection step, then Oracle BI EE ignores the group at runtime. If the override selection step is an Add selection step, then Oracle BI EE uses the group.Select Values or Clear Values buttons
These buttons display for column and variable prompts. These buttons display if you selected Custom Values, Specific Column Values, Members of Groups, or All Column Values and Specific Groups in the User Input Values field.
Use the Select Values button to open the Select Value(s) dialog to search for and add values or groups to the Select List. The prompt presents this values list to the user. This functionality is useful when you want to limit the number of user choices to a small, intuitive list. For example, if you chose Radio Buttons as the user input method and created a specific values list of five dates, the prompt presents the user with five radio buttons, one for each date. For more information, see "Select Values dialog".
Use the Clear Values button to remove all of the selected values and groups.
This field displays if you selected SQL Results in the User Input Values field.
Use this field to create or edit a SQL statement. When run, the SQL statement produces a group of values that is displayed in the Select List.
Include "All Choices" choice in the list
This check box displays if you selected either the Choice List, List Box, or Radio Buttons user input type.
Use this check box to display the "All Choices" option in the value list. Users can select the "All Choices" option to select all of the values in the list.
This check box displays if you selected either the Check Box, Choice List, List Box, or Radio Buttons user input type.
Use this check box to select an existing prompt column to limit the values that display in the select list for the prompt column that you are creating. This type of limitation is also known as a cascading prompt. For example, if a prompt contained a column prompt called Region and you create another column prompt called District and specify to limit it by the Region column prompt, the users will only be allowed to select regions located within the district that they selected. If the users select the Central District, then they will only be allowed to select a Region of Chicago, Minneapolis, or Milwaukee.
Enable user to select multiple values
This check box displays if you selected either the Choice List or List Box user input type.
Use this check box to allow the user to select more than one prompt value from the list of values. If you selected the Choice List user input option, then the prompt value selection list will display a check box before each prompt value.
If you selected the List Box option, then to select:
Multiple values, the user presses the Control key, then clicks the values
A range of values, the user clicks the first value in the range, presses the Shift key, then clicks the last value in the range
If you are creating the prompt on a hierarchical column, this option will be selected and you cannot deselect it. If you are creating a prompt with only one value, use the "Select Values dialog" to select one value.
This check box displays if you selected the Choice List user input type.
Use this check box to allow the user to choose values from the choice list or place the cursor and type a value into the selection field. For example, select this check box when the prompt's value list is lengthy and the user does not want to scroll through or search the list, or the user knows the specific prompt value. This option is useful when the prompt contains non-measure numerical values (for example, a product ID or employee ID) that cannot be easily or quickly located in a list of values.
If this option and the Enable user to select multiple values option are selected, users can enter multiple values (using the semicolon delimiter) into the prompt's selection field.
This check box displays for all user input types.
Use this check box to make the prompt required. When the prompt is required, users cannot click the Go button to execute the prompt query until they have selected a prompt value. When you select this option, an asterisk displays to the left of the prompt label to indicate to the user that the prompt is required.
This field displays for the Slider user input type, only.
Use this field to specify the prompt values and value range that you want to display in the slider. Currently, Within Specific Limits is the only available Slider Values option.
This field displays for the Slider user input type, only.
Use this field to specify the beginning prompt value that will display on the left-end of the slider. This prompt value is the lowest value that the user can select.
This field displays for the Slider user input type, only.
Use this field to specify the ending prompt value that will display on the right-end of the slider. This prompt value is the highest value that the user can select.
This check box displays for the Slider user input type, only.
Use this check box to display a spinbox where the user can click arrows to select a value. When the user clicks the spinbox's arrows, the slider resets to the same value. Clear this check box to remove the spinbox from the prompt.
This check box displays for the Slider user input type, only.
Use this check box to remove the zeros from values of 1,000 and over. For example, 1,000 displays as 1K and 1,000,000 displays as 1M. If you select this option and are using a non-English environment, the compressed value label will not be translated. The value label will display in English (for example, 1K or 1M).
This field displays for the Slider user input type, only.
Use this field to specify whether you want the slider to be displayed horizontally or vertically on the prompts page.
This field displays for the Slider user input type, only.
Use this field to specify where you want the prompt's label to display in relation to the slider. Currently, Left of Slider is the only available Label location option.
This field displays for the Slider user input type, only.
Use this field to choose the size of the slider. You can select Small, Medium, or Large.
Use this field to specify the prompt value that you want users to see initially. First select one of the following options, then (except for the None option) specify the value in the box that is displayed:
None – Select this option if you do not want to specify a default selection.
Specific Values – Select this option to choose a specific default value from the complete prompt list that Oracle Business Intelligence generates based on the option you selected in the Choice List Values field. When you select this option, the Default value field and Add or remove values button are displayed. Click the Add or remove button to access the Select Value(s) dialog where you can search for, select, and deselect a default value. For more information, see "Select Values dialog".
All Column Values — This option is available only when the Include "All Choices" choice in the list option is selected. Select this option to specify the "All Choices" default value for the prompt.
Variable Expression — Select this option to specify a variable or an expression containing a variable. When you select this option, the Default value field is displayed in which you enter the variable or expression.
For guidelines on referencing a variable in an expression, see Table 2-2. For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Server Variable — Select this option to specify a session or repository variable as the default value. When you select this option, the Default value field is displayed in which you enter the name of the variable. For a session variable, prefix the name with NQ_SESSION and a period, for example NQ_SESSION.USER.
For guidelines on referencing a server variable, see Table 2-2. For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Note:
If you specify a session variable, and a request variable exists with the same name, the value of the request variable is used instead of the value of the session variable. For more information on request variables, see "What Are Request Variables?"SQL Results — Select this option to set the prompt's default value based on the results of a logical SQL statement. If necessary, a presentation or server variable can be used in the logical SQL statement (for example, variables can be referenced in the "where" clause to constrain the default value based on another prompt).
Each row of data returned by the SQL statement is treated as a value, and each row can have one or two columns. If each row contains one column, this would be both the display value and code value. If each row contains two columns, the first column is the display value and the second column is the code value. If the SQL statement returns multiple rows but the user interface can only accept one value, then the first row is used.
If your repository is configured for double columns, and you are creating the prompt on a display column and specify a SQL statement, filtering will be done on display values, not code values.
Enable user to select by Code Column
This option displays for display columns, only.
Select this option to add a check box to the prompt that allows the user to specify whether to select prompt values by display values (for example, "Beverages") or by code-display values (for example, "1-Beverages"). This check box is automatically labeled with the partial caption of "Select by." If you select this option, add a label in the Label field that identifies what the user will be selecting by.
This field displays for display columns, only.
Use this field to complete the "Select by" label for the check box that allows the user to specify whether to select prompt values by display values (for example, "Beverages") or by code-display values (for example, "1-Beverages"). For example, you might enter "product codes" so that the check box label is "Select by product codes."
Use this field to create a new variable that this column prompt is to populate.
Select the type of variable, either Presentation Variable or Request Variable, then, enter a name for the variable. Note if you selected Request Variable, you must use the name of the session variable that you want this request variable to override.
Note:
If you are creating a dashboard prompt for an Oracle BI Publisher report that receives its data from an Oracle BI Server or SQL Server, then you must type "Presentation" in the Variable Name field.For more information about using variables, see "Using Variables".
This field displays if you selected either All Column Values, Specific Column Values, or Members of Groups from the User Input Values field.
This field displays the name of the column upon which you selected to populate the variable prompt's list of values. This field is read-only. To specify a different column name to display in this field, you must click the Select Column button and browse for and select another column.
Use this button to display the "Select Column dialog" where you can browse for and select the column that you want to use to generate the prompt's list of values.
Use this dialog to add a document that provides supporting information to a scorecard object, such as an objective. A related document that you add is displayed as a link in the Related Documents table and can link to a dashboard page or analysis that is stored in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog or to a Web address. For example, you might want to add analysis as a related document for an objective.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this field to enter the text to be displayed as the link to the related document.
If you did not specify a name, Oracle BI EE will default to the name of the dashboard or analysis, or a shortened form of the URL.
Displays the following options to specify the type of related document:
BI Content — Specifies that the related document is a dashboard page or analysis from the catalog.
Web Address — Specifies that the related document is a Web address.
If you selected as the type:
BI Content, this field displays the path to the dashboard page or analysis. This path is read-only. To specify another path, click the Browse button and select another dashboard page or analysis.
Web Address, enter or paste the URL into this field.
This option is available only if you selected the BI Content type. Displays the "Select an Object from the BI Catalog dialog", where you select the dashboard page or analysis from the catalog.
Use this dialog to create a new scorecard.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the name of the scorecard, for example, Marketing.
Use this list to select a folder or create a new folder in which to create the scorecard. To create a new folder, click the New Folder option in the list to display the "Create New Folder dialog". To select a folder that is not listed, click the Folder button to display the "Select Scorecard Location dialog".
Use this field to enter a description of the scorecard.
Use this check box to specify whether you want to use the default perspectives defined by the Balanced Scorecard Methodology. You can associate initiatives and objectives with these perspectives or to other custom perspectives that you create. For more information on perspectives, see "What Are Perspectives?"
Use this dialog to open objects, select objects, or save objects.
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this pane to select a folder in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog to display in the Open In or Save In area.
Displays the catalog folders in a tree structure.
Displays your favorite folders in the Folder pane.
Displays the folder that is selected in the Folders pane and its contents.
You can save any object in any location. However, the "Save In" field sometimes recommends the best location based on the object type that you are saving. For example, you should save filters, groups, and calculated items within a subject area folder so that these items are available when you build an analysis for the same subject area. If a subject area folder does not exist in your /My Folders or within /Shared Folders, then a subject area folder is created automatically. The "Save In" field defaults a save path to /My Folders/Subject Area Contents/<subject area>, however, the dialog's Folders area will display all instances of the subject area folder in the catalog.
You can save other objects such as analyses, prompts, and conditions in any folder. Bear in mind the distinctions between shared and personal folders, when deciding whether to share the object that you are saving with other users.
Selects the folder that is one level higher in the folder structure.
Adds a new empty folder under the folder that is specified in the Open In or Save In field.
Displays the following options to change the view of the list:
List — Displays the contents of the folder that is specified in the Open In or Save In field as a list of file or folder names preceded by small buttons.
Details — Displays the contents of the folder that is specified in the Open In or Save In field as a list of file or folder names preceded by small buttons and provides detailed information about the objects, including, name, type, the date modified, and owner.
Use this box to specify the name of the object to open, select, or save.
To specify the name of the object, do one of the following:
Click an object in the Open In area
Enter the name of the object
The name is displayed in the tree structure when a user moves the mouse over the object.
Use this field to enter a description of the object.
Descriptions are displayed when administrators use the Oracle Business Intelligence Catalog Manager. Descriptions for analyses are helpful when including them on dashboard pages.
Available only for selection steps.
Use this field to enter the label for the group when it is displayed in a view. The display label can differ from the name of the group as it is saved in the catalog.
Available only for selection steps.
Click this button to save the selection steps for a group. The results of the selection are refreshed at runtime.
Available only for groups.
Click this button to save a group as a list of members, rather than as a list of steps.
Replace current action (or steps, or condition) with a reference to the saved action (or group, or condition)
Use this box in the following situations:
When you are saving an action or condition to the catalog, to specify whether to replace the reference to the current action or condition with the saved action or condition.
When you are saving a series of steps to the catalog, to specify whether to replace the series of steps with the name of the group. For example, if you have created several selection steps for the Product column, click the Save button, then select this box in the dialog, the several steps are replaced by a single "Start with" step for the group.
Select this box to replace the reference with the saved action, group, or condition. Deselect this box to maintain the reference to the action, group, or condition.
Use this dialog to edit the content in a briefing book. You can change the content type, the number of navigation links to follow, and the content description.
For more information, see:
Use this area to select one of the following options:
Updatable — Refreshes the data whenever the briefing book is downloaded, or when it is specified as the delivery content for an agent.
Snapshot — Adds the content in its current state. Snapshot content preserves the original data and is not updated when the briefing book is rerun. Snapshot content will not be updated when using agents.
Follow Briefing Book Navigation Links
This option applies only to updatable content, not to snapshot content.
Use this area to select one of the following options:
No — Specifies that briefing book navigation links are not to be followed.
Yes — Specifies that briefing book navigation links are to be followed. If you select this option, then you must also specify the number of links to follow.
Number of links to follow — Specifies the number of briefing book navigation links to be followed, if you selected the Yes option.
Use this field to enter a description of the content being saved to the briefing book.
Use this dialog to set permissions for a catalog object. Only a user with full permissions on a catalog object is able to see or change the permissions for that object. If you are using this dialog to assign permissions to a catalog object and need more information about privileges that further refine the tasks users can perform, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as the:
Note:
Not all components are available in each version of the dialog.Displays the folder in which the object resides.
Displays the account name of the object owner. To change the name that displays in this field, go to the Owner column in the Permission area and select the button corresponding to the account you want to assign as the owner. Note that this field sets the catalog owner of the object, which is not the same as setting the business owner for a KPI or scorecard object. For more information about the business owner, see "KPI editor: General Properties page".
Use this area to add accounts and assign permissions. Note the following options:
To add accounts and assign permissions, use the Permissions toolbar buttons.
To assign a permission to an account, in the Permission column, select the permission from the Permission list.
If you are working with section permissions, select Granted to include the section in the corresponding account's dashboard. Select Denied to remove the section from the corresponding account's dashboard. Where applicable, these permissions will override the permissions that are set on the catalog object.
If you are working with catalog permissions, see "Permissions Available by Object Type" and "Permission Definitions" for more information about the permission options. For information about the options available for the Custom permission option, see "Custom Permissions dialog". Note that most of the permissions in this list are compound permissions, made up of the most commonly used combinations of permissions, so when you select a permission from the list, Oracle BI EE displays a label listing what the selected permission includes. For example, if you selected the Modify permission, Oracle BI EE displays "Read, Write, Delete." If none of the permissions available in the permissions list meets your requirements, you can select the Custom option to access the Custom Permissions dialog where you can create your own compound permission for the object.
To change the owner of the object, select the button in the Owner column for the account that you want to designate as the owner.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Apply effective permissions — Use this button to assign permissions based on the user's membership in a group. For example, if a user belongs to the Marketing group account which has full control permissions to a Corporate Sales scorecard directory, then the user also has full control to the directory.
Replace with parent's folder permissions — Use this button to inherit the permissions defined for the highest folder in the directory hierarchy.
Set parents folders permission to "Traverse Folder" — Use this button skip over any folders to which the permissions should not be applied.
Add users/roles — Use this button to display the "Add Application Roles, Catalog Groups, and Users dialog", where you select accounts to add.
Apply permissions for selected users/roles — Displays the permissions menu. Use this menu to select a permission to assign to the selected account or accounts. To select multiple accounts, hold down the Control key and then click the accounts that you want. For more information about the permissions that you can select, see "Permissions Available by Object Type". For information about the options available for the Custom permission option, see "Custom Permissions dialog".
Delete selected users/roles — Use this button to delete the selected accounts.
Apply permissions to sub-folders
Use this option to assign permissions to all constituent objects and folders. For example, if you are working with a scorecard, selecting this option assigns permissions to all scorecard components such as the perspectives, diagrams, and maps.
Apply permissions to items within a folder
Use this option to assign permissions to individual objects that you select in the folder.
Use this pane to:
Create custom perspectives
Edit or view the four standard perspectives defined by the Balanced Scorecard Methodology (Financial, Customer, Internal Process, and Learning and Growth) and any custom perspectives that you have created
Delete perspectives
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor".
Displays a list of the perspectives for the scorecard.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
New Perspective — Use this button to display the "Scorecard editor: Perspective tab", where you create a new perspective.
Open — Use this button to display the selected perspective for viewing or editing, depending on your privileges and permissions.
Delete — Use this button to delete a perspective that you created or for which you have the permissions to delete.
Use this pane to preview the object that you selected in the Catalog page. Not all object types have previews available. For example, if you select an analysis or dashboard, those objects display in the Preview pane, but none of the interactive features such as drilling, pivoting, and sorting are available. However, if you select an action, the "View not available" message is displayed in Preview pane.
Working with the Preview pane expanded can consume considerable system resources, so Oracle recommends that you only open the Preview pane when needed.
This pane is part of the "Catalog page".
Use this dialog to specify page settings and header and footer content for the PDF output, when printing a dashboard or views.
Dashboards are printed in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. Adobe Reader 6.0 or greater is required to print using Adobe PDF.
Notes:
The print selections that you specify apply to PDF output only. If you then print the PDF on a local or network printer, then the print selections that are specified in the browser are in effect, such as the selection for paper size.This dialog is displayed from the PDF and Print Properties option in the Tools menu on the "Dashboard builder" toolbar and Print Options button on the "Analysis editor: Results tab" toolbar.
For more information, see:
Use this list to select the size of the paper to use for the PDF output.
Use this list to select the orientation of the PDF output, either Portrait or Landscape.
Use this list to specify which rows are displayed in the PDF output, either all rows or only the visible rows.
Use this box to show or hide margins.
Include Header and Include Footer
Use these boxes to include a header, a footer, or both in the PDF output. Click Edit to display the "Edit Footer or Header dialog", where you can specify the layout and formatting of the contents of the header or footer. You can also specify whether to display the header or footer in the HTML output.
Use this dialog to control the privileges that users are granted. Privileges control the rights that users have to access the features and functionality of Oracle BI Presentation Services. This dialog is displayed from the "Administration: Manage Privileges page".
For more information, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Use this area to add accounts and grant or deny privileges.
To add accounts and grant or deny privileges, use the Permissions toolbar buttons.
To grant or deny a privilege to an account, in the Permission column, select either Granted or Denied.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Add Users/Roles — Use this button to display the "Add Application Roles, Catalog Groups, and Users dialog", where you select users, roles, or Catalog groups to add to the list in this dialog.
Apply Permissions for Selected Users/Roles — Use this button to grant or deny privileges to the selected accounts.
Delete Selected Users/Roles — Use this button to delete the currently selected accounts from the list in this dialog.
Use this editor to create prompts.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use the "Definition pane" to create prompts that allow users to select values that dynamically filter all views within the analysis.
Use the "Display pane" to view the prompt's layout and design.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the prompt.
Save As — Use this button to make a copy of the prompt.
This dialog box is displayed when you select an object in the "Catalog page" and click Properties in the Tasks pane or click More, then Properties below the object.
Use this area to view and modify general information about the object. You can view the object's name, type (such as action or analysis), and location in the catalog. You can also enter a description for the object.
Use this area to learn the following information about an object:
The date and time when it was created.
The date and time when it was last modified.
The date and time when it was last accessed.
Use the options in this area to set the following attributes of the object:
Hidden — Specifies that the object is hidden.
System — Specifies that the object is a system object.
Read Only — Specifies that the object is read-only.
Do Not Index — Specifies that the object should not be included in the index that is used by the full-text catalog search (Oracle BI Search). If you select to exclude the object, it will not display in the results of any full-text catalog search. The object, however, can still be found via the basic catalog search.
For information, see "Searching Using Full-Text Catalog Search".
Use this dialog to specify the shared dashboard to which you want to publish the current dashboard page so that you can share the page with others.
This dialog is displayed from the "Dashboard builder".
For more information, see "Publishing Dashboard Pages".
Use this field to specify the dashboard to which to publish the current dashboard page. Click Browse to display the "Select Dashboard dialog", where you select the dashboard.
Use this pane to identify the following:
For a KPI (in the strategy tree only), objectives or KPIs that cause or effect the KPI.
For an objective, other objectives and KPIs that cause or effect the objective as well as initiatives that drive the objective.
For an initiative, the objectives that are driven by the initiative.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor: KPI Details tab", the "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab" and the "Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab".
This table is available only in the Scorecard editor: KPI Details tab and the Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab.
Displays other objectives or KPIs that impact or support the KPI or objective (typically on a higher level).
Use this table to view and manage the causes:
To add an objective or a KPI, drag it from "Strategy pane" and drop it in the table. The "Causal Linkage dialog" is displayed, where you specify the strength of the cause and effect relationship and how the values of the added objective impact or support the values of the objective you are defining.
To edit an causal linkage, select it in the list and click the Edit Row button to display the Causal Linkage dialog.
To delete a causal linkage, select it in the list and click the Delete Row button.
This table is available only in the Scorecard editor: KPI Details tab and the Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab.
Displays other objectives or KPIs that are supported by the KPI or objective (typically on a lower level).
Use this table to view and manage the effects:
To add an objective or KPI, drag it from "Strategy pane" and drop it in the table. The Causal Linkage dialog is displayed, where you specify the strength of the cause and effect relationship and how the values of the added objective impact or support the values of the objective you are defining.
To edit an causal linkage, select it in the list and click the Edit Row button to display the Causal Linkage dialog.
To delete an causal linkage, select it in the list and click the Delete Row button.
Initiatives driving this Objective
This table is available only in the Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab.
Displays the initiatives that drive the objective.
Use this table to view and manage the initiatives:
To add an initiative, drag it from "Strategy pane" and drop it in the table. The Causal Linkage dialog is displayed, where you specify the strength of the cause and effect relationship and how the values of the added objective impact or support the values of the objective you are defining.
To edit an initiative link, select it in the list and click the Edit Row button to display the Causal Linkage dialog.
To delete an initiative link, select it in the list and click the Delete Row button.
Objectives Driven by this Initiative
This table is available only in the Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab.
Displays the objectives that are driven by the initiative.
Use this table to view and manage the objectives or KPIs:
To add an objective, drag it from "Strategy pane" and drop it in the table. The Causal Linkage dialog is displayed, where you specify the strength of the cause and effect relationship and how the values of the added objective impact or support the values of the objective you are defining.
To edit an objective link, select it in the list and click the Edit Row button to display the Causal Linkage dialog.
To delete an objective link, select it in the list and click the Delete Row button.
Use this dialog to enter a different name for an object in the catalog (a KPI or a dashboard page, for example).
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter a new name for the object.
This button is available when you rename a section in the "Dashboard builder".
Use this button to display the "Section Heading Properties dialog", where you can format the name of a section.
Use Dashboard Object name as link text
This option is available when you rename an analysis in the Dashboard builder.
Use this option to specify whether to use the new name of the analysis as the link text when you display analysis results as a link on a dashboard.
Select this box to use the new name you specify. Clear this box to use the name with which the analysis is stored in the catalog.
For more information on displaying the analysis results as a link, see the Display Results option on the Analysis Properties button described in "Properties Buttons for Objects".
Preserve references to old name of this item
This option is not available for all objects.
Use this option to specify that you want to maintain any existing references to the previous name of the object. This creates a shortcut with the old name that points to the renamed object in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog. If you do not select this option, then existing references will break.
Use this dialog to select an icon to represent an assessment range.
For more information, see:
Use the "Replace Icon dialog: Standard Images tab" to select a standard image to use as the icon.
Use the "Replace Icon dialog: Custom Image tab" to specify a custom image to use as the icon.
Use this tab of the "Replace Icon dialog" to specify a custom image to use as the icon to represent an assessment range.
For more information, see:
Use this field to specify a custom image. To do so, enter one of the following:
The URL to a custom image.
The fmap syntax to reference a custom image that is stored locally in the Oracle Business Intelligence environment. For more information on the fmap syntax, see "Storing Custom Files Locally and Using the fmap Function to Reference Them".
Note:
If you are working in a secured environment, then you must specify a custom image that is stored locally in the Oracle Business Intelligence environment using the fmap syntax. (A secured environment is one in which the HardenXSS element is set to true in the instanceconfig.xml file. See your administrator for more information.)The custom image should be one that is accessible to all users who will view or edit the scorecard.
Use this button to display the image in the Preview area.
Displays the custom image.
Use this tab of the "Replace Icon dialog" to select a standard image to use as the icon to represent an assessment range. Also use this dialog to select an image to display for a range of data on a map. You display this dialog from the "Image (Layer) dialog".
This tab is also displayed as:
For more information, see:
Displays the categories of images. Click a category to display the available images in the right pane. The bottom-most category, which is marked by a globe icon, indicates the list of images that you imported on the Image Library tab of the "Administration: Manage Map Data page".
Displays the standard images that are available for the category that you selected in the left pane. Click the image that you want.
If you need to add an image, then see the administrator.
Use this dialog to specify the links that are to be displayed with analyses on a dashboard page. You can specify these link setting at the following levels:
Dashboard level — The link settings apply to all analyses in the dashboard, unless customized settings have been specified for an individual dashboard page or analysis.
To specify the report links at the dashboard level, click the Tools button on the "Dashboard builder" toolbar to display the "Dashboard Properties dialog" and then click the Dashboard Report Links Edit button.
Dashboard page level — The link settings apply to all analyses in the dashboard page, unless customized settings have been specified for particular analyses.
To specify the report links at the dashboard level page, click the Tools button on the Dashboard builder toolbar and then select Page Report Links.
Analysis level — The link settings apply only to the particular analysis.
To specify the report links at the analysis level, click the Properties button for the analysis in the "Page Layout area" of the Dashboard builder and select Report Links.
For more information, see:
Select this option to specify that the link settings for the dashboard are to be used.
This option is available only when you are specifying the link settings at the dashboard page level.
For more information, see "Changing the Properties of a Dashboard and its Pages".
Select this option to specify that the link settings for the dashboard page are to be used.
This option is available only when you are specifying the link settings at the analysis level.
Select this option to customize the link settings for a particular dashboard page or analysis.
This option is available only when you are specifying the link settings for a dashboard page or an analysis.
Select this option to specify that the Analyze link is to be displayed. This link displays the analysis in its current state (that is, with the current context, for example, with applied filters, prompts, and so on) in the "Analysis editor", where users can edit it.
For more information on editing an analysis, see "Editing Analyses".
Select this option to specify that the Edit link is to be displayed. This link displays the analysis in its original state (that is, without the current context) in the "Analysis editor", where users can edit it.
For more information on editing an analysis, see "Editing Analyses".
Select this option to specify that the Export link is to be displayed. This link provides users with various options to export the results of the analysis, for example, Export 2003+. For more information on the available export options, see "Export Menu Options for Views and Results".
For more information on exporting an analysis, see "Exporting Results".
Select this option to specify that the Refresh link is to be displayed. This link allows users to refresh the analysis.
Select this option to specify that the Add to Briefing Book link is to be displayed. This link displays the "Save Briefing Book Content dialog", where users can add the analysis to a briefing book.
For more information about adding an analysis to a briefing book, see "Adding Content to New or Existing Briefing Books".
Select this option to specify that the Print link is to be displayed. This link provides users with the following print options:
HTML — Displays a printer-friendly version of the analysis in HTML
PDF — Displays a printer-friendly version of the analysis in Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format)
Select this option to specify that the Copy link is to be displayed. This link allows users to copy the analysis in its current state (that is, with the current context, for example, with applied filters, prompts, and so on) to Microsoft Office applications.
For more information about copying analyses to Microsoft Office applications, see "Copying Results to Microsoft Applications".
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit a column selector view. A column selector is a set of drop-down lists that contain pre-selected columns. Users can dynamically select columns and change the data that is displayed in the views of the analysis.
For more information, see "Editing Column Selector Views".
Use this box to specify whether a drop-down list is to be displayed for the column that contains this box.
Use this field to enter a label for this column in the selector.
Displays the columns that are to be displayed as the choices in the drop-down list for the column. To add a new column to a drop-down list, ensure that the column to which you want to add a new column is active by clicking it to highlight it. Then double-click the new column that you want to add in the "Subject Areas pane".
Use this button to display the "Column Properties dialog" for the column.
Use this button to display the "Edit Column Formula dialog" for the column.
Use this button to delete the column from the drop-down list.
Use this link to clear all the columns that are selected to be displayed in the drop-down list, with the exception of the first column that was selected for the analysis.
The toolbar contains the following buttons and boxes:
Buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Label Position — Use this box to select a position for the label of each drop-down list, either Left or Above.
Automatically refresh when a new column is selected — Automatically refreshes the drop-down list of columns in the editor when you add a column from the Subject Areas pane.
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
The editor is for users of the Oracle Siebel Marketing operational application, Version 7.7 (or higher), integrated with Oracle Business Intelligence.
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit a create segment view, which displays a Create Segment link in the results. Users can click this link to create a segment in their Oracle Siebel Marketing operational application, based on the results data.
For more information, see:
The online help for the Marketing Segmentation interface
Use this box to specify whether to show the view results in the editor.
The toolbar contains the buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
This editor is for users of Oracle's Siebel Life Sciences application integrated with Oracle's Siebel Life Sciences Analytics applications.
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit a create target list view, which allows automatic integration of lists of contacts and accounts based on the results of an analysis. For example, you can create a target list in Oracle's Siebel Pharma Sales application and use it in Oracle's Siebel Pharma Mobile Analytics application.
When you add a create target list view, a link named Create Target List is displayed in an analysis on a user's interactive dashboard. The user can click this link to populate or refresh a list of contacts or accounts in the Life Sciences application.
For more information, see:
The documentation for the Siebel Life Sciences application
Use this link to create a target list.
The toolbar contains the following buttons and box:
Buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Display Results — Use this box to specify whether to show the view results in the editor.
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit one of the following data views:
Funnel
Gauge
Graph
Map
Pivot table
Table
For more information, see:
This editor is displayed as:
Use the "Subject Areas pane" to select the columns for an analysis and to work with subject areas.
Displays the analysis results in a graph, funnel graph, gauge, map, pivot table, or table, depending on the type of view.
Use the "Layout pane" to specify the layout of the data for the view. This pane is not available for maps.
Use the "Catalog pane" to drag and drop objects from the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog that you want to add to the view.
This pane is available only in the Graph, Map, Pivot Table, and Table editors.
Use the "Selection Steps pane" to create and modify steps for data selections. This pane is not visible until you click the button to display it.
This pane is available only in the Funnel and Gauge editors.
Use the "Settings pane" to set the thresholds for a funnel graph or gauge.
The toolbar contains buttons that are common to all view and buttons that depend on the type of data view. For more information on the buttons common to all views, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views". For more information on specific data view buttons, see "Data View Editor Toolbar".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
When editing or working with tables and pivot tables, you can right-click a cell to display a menu of options. For information, see "Right-Click Menu for Tables and Pivot Tables".
These buttons are available only when editing or working with tables and pivot tables.
When a table or pivot table includes a large number of rows, a set of buttons can be displayed under the view. You can use the following buttons to page through the rows in the view:
First 25 Rows — Displays the first 25 rows of data for the view. The number that is used for the First, Previous, and Next buttons is specified by the Rows per Page field in the "Table Properties dialog: Style tab".
Previous 25 Rows — Displays the previous 25 rows of data for the view.
Next 25 Rows — Displays the next 25 rows of data for the view.
Display maximum (500) rows per page — Allows you to display as many as the maximum number of rows per page at one time temporarily. The default is 500. The administrator can specify a different maximum value that is displayed on the tooltip for the button using the MaxVisibleRows element in the configuration file.
Use this area to interact with the components of the map such as the zoom controls, legend, and overview map.
Use this area to work with the applicable formats for the map. Not all formats are available for all layer types. For example, point layers cannot have Color Fill formats. The map cannot display more than one non-point format at a time (at a single zoom level) but can display multiple point formats simultaneously, if they do not share the same latitude and longitude location. If multiple graph formats are specified at the same geographic layer, then they will render on top of each other.
You can do the following:
Click View then View All Formats to specify that all defined formats are listed in this area, or click View Visible Formats to specify that only those formats that are currently displayed on the map are listed in this area.
Click Add New Map Formats, select a format type, then select a layer to display the appropriate dialog for defining that format. You can select an existing layer, or you can choose to create a custom point layer, which allows you to apply formats to points on the map based on the latitude and longitude.
When you add a format, it is displayed at the top of the list of formats, to ensure that you will see it on the map.
Select Automatically create formats when drilling to specify whether to automatically create formats when you drill in a map. The formats that are added are listed in the Map Formats pane. For example, suppose you drill from Districts to Cities. Additional formats will be added for the Cities layer.
You can also specify this option in the "Map Properties dialog: Interaction tab". The option is updated in both places when you make a change in either place.
Hover over a layer name in the list to display the following buttons for modifying the layer:
Add New Map Formats — Displays a list of formats so that you can select the appropriate format to display the appropriate dialog for defining that format. The list contains only those formats that apply for the geometry of that layer. For example, bar graphs and pie graphs do not apply to point layers. After selecting a format, select the column to which it applies.
If you add a format but do not see it on the map, then ensure that the map is showing the appropriate zoom level.
Delete — Removes the layer and all its formats from display on the map.
Hover over a format name under a layer name in the list to display the following buttons for modifying the format:
Up or Down — Reorders the format in the lists of formats. The order is important, because formats higher in the list overlay those formats that are lower in the list.
Edit — Displays the dialog for modifying the format.
Delete — Deletes the format.
Click the box beside a format name to make the format visible or invisible on the map.
You can re-order formats within a geographic layer (such as State).
Work with thresholds whether section sliders are displayed or not. If the slider is not displayed, then you can display a map format dialog to manipulate the threshold values.
If no layers are specified in the map formats area, then click New Map Format. The map prompts you to import the geo-encoded columns for displaying a format for a particular geo-layer, if the columns are not already part of the analysis.
When you specify to create a map view, you will likely see at least one layer available in the Map Formats area. If no layer is available, then the New Map Format link is displayed.
Limits exist for how much data can be displayed for formats on a map view. As you work with formats, you might exceed the data limit. If you do so, then you will see a message that alerts you to the data limit and the fact that not all formatting can be displayed. Administrators control the limit with the MaxRecords configuration element. For information on setting this element, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
When editing or working with tables and pivot tables, you can right-click a cell to display a menu of the following options:
Expand — Available for hierarchical columns only. Displays the next level down in the hierarchy. For information, see "Drilling in Results".
Collapse all items for this column — Available for hierarchical columns only. Collapses all the values in the column up to the top level.
Collapse all items in view — Available for hierarchical columns only. Collapses all the values in all the hierarchical columns in the view up to the top level.
Sort or Sort Layer — Available for heading cells only. Displays a menu of sorting options. For information, see "Sorting Options Menu and Buttons".
Exclude column — Moves the column to the Excluded drop target. For information, see "Columns in the Excluded Drop Target".
Move — Displays a menu of the following options:
Right and Left — Moves the column to the right or left of its current location.
To Prompts — Moves the column to the Prompts drop-target.
To Sections — Moves the column to the Sections drop-target.
To Columns — Moves the column to the Columns drop-target.
The following toolbar buttons are common to all views:
Print This Analysis — Use this button to print the analysis as HTML or PDF. For more information on printing, see "Printing Views".
Export This Analysis — Use this button to select an option for exporting the analysis. For information, see "Export Menu Options for Views and Results".
Show how results will look on a Dashboard — Use this button to preview how the edited view will look on a dashboard.
Duplicate View — Use this button to create a copy of the view that you are editing.
Refresh the results of the current analysis — Use this button to refresh the data that is displayed in the view.
The toolbar on a data view editor contains some buttons that are common to all data views and other buttons and boxes that are particular to specific views. See the following sections:
Toolbar Buttons Common to All Data Views
The following toolbar buttons are common to all data views:
New Group — Use this button to display the "New Group dialog", where you add a new group.
New Calculated Item — Use this button to display the "New Calculated Item dialog", where you add a new calculated item.
Edit Graph Properties — Use this button to display the properties dialog for the view.
Display Results — Use this button to specify whether to show the view's results in the editor.
Show/Hide Layout Pane — Use this button to specify whether to show the "Layout pane" for all data views except for map.
Show/Hide Selection Steps Pane — Use this button to specify whether to show the "Selection Steps pane".
Toolbar Buttons Specific to Graph and Funnel Graph Views
The toolbar contains the following buttons and boxes that are specific to a graph view:
Type — Use this button to select the subtype of graph. Options depend on the type of graph.
Style — Use this button to select the style for the graph. Options depend on the type of graph.
Effect — Use this button to select either a 2D effect or a 3D effect for the graph.
Toolbar Buttons and Boxes Specific to Gauge Views
The toolbar contains the following buttons and boxes that are specific to a gauge view:
Show/Hide Settings Pane — Use this button to specify whether to show the "Settings pane".
Gauge Type — (Not available for funnel graphs.) Use this button to select the type of gauge. Options are: Dial, Horizontal Bar, Vertical Bar, and Bulb.
Effect — (Not available for all gauge types.) Use this box to select either a 2D effect or a 3D effect for the gauge.
Size — Use this box to specify the size of the gauge — Fit to Canvas, Small, Medium, Large or Custom.
If you select Custom, then you must complete the Width and Height fields, where you specify the width and height in pixels.
Toolbar Buttons and Box Specific to Map Views
The toolbar contains the following buttons and box that are specific to a map view:
Background Map — Use this box to select the background map for the map view.
Pan — Click this button and click and drag to move the map either side to side or up and down so that you see a certain portion of it. When you can pan, the cursor is in the shape of a hand and you can move the map in various directions.
Zoom In and Zoom Out — Click these buttons to zoom in and out of the map. When you can zoom in or out, the insertion point is in the shape of a magnifying glass with a plus or minus button over the glass.
Legend — Use this button to display or hide the legend for the map.
See "Working with Map Views on Dashboard Pages" for more information.
Toolbar Buttons and Box Specific to Pivot Table or Table Views
The toolbar contains the following buttons and box that are specific to a pivot table or table view:
Import formatting from another analysis — Use this button to display the "Open dialog", where you select an analysis from which to import formatting for columns and views. For more information, see "Using a Saved Analysis to Modify the Cosmetic Appearance of Other Analyses".
Graph Pivoted Results — Available only for pivot tables. Click this button to display the results of the pivot table in a graph view, which is displayed alongside the pivot table. The two views are fully linked, which means that changes made to one view are automatically reflected in the other.
The following items are added to the toolbar:
Position — Use this box to select the location of the graph relative to the pivot table that you created. Options are: Right, Below, Above, Left, Graph Only.
Edit Graph Properties — Use this button to display the "Graph Properties dialog".
Available Graph Types — Use this option to select the type of graph. Options include: Bar, Line, Area, Pie, Line-Bar, Time Series Line, Pareto, and Radar.
Type — (Not available for all graph types.) Use this box to select the subtype of graph. Options depend on the type of graph.
Style — (Not available for all graph types.) Use this box to select the style for the graph. Options depend on the type of graph.
Effect — (Not available for all graph types.) Use this box to select either a 2D effect or a 3D effect for the graph.
For information on available graph subtypes and styles, see Table 3-2.
You can use the following options to export the results of an analysis or a view. When you export the results of an analysis, any tables, pivot tables, or graphs that are displayed with the analysis are included.
For more information, see "Exporting Results".
PDF — Displays the File Download dialog where you can open or save the results or view as a PDF file.
Excel 2003+ — Displays the File Download dialog where you can open or save the results or view as an XLS file. The file is saved in HTML format. Excel controls the positioning of the HTML.
Powerpoint 2003+ — Displays the File Download dialog where you can open or save the results or view as a PPT file.
Web Archive (.mht) — Displays the File Download dialog where you can open or save the results or view as an MHT file. This enables you to export the underlying data for an existing analysis or view as a Web page (MHTML) file.
Data — Displays these options for exporting the data from the results or view:
CSV Format — Displays the File Download dialog where you can open or save all the columns in the results or view as a CSV file. This export results in a comma-separated list of values in a file that you can open in an application such as Excel.
Tab delimited Format — Displays the File Download dialog where you can open or save all the columns in the results or view as a CSV file. This export results in a tab-separated list of values in a file that you can open in an application such as Excel.
XML Format — Displays the File Download dialog where you can open or save the results or view as a TXT file. This file using the Microsoft MD Data Set standard for representing data in XML format.
You can use one of the following mechanisms to sort values in columns:
Right-click in the column header of pivot tables and tables to display the following list of options for sorting the columns. In the "Selected Columns pane", click the Options button. You can also right-click to display the "Right-Click Menu for Tables and Pivot Tables" where you can select options for sorting.
Sort Ascending — Sorts the values in the column by ascending order, as a first-level sort. For example, string values sort alphabetically A through Z, numbers sort lowest to highest, and dates sort earliest to latest. In the Selected Columns pane, when you select this option as the first sort, a Sort button is displayed to the left of the column name in the Selected Columns pane. If you later add another sort, then the Sort button includes the number 1.
Sort Descending — Sorts the values in the column by descending order, as a first-level sort. In the Selected Columns pane, when you select this option as the first sort, a Sort button is displayed to the left of the column name in the Selected Columns pane. If you later add another sort, then the Sort button includes the number 1.
Add Ascending Sort — Specifies that an ascending sort for this column is added as another sort for the analysis. In the Selected Columns pane, when you select this option, a Sort button with a number such as 2 or 3 is displayed to the left of the column name in the Selected Columns pane.
Add Descending Sort — Specifies that an descending sort for this column is added as another sort for the analysis. In the Selected Columns pane, when you select this option, a Sort button with a number such as 2 or 3 is displayed to the left of the column name in the Selected Columns pane.
Clear Sort — Removes the sort specification for the specified column. This option works differently in the Selected Columns pane than in other places. If you make sort specifications in both the Selected Columns pane and in the view itself, then you return to the Selected Columns pane and click Clear Sort, only the sort that you specified in the Selected Columns pane is removed. A sort that you specified in the view remains.
Clear Sorts in All Columns or Clear All Sorts in View — Removes all sort specifications that you have made. The Clear Sorts in All Columns option works differently in the Selected Columns pane than in other places. If you make sort specifications in both the Selected Columns pane and in the view itself, then you return to the Selected Columns pane and click Clear Sorts for All Columns, only the sorts that you specified in the Selected Columns pane are removed. Sorts that you specified in the view remain.
Hover the mouse pointer over the area to the right of the column name in the header of a pivot table or table and click either the upward facing triangle (Sort Ascending) or the downward facing triangle (Sort Descending) for that column. These sort specifications override those that you make with the right-click menu. Hovering is not available in the Selected Columns pane.
If you see a shaded-in sort button in the column header or the row header, then you know that the column contains a primary sort. You can add a second-level or third-level sort by hovering over another innermost column header or row header and clicking the appropriate sort button.
These options are also available in the "Results tab: Data View editor", the "Results tab: Table editor", and in views on dashboards. The Sort Ascending and Sort Descending triangles are not available in the Selected Columns pane or the Layout pane.
For more information, see "Sorting Data in Views".
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to view the filters in effect for an analysis.
For more information, see "Editing Views".
Use this box to specify whether to show the view results in the editor.
The toolbar contains the buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
If the column that is used in the filter is a display column, then the filter view shows display values rather than code values, unless the display values cannot be found. Then code values are displayed. For more information on display and code columns, see "Understanding the Double Column Feature".
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit a legend view, which documents the meaning of special formatting used in an analysis, such as the meaning of custom colors applied to gauges. Legends are displayed in HTML and PDF output, and can be localized.
For example, suppose you use conditional formatting in an analysis to show critical items in the color red and items that need attention in the color yellow. You can add a legend with text that documents the meaning of the colors and captions that summarize the appropriate action. You can use cosmetic formatting to make the background colors of the text match the colors in the conditional analysis.
Each legend item consists of a legend symbol with sample text (for example, a red box that displays Critical) and a caption that documents the meaning of the legend symbol (for example, Requires Immediate Attention.
For more information, see "Editing Legend Views".
Use this field to enter a title for the legend.
Use this button to display the "Format Title dialog", where you format the title.
Use this field to enter, for each legend item, the meaning of the legend symbol, such as Requires Immediate Attention.
Use this button to display the "Format Caption dialog", where you format the caption.
Use this field to enter, for each legend item, the text that is to be displayed within the legend symbol, for example, Critical.
Use this button to display the "Format Text dialog", where you format the caption text.
Use these buttons to reorder captions by moving them up or down one row in the list. Available only when you have more than one caption.
Use this button to delete a caption.
Use this button to add another caption.
The toolbar contains the following buttons and boxes:
Buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Format Legend View — Use this button to display the "Format Legend View dialog", where you format the legend.
Captions — Use this box to select a position for the caption relative to the legend symbol — Right, Left, or None.
Legend items per row — Use this box to specify the number of legend items to display in a row.
Import formatting from another analysis — Use this button to display the "Open dialog", where you select an analysis from which to import formatting for views. For more information, see "Using a Saved Analysis to Modify the Cosmetic Appearance of Other Analyses".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to add one or more paragraphs of text to be displayed with the results. Narrative text is useful for providing information such as context, explanatory text, or extended descriptions along with column values. You can perform the following actions in the narrative view:
Type a sentence with placeholders for each column in the results.
Specify how rows should be separated.
Use HTML formatting buttons to make text bold, italic, or underlined, and insert line breaks.
Apply cosmetic formatting to the fonts used in the narrative view, or import the font formatting from a previously saved view.
Add references to variables.
For example, suppose that you have created an analysis that shows a user's sales by region and want to provide explanatory text with the analysis. Using a narrative view, you can create the following explanatory text:
This report shows your sales by region. The regions are:
East Region
West Region
For more information, see "Editing Narrative Views".
Use these buttons to insert the HTML tags to begin and end bold, italic, or underlined text in the Prefix, Narrative, or Postfix fields.
Use this button to insert a line break in the Prefix, Narrative, or Postfix fields.
Note:
Pressing Enter does not result in multiple lines of text in the Prefix, Narrative, or Postfix fields.Use this option to work with HTML codes, as described in "Working with HTML Markup".
Use this field to enter the header for the narrative. This text is displayed at the beginning of the narrative.
For example, the following prefix entry:
[b]This analysis shows your sales by region. The regions are:[/b][br/][br/]
Displays this text:
This analysis shows your sales by region. The regions are:
Use this field to enter the narrative text that will be displayed for each row in the results. You can include both text and column values. Include a line break code at the end of this field to force each line of text and values onto its own line.
To include values, use the at sign (@), as described in the following list:
Use an at sign by itself to indicate the first column. If you include multiple at signs, then the first occurrence of the sign corresponds to the first column, the second occurrence corresponds to the second column, and so on.
Use @n to include the results from the designated column in the narrative. For example, @1 inserts the results from the first column in the analysis, and @3 inserts the results of the third column.
For example, for an analysis that returns the region name in the second column, the following narrative entry:
@2
Displays this text:
Use this field to enter a row separator for each line from the Narrative field that contains values. For example you might enter a string of plus signs (+) between each line.
Use this field to enter the number of rows from the column to return. For example, enter 5 to display values from the first 5 rows of the column. For a hierarchical column, you can use selection steps to display hierarchy levels with the hierarchical column. For example, create a step to select members based on hierarchy and add members of the specified level. A hierarchy level is considered a row.
Use this field to enter the footer text to be displayed at the bottom of the narrative. To display the footer information on a separate line from the actual narrative text, include markup tags in the Postfix field. Ensure that the narrative ends in a line break, or that the footer begins with a line break.
Use this box to specify whether to show the view results in the editor.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Format Narrative View — Use this button to display the "Format Narrative View dialog", where you format the view.
Import formatting from another analysis — Use this button to display the "Open dialog", where you select an analysis from which to import formatting for columns and views. For more information, see "Using a Saved Analysis to Modify the Cosmetic Appearance of Other Analyses".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
You can reference variables in the Prefix, Narrative and Postfix fields. For the syntax to use, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
The following characters are reserved characters:
@ (at sign, unless used as a column placeholder in the Narrative field)
[ (left bracket)
] (right bracket)
' (single quote)
\ (backslash)
Note:
If you want to include a reserved character, then precede it with a backslash character (\) to escape it. For example, to include a backslash character, type \\.Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit a static text view, which enables you to add or edit text to be displayed with the analysis results.
The markup can contain anything that is supported by the browser, but only formatting defined using the buttons at the top of the workspace will be displayed in PDF output.
For more information, see "Editing Views".
Use these buttons to insert the HTML tags to begin and end bold, italic, or underlined text in the Static Text field.
Use this button to insert a line break in the Static Text field.
Note:
Pressing Enter does not result in multiple lines of text in the Static Text field.Use this option to work with HTML codes, as described in "Working with HTML Markup".
Use this field to enter the text to be displayed with the analysis results.
For the syntax to use for variables, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
See the Notes section for some examples of static text.
Use this box to specify whether to show the view results in the editor.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Format Static Text View — Use this button to display the "Format Static Text View dialog", where you format the view.
Import formatting from another analysis — Use this button to display the "Open dialog", where you select an analysis from which to import formatting for columns and views. For more information, see "Using a Saved Analysis to Modify the Cosmetic Appearance of Other Analyses".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
The following table lists and describes several static text view examples.
| Static Text View Example | Description and Usage Notes |
|---|---|
| HTML text | Paste or type the HTML (or appropriate formatted text) into the text box. You can also click the HTML tag buttons. Based on the format of the text that you are entering, you can use markup tags to control the format of the text. The following are some examples of what you can do:
|
| ActiveX object | The Active-X object must be self-contained and supported by the browser. Paste or type the object into the HTML Text window, making sure to include the beginning and ending tags <object...> and </object>. |
| JavaScript or VBScript | The script must be self-contained and supported by the browser. Paste or type the script into the text box, making sure to include the beginning and ending tags <script> and </script>. |
| Audio | Ensure that you know where the audio clip is located. If the audio clip is for use in a shared environment, then it must be located on a network drive that accessible to all users.
Use the HTML tag
<EMBED SRC="audio" AUTOSTART="true" LOOP="true" HIDDEN="true"></EMBED>
where To add an audio clip located on the hard drive, the following HTML is an example: <EMBED SRC="c:\mycomputer\MIDIfiles\wakeup.mid" AUTOSTART="true" LOOP="true" HIDDEN="true"></EMBED> To add the same audio clip from a shared location on the Web server, the following HTML is an example: <EMBED SRC="\DashboardFiles\wakeup.mid" AUTOSTART="true" LOOP="true" HIDDEN="true"></EMBED> |
| Background image | The following example uses JavaScript.
Ensure that you know where the image to use as the background is located. If the image is for use in a shared environment, then it must be located on a network drive that is accessible to all users. If the image is located in a shared dashboard files folder, then the following is example HTML:
<script language="javascript"> document.body.background = "/dashboardfiles/"NameOfGraphic";</script>
where |
| Variables | The following example includes variables:
[u] Static Text View [/u][br/]
Region: @{variables.myFavoriteRegion} - Year: @{variables.myFavoriteYear}[br/]
System Time: @{system.currentTime}[dddd,MMMM dd,yyyy][br/]
Product Version: @{system.productVersion}[br/]
[br/]
|
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit a ticker view, which displays the results of an analysis as a marquee (moving results that scroll across the page). You can customize the size of the scroll area, the speed and direction in which the results scroll, and other display settings.
Note:
If the Web browser does not support moving text, then the results will be displayed, but they will not scroll across the page.For more information, see "Editing Views".
Use this box to select how the results move in the ticker:
Slide— The results start hidden, scroll on to the page, then stop once touching the other side.
Scroll — The results start hidden, scroll on to the page, then off the page before repeating.
Alternate — The results bounce back and forward inside the marquee.
Use this box to select the direction the results move in the ticker — Left, Right, Down, or Up.
Use this field to enter the width of the ticker, either in pixels or as a percentage of the page width. For example, a value of 200 indicates a width of 200 pixels, and a value of 25% indicates a width of one-quarter of the page.
Use this field to enter the height of the ticker, either in pixels or as a percentage of the page height.
Use this field to enter any optional text or graphics to display at the beginning of each redraw of the analysis results. You can use HTML to format the text.
If you include an image, then ensure you know where the image is located. If the image is for your use only, then the following is a sample location:
c:\mycomputer\temp\report.gif
If the image is for use in a shared environment, then it must be located on a network drive accessible to all users. For a shared image, specify the UNC name, for example:
\\ALLUSERS\graphics\report.gif
Use this field to enter the HTML to use in formatting the rows in the results.
To include the results from a designated column, use @n. For example, @1 inserts the results from the first column, and @3 inserts the results of the third column.
Use the field to enter the character that separates one row from another. The default character is a vertical bar ( | ).
Use this field to enter the character that separates one column from another. The default character is a vertical bar ( | ).
Use this field to enter any optional text or graphics to display at the end of each redraw of the analysis results. You can use HTML to format the text.
If you include an image, then ensure that you know where the image is located. If the image is for your use only, then the following is a sample location:
c:\mycomputer\temp\report.gif
If the image is for use in a shared environment, then it must be located on a network drive accessible to all users. For a shared image, specify the UNC name, for example:
\\ALLUSERS\graphics\report.gif
Use this button to generate default settings for the most commonly used field.
Note:
If you click Set Defaults after entering values in other fields, your entered values are cleared.Use this button to clear all fields.
Note:
After you clear all fields, you can click Set Defaults to restore default settings for the most commonly used fields.Use this button to display the "Advanced Ticker Options dialog", where you specify additional options for the ticker, such as number of loops and background color.
Use this box to specify whether to show the view results in the editor.
The toolbar contains the buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit a title view. You can add a title, a subtitle, a logo, a link to a custom help or other related information, and timestamps to the analysis.
For more information, see "Editing Views".
Use this field to enter the text to display as the title. Do not include HTML markup.
If you do not specify a title, then the name of the saved analysis is used as the title. For unsaved analyses, the Title text box is blank.
Use this button to display the "Format Title dialog", where you format the title.
Use this box to specify whether to show the saved name of the analysis. Select the box to show the saved name. Deselect the box to hide it.
Use this field to specify a logo image or other graphic to display in the title. To do so, enter one of the following:
The URL to a logo image or graphic.
The fmap syntax to reference a logo image or graphic that is stored locally in the Oracle Business Intelligence environment. For more information on the fmap syntax, see "Storing Custom Files Locally and Using the fmap Function to Reference Them".
Note:
If you are working in a secured environment, then you must specify a logo image or graphic that is stored locally in the Oracle Business Intelligence environment using the fmap syntax. (A secured environment is one in which the HardenXSS element is set to true in the instanceconfig.xml file. See your administrator for more information.)The image or graphic file should be one that is accessible to all users who will view the analysis.
Use this button to display the "Format Logo dialog", where you format the logo.
Use this field to enter the text to display as a subtitle. The subtitle follows the title on a new line.
Use this button to display the "Format Subtitle dialog", where you format the subtitle.
Use the box to specify whether to display a timestamp indicating when an analysis started to execute. You can specify the date, the time, the date and time, or no display.
Use this button to display the "Format Time dialog", where you format the time for the analysis.
Use this field to display a Help icon (that is, a question mark) that links to a custom help file or other related information in the title. To do so, enter one of the following:
The URL to a custom help file or other related information.
The fmap syntax to reference a custom help file or other related information that is stored locally in the Oracle Business Intelligence environment. For more information on the fmap syntax, see "Storing Custom Files Locally and Using the fmap Function to Reference Them".
Note:
If you are working in a secured environment, then you must specify a customized help file or other related information that is stored locally in the Oracle Business Intelligence environment using the fmap syntax. (A secured environment is one in which the HardenXSS element is set to true in the instanceconfig.xml file. See your administrator for more information.)The custom help file or other related information should be one that is accessible to all users who will view the analysis.
Use this button to display the "Format Title dialog", where you specify formatting for a view component.
Use this box to specify whether to show the view results in the editor.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Format Title View — Use this button to display the "Format Title View dialog", where you specify formatting for the view.
Import formatting from another analysis — Use this button to display the "Open dialog", where you select an analysis from which to import formatting for columns and views. For more information, see "Using a Saved Analysis to Modify the Cosmetic Appearance of Other Analyses".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
Titles and subtitles are formatted using the style sheet in use in your organization.
You can reference variables in the Title, Logo, Subtitle and Help URL fields. For the syntax to use, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
You can store custom files, such as images and help files, locally in your Oracle Business Intelligence environment and then easily reference them using the fmap function. For example, you can store an image locally that you want to display in a title view. Then, when you specify the image for the title view in the "Results tab: Title editor", you can use the fmap function to reference it.
To store custom files locally, you must use the following directory and expose it according to the instructions for the HTTP Server that your organization uses:
ORACLE_INSTANCE/bifoundation/OracleBIPresentationServicesComponent/coreapplication_obips1/analyticsRes directory.
Note:
Because the analyticsRes directory gets replicated for every instance that is populated, the custom files need to be replicated in each instance.You can store files directly in this directory or in subdirectories in this directory. It is strongly recommended that you use ASCII characters for names of custom files that you will reference using the fmap syntax.
Note:
Custom files that were stored locally in previous releases of Oracle Business Intelligence will need to be manually migrated in Release 11g.To easily reference custom files that are stored in the analyticsRes directory, use the following fmap syntax:
fmap:location/file_name
where:
location/ is the subdirectory path in the analyticsRes directory in which the custom file resides, if the custom file resides in a subdirectory of analyticsRes (for example: Images/).
Note:
Logo images and graphics located in the analyticsRes directory should all be stored in the same folder.file_name is the name of the custom file (for example: newlogo.gif).
The following are examples of fmap commands:
fmap:mylogo.gif fmap:Images/newlogo.gif
See Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition for more information on the fmap syntax.
Use this editor of the "Analysis editor: Results tab" to edit a view selector view, which allows users to select a specific view of an analysis from among the saved views. For example, users can select to display a graph view for the analysis.
For more information, see "Editing View Selector Views".
Use this field to enter a caption for the view selector.
Use this button to display the "Format Caption dialog", where you format the caption.
Use this box to select a position for the caption — Left, Above, or Right.
Displays the views that are available to be included as choices in the view selector. Select a view and click the right arrow to move it into the Views Included area.
Note:
The None view shows the view selector only.Displays the views to be included as choices in the view selector. To change the order of the view in the list, select a view and use the up and down arrows. To rename a view, select the view and then click Rename to display the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the view. To remove a view from this area, select a view and click the left arrow.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Buttons that are common to all views. For more information, see "Toolbar Buttons Common to All Views".
Import formatting from another analysis — Use this button to display the "Open dialog", where you select an analysis from which to import formatting for columns and views. For more information, see "Using a Saved Analysis to Modify the Cosmetic Appearance of Other Analyses".
Use this button to save your edits and return to the compound layout view.
Use this button to restore the settings in effect prior to your edits.
Use this dialog to add content to a briefing book.
For more information, see:
Use this area to select one of the following options:
Updatable — Refreshes the data whenever the briefing book is downloaded, or when it is specified as the delivery content for an agent.
Snapshot — Adds the content in its current state. Snapshot content preserves the original data and is not updated when the briefing book is rerun. Snapshot content will not be updated when using agents.
Follow Briefing Book Navigation Links
This option applies only to updatable content, not to snapshot content.
Use this area to select one of the following options:
No — Specifies that briefing book navigation links are not to be followed.
Yes — Specifies that briefing book navigation links are to be followed. If you select this option, then you must also specify the number of links to follow.
Number of links to follow — Specifies the number of briefing book navigation links to be followed, if you selected the Yes option.
Use this field to enter a description of the content being saved to the briefing book.
Use this field to enter the briefing book in which to save the content. Click Browse to display the "Save As dialog", where you can select an existing briefing book or create a new briefing book by entering the new briefing book name in the Name field.
Use this dialog to save a customization for a dashboard page.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter a name for the saved customization.
Use this area to specify for whom the customization is to be saved. It contains the following components:
Me — Use this option to save the customization for your own personal use.
Others — Use this option to save the customization for use by others.
Set Permissions — Use this button to display the "Saved Customization Permissions and Defaults dialog", where you specify the accounts that have permission to use the customization and whether the customization is to be the default customization for the accounts.
Make this my default for this page
Use this option to specify whether to use this saved customization as your default customization when you display this page in a dashboard.
Use this dialog to specify the accounts that have permission to use the customization and whether the customization is to be the default customization for the accounts.
For more information, see:
Displays the accounts that have permission to use the customization and indicates whether the customization is to be the default customization for the accounts.
To indicate that the customization is to be the default customization for an account, click the Group Default box for the account.
Use this button to display the "Add Groups dialog", where you select the users, application roles, and Catalog groups to have permission to use a saved customization.
Use this button to delete the selected account.
Use this dialog to define scale markers for a graph.
Scale markers are accenting lines or shaded background ranges that mark key point, thresholds, ranges, and so on in a graph. There are two types of scale markers:
Line — A line that is drawn across the graph at a specified position on the scale
Range — A shaded background area that is displayed behind the graph
Line or range scale markers can be applied on one or more axes depending on the type of graph.
Note:
Some graph types do not use scale markers, such as pie graphs.For more information, see "Graph Properties dialog: Scale tab".
Click to add a new scale marker
Use this button to add a new scale marker row to the Scale Markers area.
Click to remove selected scale markers
Use this button to remove selected scale markers. To select a scale marker for removal, select the first box in the scale marker row.
Use this table to define scale markers using the following components:
Caption — Use this column to enter the caption to be displayed in the legend for the scale marker.
Type — Use this box to specify the type of scale marker: Line or Range.
Width (for a line) — Use this column to select a width (in pixels) for the line.
Low (for a range) — Use this column to enter the low value of the range or click Customize Scale Markers to set the value.
Position (for a line) — Use this column to enter the position of the line or click Customize Scale Markers to set the value.
High (for a range) — Use this column to enter the high value of the range or click Customize Scale Markers to set the value.
Customize Scale Markers — Displays the "Customize Scale Marker dialog", where you set the value for the position of a line or the lower high values of a range. To set the value, you can use a static value, a presentation variable, a measure column, or a SQL query.
Color — Use this column to select the color of the scale marker.
Use this pane to view pie graphs that show how evenly the objectives (and the KPIs that support them) that compose your scorecard are distributed among the following categories:
Financial versus non-financial
Internal versus external
Leading versus lagging
These pie graphs are helpful to determine how balanced your scorecard is.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor: Overview tab".
Financial versus Non-Financial Pie Graph
Displays how many objectives are finance-specific and how many are not finance-specific. To maintain a balanced scorecard, financial and non-financial perspectives should be equally implemented.
Internal versus External Pie Graph
Displays how many objectives are specific to your internal corporate processes, and how many are related to external, customer-related objectives.
Leading versus Lagging Pie Graph
Displays how many objectives drive the performance of other objectives (that is, how many are leading) and how many are affected by the performance of other objectives or by other data or processes (that is, how many are lagging).
Use this dialog to specify how a scorecard object that you have added to a dashboard page is to be formatted.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the width of the object as a percentage of its original size.
Use this field to enter the height of the object in pixels.
Use this pane to create scorecard objects that present and analyze corporate strategy, such as vision and mission statements, strategy maps, cause & effect maps, and so on.
For more information, see
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor".
Displays a list of objects that present and analyze corporate strategy.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Objects — Displays the following options:
Open — Use this option to open the selected object. (Whether you can open an object and whether the object opens as read-only depends on your privileges and permissions and on the type of object.)
Cut — Use this option to remove the selected folder or object for pasting in another folder.
Copy — Use this option to duplicate the selected folder or object and paste it in another folder.
Paste — Use this option to paste the folder or object that you have cut or copied in another folder.
Delete — Use this option to delete the selected folder or object.
View — Displays the option System Objects. Use this option to display system folders or objects in the object list. (System folders or objects are those for which the system attribute is set in the "Properties dialog").
New Object — Displays these options:
Create New Folder — Use this option to create a new folder in which to organize objects. To rename the folder, right-click the folder and enter a new name.
Create Cause & Effect Map — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: Cause & Effect Map tab", where you create a cause & effect map.
Create Custom View — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: Custom View tab", where you create a custom view.
Create KPI — Use this option to display the "KPI editor", where you create a KPI.
Create Mission — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: Mission tab", where you define a mission statement.
Create Strategy Map — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: Strategy Map tab", where you create a strategy map.
Create Strategy Tree — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: Strategy Tree tab", where you create a strategy tree.
Create Vision — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: Vision tab", where you define a vision statement.
Create KPI Watchlist — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: KPI Watchlist tab", where you create a KPI watchlist.
Create Agent — (This option is available only when you select a KPI.) Use this option to display the "Create New Agent dialog", where you create an agent from the KPI.
Open — Use this option to open the selected object. (Whether you can open an object and whether the object opens as read-only depends on your privileges and permissions and on the type of object.)
Delete — Use this option to delete the selected folder or object.
Refresh — Use this button to refresh the objects that are displayed in the object list.
Use this editor to create a scorecard of your entire organization or of individual departments.
For more information, see:
Displays dimensions of KPIs that are used in the Scorecard to measure the progress and performance of initiatives and objectives. Use this area to pin values for the dimensions. For more information, see "About the Point of View Area".
Use the "Strategy pane" to create, organize, and leverage the objectives that form the strategic structure, also called Strategy Tree, of the corporate entity (department, for example) that you want to evaluate using KPIs or to drive by initiatives.
Use the "Initiatives pane" to create, organize, and leverage the initiatives that are the tasks required to achieve objectives. You can monitor the progress of initiatives by assigning KPIs.
Use the "Scorecard Documents pane" to create diagrams and views that provide different depictions of strategy dynamics and structures (for example, cause & effect maps and strategy maps).
You can also use this pane to build custom maps to present scorecard data and define mission and vision statements that articulate the overarching goal of the entity that you are scorecarding such as your organization or department.
Use the "Catalog pane" to locate and drag and drop objects from the catalog to build a scorecard. For example, you might select a predefined KPI and drag it to the objective or initiative whose progress it will measure.
Use the "Perspectives pane" to modify the default perspectives defined by the Balanced Scorecard Methodology, create custom perspectives, and delete perspectives.
Displays tabs for the objects that you choose to view, create, or modify (for example, initiatives, strategy objectives, and strategy maps), including:
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Back — Use this button to go backward through your point of view history to to select a previous point of view. The (Default Value) option returns to the point of view with which you started.
Forward — Use this button to go forward through your point of view history to select a previous point of view.
Refresh KPI Values — Use this button to update the page to reflect changes.
Scorecard Settings — Use this button to display the "Settings dialog", where you define the score thresholds and assessment ranges to be used for scoring scorecard objects and edit dimension-related settings.
Change Permissions on Scorecard — Use this button to display the "Permission dialog", where you change the permissions of the scorecard.
Edit Mode Toggle — Use this button to toggle between these two modes:
Edit mode — Enables you to create, modify, and delete all scorecard objects and views.
View mode —Enables you to fully navigate scorecard but not add new data, or modify and delete existing data.
Close Tab — Use this option to close the current tab.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor" to create, view, and edit a cause & effect map.
For more information, see:
Use the "Cause & Effect Map tab: Diagram tab" to create a diagram that illustrates the cause and effect relationships among objectives and KPIs.
Use the "Cause & Effect Map tab: Details tab" to specify supporting information for a cause & effect map.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the cause & effect map.
Save As — Use this button to display the "Save As dialog", where you save the cause & effect map with another name.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the cause & effect map.
Zoom In — Use this button to enlarge the view of the diagram.
Zoom Out — Use this button to minimize the view of the diagram.
Cause & Effect Map Preferences — Use this button to display the "Cause & Effect Map Preferences dialog", where you specify how cause and effect relationships are to be displayed on a cause & effect map.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor" to create, view, and edit a custom view.
For more information, see:
Use the "Custom View tab: Diagram tab" to create a diagram that shows a personalized view of your business data.
Use the "Custom View tab: Details tab" to specify supporting information for a custom view.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the custom view.
Save As — Use this button to display the "Save As dialog", where you save the custom view with another name.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the custom view.
Zoom In — Use this button to enlarge the view of the diagram.
Zoom Out — Use this button to minimize the view of the diagram.
Properties — Use this button to display the "Custom View Properties dialog", where you specify a background image for the diagram.
Display As — Use the (Full, Simple, and Property) buttons to specify how you want each objective or KPI to be displayed on the diagram. For each objective or KPI, select it on the diagram and then:
Click Full to display the full version.
Click Simple to display the simple version.
Click Property to display it as one of its properties and then select one of these options:
Name — Full name.
Icon — The icon used to represent an objective or KPI.
Status — Current performance status or level (Warning, for example).
Trend — An icon indicating if the performance has improved or declined, is good or bad, or has remained the same since the previous comparison period. Only select this if trending is enabled for this node.
Value — Current value.
Target — The desired value.
Variance — Value by which the actual value differs from the target.
% Variance — Percent by which the actual value differs from the target.
Change — Value by which the actual value differs from that in a previous period.
% Change — Percent by which the actual value differs from that in a previous period.
Use this tab to create, view, and edit an initiative.
For more information, see:
Use this box to enter a new name for the initiative.
Use this box to enter a description of the initiative.
Displays the current performance status of the initiative, for example, Warning.
Displays the type of object, that is, Initiative.
Use this "Analytics pane" to specify basic information about the initiative, to identify the KPIs and other objectives that support and measure the performance of the initiative, and to add action links.
Use the "Collaboration pane" to identify information helpful for collaborating on the initiative, including the business owner, key resources, and related documents.
Use the "Related Items pane" to identify the objectives that drive the initiative.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the initiative.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the initiative.
Use this tab to work with KPI details, such as viewing basic KPI settings, pinning dimensions, specifying information helpful for collaborating on the KPI, and identifying related items.
For more information, see:
Use this box to enter a new name for this use of the KPI.
Use this box to enter a description of this KPI usage.
Displays the current performance status of this KPI, for example, Warning.
Displays information that indicates how the performance of the selected KPI has changed since the last reporting period or a date that you specify.
Displays the type of object, that is, KPI.
Use the "Analytics pane" to view basic KPI settings as well as a graph that presents actual values and target values, pin dimensions, and run actions.
Use the "Collaboration pane" to identify information helpful for collaborating on the the KPI, including the business owner, key resources, and related documents.
Use the "Related Items pane" to identify the objectives that drive the KPI or are driven by the KPI.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the KPI details.
Open KPI Definition — Use this button to open the KPI in the "KPI editor", where you can edit it.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the KPI.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor" to define, view, and edit a mission or vision statement for your organization.
For more information, see:
The tab is also displayed as:
Use the "Mission tab: Document tab" or "Vision tab: Document tab" to enter and format your mission statement or vision statement.
Use the "Mission tab: Details tab" or "Vision tab: Details tab" to specify supporting information for the mission or vision statement.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the mission or vision statement.
Save As — Use this button to display the "Save As dialog", where you save the mission or vision statement with another name.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the mission or vision statement.
Use this tab to create, view, and edit an objective.
For more information, see:
Use this box enter a new name for the objective.
Use this box to enter a description of the objective.
Displays the current performance status of the objective, for example, Warning.
Displays the type of object, that is, Objective.
Use this "Analytics pane" to specify basic information about the objective, to identify the KPIs and other objectives that support and measure the performance of the objective, and to add action links.
Use the "Collaboration pane" to identify information helpful for collaborating on the objective, including the business owner and related documents.
Use the "Related Items pane" to identify other objectives that cause or effect the objective and initiatives that drive the objective.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the objective.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the objective.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor" to:
View summary information for an initiative, objective, or KPI.
The summary information displayed depends on which object you last selected in the "Initiatives pane" or the "Strategy pane":
If you last selected:
An initiative or objective, then the basic settings for the initiative or objective are displayed (for example, status, business owner, and so on) as well as a status summary showing the number of KPIs and initiatives, or KPIs and objectives, that evaluate progress in each performance assessment range.
If there is at least one child or descendant objective, initiative, or KPI for a particular status value, the status name is a hyperlink that drills to a dynamically created list of the child or descendant objectives, initiatives, and KPIs.
A KPI, then the basic settings for the KPI are displayed (for example, status, business owner, and so on) as well as performance data and a performance graph.
Link to information on how to get started with scorecarding.
View pie graphs that show how the objectives that compose your scorecard are distributed.
For more information, see "Viewing Overview Information".
Use the "Summary View pane" to view summary information about the selected initiative, objective, or KPI.
Use the "Getting Started pane" to learn how to use scorecard to drive and assess corporate performance, to link to the Oracle Business Intelligence glossary, and to link to information about how to create scorecards.
Use the "Scorecard Breadth pane" to view pie graphs that show how evenly the objectives (and the KPIs that support them) that compose your scorecard are distributed among the following categories:
Financial versus non-financial
Internal versus external
Leading versus lagging
Use this tab to create, view and edit perspectives.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the name of the perspective.
Use this field to enter a description of the perspective.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the perspective. To specify the business owner, click the Set User button to display the "Business Owner dialog", where you can search for and select the business owner.
Displays the following options to indicate the focus of the perspective:
Financial — Use this option to specify that the perspective focuses on objectives, initiatives, and KPIs that relate to or support the monetary or economic health and development of your organization.
Internal facing — Use this option to specify that the perspective focuses on objectives, initiatives, and KPIs that form internal processes and functions, for example, employee training programs.
Objectives, Initiatives & KPIs
Use this table to view and manage the initiatives, objectives, and KPIs that are associated with this perspective.
Use the "Related Documents area" to view and manage documents that provide supporting information to the perspective.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the perspective.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the perspective.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor" to create, view, and edit a strategy map.
For more information, see:
Use the "Strategy Map tab: Diagram tab" to create a diagram that shows how the objectives that have been defined for a scorecard and the KPIs that measure their progress are aligned by perspectives.
Use the "Strategy Map tab: Details tab" to specify supporting information for the strategy map.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the strategy map.
Save As — Use this button to display the "Save As dialog", where you save the strategy map with another name.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the strategy map.
Zoom In — Use this button to enlarge the view of the diagram.
Zoom Out — Use this button to minimize the view of the diagram.
Draw a Causal Linkage Between Two Objectives — Use this button to add a cause and effect relationship between two objectives, two KPIs, or between an objective and a KPI.
To do so, click this button, select the objective or KPI that is the cause (that is the objective or KPI that drives the second objective or KPI), and then drag to and select the objective or KPI that is the effect (that is, the objective or KPI that is driven by the first objective or KPI.) Click the button again to turn this functionality off. A line is drawn on the diagram connecting the two objectives, two KPIs, or the objective and KPI. The two objectives, two KPIs, or the objective and KPI are added to the Causes and Effects tables on the "Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab" accordingly.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor" to create, view, and edit a strategy tree.
For more information, see:
Use the "Strategy Tree tab: Diagram tab" to view an objective and its supporting child objectives and KPIs hierarchically in a tree diagram.
Use the "Strategy Tree tab: Details tab" to specify supporting information for the strategy tree.
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save — Use this button to save the strategy tree.
Save As — Use this button to display the "Save As dialog", where you save the strategy tree with another name.
Contact Owner — Use this button to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the strategy tree.
Zoom In — Use this button to enlarge the view of the diagram.
Zoom Out — Use this button to minimize the view of the diagram.
Use this pane to find objects by name, directory location, and type (agents and scorecards, for example). This pane enables you to quickly locate the objects that you need.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Catalog page".
Use this field to enter the full or partial name of the object or folder that you want to find. In addition to text, you can use the following:
\\ — Search for an exact match
* — Search for all objects of a specific type. For example, *reports will return all reports
Use this list to select a folder in which to search for objects:
My Folders — Search folders that you created or that were automatically generated for you.
Shared Folders - Search all folders that you can access.
Administrators can search for all user and object folders in the catalog root directory.
Use this list to find only certain kinds of objects. For example, reports, dashboards, or KPIs.
Use this dialog to specify the condition to be used to determine whether a section in a dashboard is to be displayed.
You might want to display a section conditionally, for example, when the results of an analysis show that sales are down by 15 percent or greater in the past week and you want to display a section that contains links to related reports.
This dialog is displayed from the "Page Layout area" in the "Dashboard builder".
For more information, see "Changing the Properties of Objects Added to Dashboard Pages".
Displays the condition under which the section is to be displayed.
Use this button to display the "New Condition dialog", where you create a new condition.
Use this button to display the "Select Condition dialog", where you select an existing condition.
Display these options:
Test Condition — Use this button to test whether the condition evaluates to true or false.
Edit Condition — Use this button to display the "Edit Condition dialog", where you edit the condition.
Remove Condition — Use this button to remove the condition.
Save Condition As — Use this button to display the "Save As dialog", where you save the condition by name to the catalog.
Use this dialog to specify the properties for a section of data in a view via the Layout pane.
For more information, see "Setting Properties for View Bodies and Drop Targets".
Components for Pivot Tables and Tables
Use this area to indicate whether to create a page break before the section, so that every time a value changes in the section drop target, the new section for that column is displayed on a new page. Page breaks are visible when you export an analysis to PDF. This is useful for data-driven detail analyses.
You can select from the following:
No Page Break — Do not break pages.
Innermost Column — Break at the innermost column, which inserts a page break between every section.
Outermost Column — Break at the outermost column, which inserts a page break when the section label in the outermost column changes.
When the value of an outermost column changes, the value of the inner column is also considered changed. Therefore, setting page breaks at the innermost column inserts manual page breaks between every section.
Folder.Column — For example, Markets.Region, or Products.Brand. Inserts a page break when the section label in the specified column changes. This option is available only when the Sections drop target contains a column.
Use this box to indicate whether to display rows that have no data in the section. Select the box to display all rows, even if a row is an empty text string and contains no value. Deselect the box to hide rows when there are no results to display. This option might be useful for example, if you want to hide empty address lines.
Use this box to indicate whether to display the heading for the section.
The remaining components of this dialog are described in "Column Properties dialog: Style tab".
Maximum number of section slider values
Use this box to enter the maximum number of values to display on a section slider bar, but not to exceed the system maximum. The administrator configures the system maximum. If you enter a number that exceeds the system maximum, then it will be ignored.
For more information about section sliders, see "Defining Section Sliders in Graphs and Gauges".
Use this dialog to navigate to and select the columns or members that you want to include in an analysis, prompt, filter, KPI, or when associating columns with layers for maps. In some cases, you can also use this dialog to add additional subject areas to the dialog.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
This button is available only if one or more related subject areas are available and you have permission to access them.
Use this button to display the "Add/Remove Subject Areas dialog", from which you can add or remove related subject areas.
Not available for maps. Click this button to search.
Use this tree to browse for and select the column for which you want to build the prompt, the column that you want to add to the filter, the dimension that you want to add to the KPI, or the column that you want to associate with a layer for a map. For a map, you can select a single column, multiple columns from multiple subject areas, or multiple columns from a single subject area.
This area is available only for columns to associate with a layer for a map. You can view and modify the columns that you have selected.
These buttons are available only for columns to associate with a layer for a map. You can select columns in one or more subject areas and move them between the two lists in the dialog.
These buttons are available only for columns to associate with a layer for a map. You can select columns then click the buttons to modify the order or the columns in the list. If you are trying to duplicate the name of a geographic layer that has multiple parts, then ensure that the columns are in order from top to bottom to match that layer name. For example, if the layer name is Country_State, then ensure that you include the Country column above the State column in the list.
Use this dialog to select one of the following items:
For an Invoke a Java Method action, the Java method to be invoked
For a Navigate to EPM Content action, the Hyperion resource to which to navigate
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Displays the following:
For an Invoke a Java Method action, Java methods that you can select
For a Navigate to EPM Content action, the Hyperion resources that you can select
Use this list to select a Java method or a Hyperion resource.
Displays the Java method or the Hyperion resource that you have selected in the list.
Use this dialog to select the function to be executed by an Invoke a Browser Script action.
For more information, see:
Use this list to select the function to be executed.
Displays the name of the function selected in the list.
Use this dialog to search for and select one or more values from a list of available values:
In a filter or prompt, when performing write back on a table view or pivot table view, or when creating or editing a member step
In a list of KPI dimensions, when pinning a dimension
Using this search function, you can limit the list of available values (for example, find all those values that start with the letter D) so that you can more easily find the value or values that you want.
This dialog is also displayed as:
Note:
Not all components are available in each version of this dialog.Available only when working with a member step that is based on a hierarchy.
Use this box to select the type of relationship with which to create the member step for the hierarchical column. You can select a family relationship, a specific hierarchy level (for level-based hierarchies only), or a level relationship (for level-based hierarchies only). For parent-child hierarchies, the only option available is family relationship.
Available only when working with a member step.
Use this box to select the type of action to create for a member step. You can select to add the selected members to the selection, keep only the selected members and remove all others, or remove the selected members from the selection. For groups and calculated items, the only action available is Add.
When working with a member step that is based on a hierarchy, use the box beside the Action box to specify a hierarchy level (for level-based hierarchies only) or a family relationship (such as children of, parent of, descendants of, and ancestors of).
When you edit the first step in a list, the choices for actions are Start with All Members, Start with Selected Members, and Start with Groups or Calculated Items.
Use this button to show or hide the Search area that is displayed within the Available List area. See "Components of Search Area".
Use this area to:
Initiate a search in the Search area.
Select values to move to the Selected List area.
Show additional choices, if available, by clicking More.
Items that you have selected are displayed with a green check mark beside them.
Use this area to view the values that you have selected from the Available List area and moved to the Selected List area.
Use this button to display the "Edit dialog", where you can refine the values with which you are working.
This button is not available when you select members for selection steps.
Use this box to specify that an analysis prompt or a dashboard prompt can override the member step. In a list of steps for a column, specify that only one step in the list be able to be overridden by a prompt. For information, see Chapter 6, "Prompting in Dashboards and Analyses."
To select multiple values, press the Control key, then click the values.
To select a range of values, click the first value in the range, press the Shift key, then click the last value in the range.
To move one or more values from the Available List area to the Selected List area, use the Move or Move All button. You also can double-click a single value in the Available List area to move it to the Selected List area.
For a group, the following options are displayed when you click the arrow beside Move:
Add — Use this option to add the group to the analysis. You will see an "Add: group-name" step in the Selected List area. You will see an outline value for the group in a table or pivot table.
Add Members — Use this option to add the members of the group to the analysis. You will see an "Add: Members of group-name" step in the Selected List area. You will not see an outline value in a table or pivot table; you will see the members of the group.
To remove one or more values from the Selected List area, use the Remove or Remove All button. You also can double-click a single value in the Selected List area to remove it.
In the search criteria, you can use % (percent sign) as a wildcard.
Use this area to initiate a search for values or members and view the results of the search.
Use these fields to specify text data on which to search. In the Name box, select the appropriate option such as Starts, Contains, Ends, or Is Like (pattern match). Enter the string for which you need to search.
Not available for member search. Use this field to specify a range of numeric or date and time data for which to search.
Available only when searching for hierarchical members. Use this field to specify the node in whose sub-tree you want to start searching for members. For example, suppose that you have a geography hierarchy with All Countries as the root node and 50 countries below that. You want to search for all cities that start with the letter "A" in the country called USA. Use the Children of field to specify USA.
Select Member to display the Select Member dialog.
Select a Specific Member to Search Within
Available only when searching for hierarchical members. Click this button to display the Select Member dialog in which you specify the member whose children you want to search.
Available only when searching for members of level-based hierarchies. Use this field to select the level below which you want to search for members. The default of <Any> specifies to search for members below any level. For parent-child hierarchies, no levels exist, so this setting is always <Any>. Certain levels are disabled because they are at or above the level you selected, which does not constitute a valid search.
Use this button to initiate the search and display the search results. When you search for members, the columns of the subject area are searched.
If the available list of values for a prompt or write back column is based on a SQL statement, then you will not be able to search for values.
Use this dialog to specify a variable to use to set a value of a KPI dimension. You set values of KPI dimensions, for example, when you add a KPI that is dimensioned to a KPI Watchlist or when you add a strategy map that contains one or more KPIs that are dimensioned to a dashboard.
For more information about variables, see "Using Variables".
Use this box to select the type of variable to use to set the value. Depending on the task you are performing, you can select one of these types: Session, Repository, or Presentation.
Use this field to enter the name of the variable to use to set the value, for example USER.
Use this dialog to select the Web Service operation to be invoked by an Invoke a Web Service action.
For more information, see:
Use this list to select the Web Service operation to invoke.
Initially, this list displays the Web Services pre-configured by the administrator. You can display other Web Services by using the WSDL URL component.
Displays the Web Services Description Language (WSDL) of the Web Service operation selected in the Web Services list.
To list Web Service operations available from a WSDL URL that was not pre-configured, use this field to enter the WSDL URL (for example, http://<machine>:8888/default/10?WSDL) and then click Open.
Displays the Web Service of the selected operation.
Displays the selected operation.
Restore the list of Web Services pre-configured by your Oracle BI Administrator
Use this button to display the list of Web Services that were initially displayed in the Web Services list, that is, the Web Services pre-configured by the administrator.
This button is available only when you have a folder selected. Use this button to refresh the selected folder.
Use this pane to view, add, and modify the criteria that are selected for an analysis.
Selected columns are displayed in boxes in this pane. Each box has two sections. The upper section shows the name of the column's folder, for example, Customers. The lower section shows the name of the column, for example, Customer Name. If columns from the same folder are placed next to each other, then they are grouped in one folder section.
If a column selector view is in use, then you see the phrase "Column Group" instead of the column name. You also cannot edit the properties for the columns. See "Editing Column Selector Views" for information.
You can:
Reorder the columns to arrange them in the way that they are to be displayed in the analysis results
Combine the results of two or more analyses into a single result
Remove all columns from the criteria
Other modifications that you can make to columns depend on the type of column:
For attribute columns and measure columns, you can:
Specify the sort order of the column
Edit the formula for the column, including customizing the heading
Edit column properties to control the formatting and interaction of the column
Add new filters
Delete column
For hierarchical columns, you can:
Specify the sort order of the column
Edit column properties to control the formatting and interaction of the column
Delete column
For hierarchy levels, you can:
Edit properties to control the formatting and interaction of the hierarchy level
For more information, see "Specifying the Criteria for Analyses".
This pane is part of the "Analysis editor: Criteria tab".
Use this button to reorder a single column or multiple columns that are grouped in a folder section. This button is located to the left of the column name or folder name. The following list describes how to use the Drag Column button, but you can reorder by clicking anywhere in the column or folder area and dragging and dropping to the new location. Valid drop locations are indicated by a thick solid line.
To reorder:
A single column in a folder section that contains only one column, click the Drag Column button in either the column section or the folder section and drag and drop the section to a new location.
A single column in a folder section that contains multiple columns, click the Drag Column button in the column section and then drag and drop the section to a new location. A new folder section is created for the reordered column.
All columns in a folder section, click the Drag Column button in the folder section and drag and drop the section to a new location.
This button is available only for hierarchical columns.
Use this button to expand or collapse the display of hierarchy levels in column.
Use this button to select one of the following options:
Sort — This option is available for attribute, measure, and hierarchical columns. It is not available for hierarchy levels. Displays options for sorting values. For information, see "Sorting Options Menu and Buttons".
Edit Formula — This option is available only for attribute columns and measure columns. Use this option to display the "Edit Column Formula dialog", where you can customize headings and edit the formula for the column, such as adding a Rank or Percentile function. For more information, see "Editing the Formula for a Column".
Column Properties or Hierarchy Level Properties — Use this option to display the "Column Properties dialog", where you can edit various format properties for the column or hierarchy level. For more information, see Chapter 7, "Formatting Analyses, Views, and Dashboard Pages."
Filter — This option is available only for attribute columns and measure columns. Use this option to display the "New Filter dialog", where you can create a filter for the attribute or measure column. For more information on filters, see Chapter 5, "Filtering and Selecting Data for Analyses."
Delete — This option is available for attribute, measure, and hierarchical columns. It is not available for hierarchy levels. Use this option to delete the column.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Combine results based on union, intersection, and difference operations — Use this button to combine columns from one or more subject areas using Set operations. The columns must have commonality in order to be combined.
Click the button to display the Select Subject Area menu, where you select a subject area that contains the data that you want to combine with the columns that you have already added. (The subject area can be the same as that from which you have already selected columns, or a different subject area.) The Set Operations area is displayed, where you can use the following components:
Result Columns and Criteria "subject area" links — Click these links to display the appropriate columns in this pane. For example, suppose that you have selected the District and Dollar columns from the Paint subject area. If you click Criteria "subject area", then the District and Dollar columns are shown so that you can perform tasks such as formatting those columns. If you have combined columns using Set operations, then click Result Columns to show those columns and perform tasks such as formatting them.
The result columns are those that are displayed in views after applying the set operation of the derived columns.
Union button — Displays the following options:
Union — Use this option to specify that only nonduplicate rows from all columns are to be returned.
Union All — Use this option to specify that rows from all columns, including duplicate rows, are to be returned.
Intersect — Use this option to specify that only rows common to all columns are to be returned.
Minus — Use this option to specify that only rows from the first column that are not in the second column are to be returned.
More options button — Click to cut, copy, or paste that subject area in the list of criteria.
Edit button — Click to display additional options for working with the subject areas:
Create New Criteria — Displays the Select Subject Area menu, where you select a subject area to add to the criteria.
Copy and Paste — Creates a duplicate set of criteria on which you can perform set operations.
Cut — Removes the current set of criteria from the pane.
Ungroup — If you have created a duplicate set of criteria, then this option is available to move the set of criteria to the next highest level.
For more information, see "Combining Columns Using Set Operations".
Remove all columns from criteria — Use this button to remove all columns that have been included in the Selected Columns pane. Be aware that there is no confirmation message and no undo available for this operation.
Use this pane to create and modify steps for selecting data. The steps in this pane apply to all views for the analysis. You do not have to display the editor for a particular view to edit its selection steps.
For more information, see "Working with Selections of Data".
This pane is part of the "Analysis editor: Criteria tab", the "Analysis editor: Results tab", and certain view editors. This pane is not visible on the Criteria tab until you click the toolbar button to display it. The contents of this pane are displayed slightly differently on the Criteria tab if a column selector view is in use. See "Editing Column Selector Views" for information.
Use to select the columns or measures to view in the pane. You can view all columns and measures, just measures, or specific columns.
Use to indicate the start of the list of steps for each column. For hierarchical columns, the name of the hierarchy is included with the column name. This area includes the following types of steps:
Start With — Serves as the starting selection for a column. This step is populated automatically when you select columns or hierarchy levels from a subject area.
For every column that you select, an implicit "Start with All Members" step is added for that column, where "All" implies all the members for the column after filters are applied.
For every hierarchy level that you select, an implicit "Start with all level-name" step is added for that level, where "All" implies all the members for the level after filters are applied. For example, if you select the Fiscal Quarter hierarchy level, then a step is created with a name such as "Start with All Fiscal Quarter".
Add — Adds the selected members to the selection.
Keep only — Keeps only the selected members and remove all others.
Remove — Removes the selected members from the selection.
Click this button to displays the "Save Selection Steps dialog" where you save the steps for the column or hierarchy level as a group. This button is available only when you have more than a single Start With step in the list for a column. This button is not available if you try to save a set of steps as a group and one of the steps includes a calculated item.
Click this link to display the following options:
Select Members — Displays the "New Select Members dialog" where you create a new step of the specified members.
Add Groups or Calculated Items — Displays a submenu with the following options:
Select Existing Groups and Calculated Items — Displays the "New Select Existing Groups and Calculated Items" where you select an existing group or calculated item.
New Group — Displays the "New Group dialog" where you add a new group.
New Calculated Item — Displays the "New Calculated Item dialog" where you add a new calculated item.
Apply a Condition — Displays the "New Condition Step dialog", where you create a new condition step.
Select Members Based on Hierarchy — Displays the "New Hierarchy Selection Step dialog", which is available for hierarchical columns only.
Name of Group or Calculated Item
Click the link for a group or calculated item to display one of the following dialogs: "Edit Group dialog" or "Edit Calculated Item dialog".
The selection step toolbar is the collection of buttons that displays when you hover over a selection step within the list of steps. It can include the following buttons:
Edit — Displays the dialog where you can edit the step. For a "Start with" step, this is the only button available.
Move Up — Moves this step one level up in the list of steps.
Move Down — Moves this step one level down in the list of steps.
Delete — Deletes this step from the list of steps.
Use this dialog to search for and select a user. For example, in a Scorecard, you use this dialog to select the user to assign as a business owner to Scorecard objects such as KPIs, initiatives, and strategy objectives. In an agent, you use this dialog to select the user whose credentials you want to use to send the delivery content.
For more information, see:
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this field to enter your search criteria. For example, enter the user's first name to display a list of users with that first name.
Use this button to display the accounts that satisfy the name search criteria that you entered.
Displays the list of accounts that satisfy the name search criteria that you entered. You can then select the name that you want.
Use this dialog to:
Define the score thresholds and assessment ranges to be used for scoring scorecard objects
Set up the controls for dimensions in the point of view area of a scorecard
For more information, see:
Use the "Settings dialog: Assessment Mappings tab" to define the score thresholds and assessment ranges to be used for scoring scorecard objects.
Use the "Settings dialog: Dimension Settings tab" to set up the controls for dimensions in the point of view area of a scorecard.
Use this tab of the "Settings dialog" to define the score thresholds and assessment ranges to be used for scoring scorecard objects.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter the numerical score (for example, 80) that divides each assessment range.
For example, you might add thresholds and assessment ranges which specify that, when a score falls between 0 and 33, the performance level is Critical, between 34 and 66, Warning, and between 67 and 100, OK.
Use this field to enter the name of each assessment range (for example, Acceptable).
Use this button to display the "Replace Icon dialog", where you select the icon to represent each assessment range.
Use this button to display the a color dialog, where you select the color to represent each assessment range.
Displays the following options:
Remove Range — Use this option to remove a score threshold and its corresponding assessment range.
Add Above — Use this option to add a score threshold and its corresponding assessment range above the current score threshold.
Add Below — Use this option to add a score threshold and its corresponding assessment range below the current score threshold.
Use this button to add a score threshold and assessment range below the last score threshold.
Use this tab of the "Settings dialog" to set up the controls for dimensions in the point of view area of a scorecard.
For more information, see:
Displays all the dimensions that are referenced by KPIs in a scorecard and shows their current settings. Use this area to set up the controls for the dimensions.
To set up the control for a dimension, select the dimension and then click the Edit Row button to display the "Edit Dimension Settings dialog".
Use this pane to set the thresholds that are to be displayed in a funnel graph or gauge.
Each threshold has a high and a low and is associated with a color in which the range identified by the threshold will be displayed in the gauge, such as green for acceptable, yellow for warning, and red for critical.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Results tab: Funnel editor" and the "Results tab: Gauge editor".
Use this box to specify whether the high values are the desirable goal. Selecting this box lists the statuses in order from the most desirable indicator (for example, Excellent) at the top to the least desirable indicator (for example, Warning) at the bottom.
Use this box to specify whether the low values are the desirable goal. Selecting this box lists the statuses in order from the least desirable indicator (for example, Warning) at the top to the most desirable indicator (for example, Excellent) at the bottom.
Use this list to specify the data values in a gauge that highlight a particular range of values. The values must be between the minimum and the maximum values set for the gauge limits. The range identified by a threshold is filled with a color that is different from the color of other ranges.
To specify a data value, you can either:
Enter a static value directly in a Threshold field.
Click the Threshold Options button to set the value based on a measure column, a variable expression, or the results of a SQL query.
Displays these options to set a threshold:
Measure column — Use this option to use the measure column.
Dynamic — Use this option to let the system determine the threshold value.
Custom Value — Use this option to enter a specific value.
If you select this option and then:
Click elsewhere on the pane without entering a value, the value of the Threshold field reverts to the previous value
Enter an invalid value in Threshold field, the value is cleared so that you can enter a new value
Variable Expression — Use this option to display the "Enter Expression dialog", where you specify a variable expression.
SQL Query — Use this option to display the "Enter Expression dialog", where you specify a SQL query.
Remove — Use this option to remove the threshold.
Add Above — Use this option to add a threshold row above the current row.
Add Below — Use this option to add a threshold row below the current row.
Use this list to specify the label for each range identified by a threshold as well as the color in which the range is to be displayed in the gauge. Use the Status Options button to specify a label and the Color button to specify a color for each range.
Displays the following options:
Threshold Values — Use this option to use the current threshold values as the label for the range. The Status box is disabled when you select this option.
Specify Label — Use this option use text that you specify as the label for the range, for example Excellent. After selecting this option, enter the text in the Status box.
Displays the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color for the range that is identified by the threshold.
First Stage x final stage target value
This field is available only for last-stage only funnel graphs.
Use this box to enter the factor required to meet the target. In a last-stage only funnel graph, the target value of all the stages before the last are calculated based on the last stage target value and this target factor.
Use this button to add a new threshold row.
Use this button to delete a threshold row.
Use this dialog to add or remove columns that display data such as the status, trend, target, and variance of KPIs on a KPI Watchlist, perspective, initiative, or objective. This enables you to customize the KPI data displayed by specifying visible columns.
For information about KPIs, see:
Displays all of the columns that you can select to present a wide variety of data for the KPIs that evaluate the initiative, as described in Table B-4.
To display additional columns to present more KPI data on the initiative, select the columns individually or as groups by pressing Shift or Ctrl, and then click Move. To display all KPI data available, click Move All.
Displays the columns that are currently visible. To remove columns, select them individually or in groups by pressing Shift or Ctrl, and click Remove. To remove all KPI data displayed, click Remove All.
Use this button to display a column that you select in the Available Columns pane.
Use this button to display all available columns.
Use this button to hide a column that you select in the Visible Columns pane.
Use this button to not display any KPI data on the initiative.
Table B-4 lists and describes the available KPI data columns.
Table B-4 Available KPI Data Columns
| Column | Description |
|---|---|
|
Change |
If you enabled trending, displays the amount by which the KPI's current actual value differs from the actual value of the previous period. For example, if the actual value of KPI for "Annual Number of Sales" is 2000 and was 1850 last year, the change is 150. |
|
% Change |
If you enabled trending, displays the percent by which the KPI's current actual value differs from the actual value of the previous period. For example, if the actual value of KPI for "Annual Number of Sales" is 2000 and was 1850 last year, the change percent is 7.5%. |
|
Data Type |
Displays the data type of the KPI values that are stored in the database, for example, integer or percentage. |
|
Formatting |
Displays the KPI's raw actual and target values in the formatting for the unit that quantifies the values, such as dollars or days. |
|
Label of Node |
Displays the KPI's descriptive name that was specified in the "Add KPI dialog". |
|
Last Run |
Displays the date on which KPI value calculations were performed by the backup server. |
|
Normalized |
Displays the KPI value after it was converted from its original scale (a value between 1 and 50, for example) to a standard scale (values between 1 and 100) so that you can compare it with other KPI values. For example, assume that you want to use a scale of 0-100 to assess two KPIs. The first KPI is expected to have a value between 0 and 10. It collects a value of 3. The second KPI is expected to have a value between 0 and 1000. It collects a value of 800. To evaluate this data as x% or 100, the Normalize feature converts the KPI values to one between 1 and 100. Accordingly, the first KPI is multiplied by 10 (30) and that of the second KPI is divided by 10 (80). |
|
Owner |
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the KPI. |
|
Status |
Indicates the performance level of the KPI determined by comparing its actual value with its target. If you own the KPI, you can right-click to override its status. |
|
Target |
Displays the KPI's desired value. |
|
Target (Unformatted) |
Displays the KPI's raw target value. For example a target value of 134500 dollars would be formatted as $134,500.00. |
|
Trend |
Indicates whether KPI performance has improved or declined, is good or bad, or has remained the same. The trend is determined by calculating the value by which the current actual value differs from that of the previous period. If you select a period of time for the time dimension using the Point of View bar on the global header, all KPIs are evaluated by that period, regardless of their trend period specified using the KPI editor. |
|
Value |
Displays the KPI's current value. |
|
Value (Unformatted) |
Displays the raw KPI value. For example a value of 450019 dollars would be formatted as $4,500.19. |
|
Variance |
Displays the value by which the KPI's actual value differs from its target value. For example if the actual value for a Net Profit KPI is 600,000 and its target is 650,000, then the variance is 50,000. |
|
% Variance |
Displays the percent by which the KPI's actual value differs from its target value. For example if the actual value for a Net Profit KPI is 600,000 and its target is 650,000, then the variance as a percent is 7.7% |
|
Weight |
If you evaluate initiative performance by assigning weights to individual KPIs, then this displays these individual weights. If you do not enter weights that add to 100% Oracle Scorecard and Strategy Management does it for you. The weight for each KPI is used with its normalized assessment value to determine the performance of the objective or initiative.The normalized assessment value is compared against the assessment ranges in the "Settings dialog: Assessment Mappings tab". The range that contains the normalized assessment value is found and that determines the objective's status. |
Use this page to sign in to Oracle Business Intelligence.
For more information, see:
Use this field to enter your user ID.
Use this field to enter your password.
Use this button to sign in to Oracle Business Intelligence with the credentials you have entered.
Use this box to select the language in which you want to display the user interface. The language that you choose overrides the language preference that you specified in the "My Account dialog: Preferences tab" for the current session, only. Note that changing the language for the current session does not change the locale for the session.
Use this dialog to override the status of an initiative, objective, or KPI for the current point of view. (For more information on the point of view, see "About the Point of View Area".)
For more information, see:
Use this box to select the new status that you want to apply.
Use this box to enter the reason for the override.
Displays any overrides that previously have been applied to the initiative, objective, or KPI for the current point of view.
To expand or collapse the History area, click the Expand All or Collapse All button.
Use this pane to create and manage the objectives that form your corporate strategy
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor".
Displays the objectives that have been defined for the scorecard and the KPIs that measure their progress and performance hierarchically. It also shows the statuses of objectives and KPIs using the appropriate colors and symbols that you specified for assessment mappings. For more information on assessment mappings, see "Defining Assessment Mappings for Scorecards".
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Create Objective — Use this button to display the "Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab", where you create a new objective as a child of the selected objective.
Open — Use this button to open the selected object for editing or viewing, depending on the current mode.
Delete — Use this button to delete the selected object, if you have the appropriate permission.
View Strategy Tree — Use this button to display the strategy tree for the selected object.
View Cause & Effect Map — Use this button to display the cause & effect map for the selected object.
Displays options for working with the object. The options vary depending on the object and whether Scorecard editor is in edit or read-only mode:
Open — Use this option to open the selected object for editing or viewing, depending on the current mode.
Create Objective — Use this option to display the "Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab", where you create a new objective as a child of the selected objective.
View Strategy Tree — Use this option to display the strategy tree for the selected object.
View Cause & Effect Map — Use this option to display the cause & effect map for the selected object.
Delete — Use this option to delete the selected object, if you have the appropriate permission.
Analyze — This option is available only when you select a KPI. Use this option to create an analysis based on the KPI. The analysis is automatically saved in the catalog in the My Folders/Drills folder.
Note:
Because the My Folders/Drills folder is used for temporary storage, the analysis may not persist after your Oracle Business Intelligence session ends. To preserve the analysis, copy it to another directory. For example, to preserve an analysis that you plan to use in a shared dashboard, copy it to a folder in /Shared Folders.Create Agent — This option is available only when you select a KPI. This option is available only when you select a KPI. Use this option to display the "Create New Agent dialog", where you create an agent from the KPI.
Contact Owner — Use this option to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the object.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Strategy Map tab" to specify supporting information for the strategy map.
For more information, see:
Displays the name of the strategy map.
Use this field to enter a description of the strategy map.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the strategy map. To specify the business owner, click the Set User button to display the "Business Owner dialog", where you can search for and select the business owner.
Use this table to view and manage the objectives and KPIs that are displayed in the strategy map.
Use the "Related Documents area" to view and manage documents that provide supporting information to the strategy map.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Strategy Map tab" to create a diagram that shows how objectives that have been defined for a scorecard and the KPIs that measure their progress are aligned by perspectives. It also shows cause and effect relationships between objectives.
For more information, see:
Use this area to drag and drop the objectives and KPIs that you want to show aligned by perspectives.
Each node (that is, the representation of an objective or KPI) on the diagram shows the status of the objective or KPI by displaying the icon and color that represents the assessment range. A KPI node also displays the actual value of the KPI and the percent variance from the target.
If a cause and effect relationship exists between two objectives, a line connects the two objectives to indicate the relationship.
To display options that allow you to work with a node, click the Options button (on the right side of the node) to display the "Node Options Menu".
To edit a causal linkage, right-click the linkage line and select Edit Causal Linkage. The "Causal Linkage dialog" is displayed.
To delete a causal linkage, right-click the linkage line and select Delete Causal Linkage.
To display additional performance data for the KPI, such as target value or variance, click the down arrow at the bottom center of the representation. To collapse this data, click the up arrow.
To zoom in and out of the diagram or to add a cause and effect relationship between two objectives, use the toolbar buttons on the "Scorecard editor: Strategy Map tab".
To work with comments (if any), click the Comment button in the upper-right corner of a node to display the "Status window", where you can read the comments that previously have been added, add another comment, or reply to a comment. See "About Comments".
To work with status overrides (if any), click the red asterisk in a node to display the "Status window", where you can view the overrides that previously have been applied or apply another override. See "About Status Overrides".
Use the "Legend pane" to view the legend for the strategy map.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Strategy Tree tab" to specify supporting information for the strategy tree.
For more information, see:
Displays the name of the strategy tree.
Use this field to enter a description of the strategy tree.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the strategy tree. To specify the business owner, click the Set User button to display the "Business Owner dialog", where you can search for and select the business owner.
Use this table to view and manage the objectives and KPIs that are displayed in the strategy tree.
Use the "Related Documents area" to view and manage documents that provide supporting information to the strategy tree.
Use this tab of the "Scorecard editor: Strategy Tree tab" to view an objective and its supporting child objectives and KPIs hierarchically in a tree diagram.
For more information, see:
Displays the tree diagram for an objective. Each node (that is, the representation of an objective or KPI) shows the status of the objective or KPI by displaying the icon and color that represents the assessment range. A KPI node also displays the actual value of the KPI and the percent variance from the target.
To display options that allow you to work with a node, click the Options button (on the right side of the node) to display the "Node Options Menu".
To display additional performance data for the KPI, such as target value or variance, click the down arrow at the bottom center of the node. To collapse this data, click the up arrow.
To expand or collapse a node, click the plus (+) or minus (-) icon beneath the node.
To zoom in and out of the diagram, use the toolbar buttons on the "Scorecard editor: Strategy Tree tab".
To work with comments (if any), click the Comment button in the upper-right corner of a node to display the "Status window", where you can read the comments that previously have been added, add another comment, or reply to a comment. See "About Comments".
To work with status overrides (if any), click the red asterisk in a node to display the "Status window", where you can view the overrides that previously have been applied or apply another override. See "About Status Overrides".
Displays an overhead view of the tree diagram. The white box focuses on the nodes that are currently in view in the diagram area.
If (and only if) all of the nodes do not fit in the content pane, you can drag the white box to scroll the diagram.
The Node Options menu is displayed from the Options button on a node (that is, a representation of an objective or KPI) in a view diagram. The options that are available depend on the type of view and can include the following:
Action Links — Displays the action links that are available for the current status of the objective or KPI. Click a link to execute the action.
Add Related Strategy Nodes — Use this option to add to the diagram objectives that are related to this objective (that is, are linked by cause or effect).
Remove From Diagram — Use this option to remove the objective or KPI from the diagram.
Drill Down — This option is available only for strategy trees. Use this option to move the focus on this node and expand the node to show its children.
Drill Up — This option is available only for strategy trees. Use this option to collapse the node and move the focus to the parent node.
Show Hidden Causes — This option is available only for cause & effect maps. Use this options to show any causes that were hidden on the diagram.
To show multiple hidden nodes at one time, click the Cause and Effect Map Preferences button on the cause & effect map toolbar to display the "Cause & Effect Map Preferences dialog: Hidden Nodes tab".
Hide — This option is available only for cause & effect maps. Use this option to hide the node on the diagram.
You might, for example, want to hide some nodes so that you can view only the nodes for which you are the business owner.
To hide multiple nodes at one time, click the Cause and Effect Map Preferences button on the cause & effect map toolbar to display the "Cause & Effect Map Preferences dialog: Hidden Nodes tab".
Open — Use this option to display the objective or KPI for editing or viewing, depending on the current mode.
Contact Owner — Use this option to display the "Contact Owner dialog", where you can contact the business owner of the objective or KPI.
Add Comment — Use this option to display the "New Comment dialog", where you add a comment to the objective or KPI.
Override Status — Use this option to display the "Status Override dialog", where you override the status of the objective or KPI.
Analyze — This option is available only for a KPI. Use this option to create an analysis based on the KPI. The analysis is automatically saved in the catalog in the My Folders/Drills folder.
Note:
Because the My Folders/Drills folder is used for temporary storage, the analysis may not persist after your Oracle Business Intelligence session ends. To preserve the analysis, copy it to another directory. For example, to preserve an analysis that you plan to use in a shared dashboard, copy it to a folder in /Shared Folders.Note:
The right-click menu of an objective or KPI also contains these options.Use this dialog to format the elements of a graph, such as bars and lines.
For more information, see:
Use the "Style and Conditional Formatting dialog: Style Formatting tab" to format a graph based on the position of graph elements.
Use the "Style and Conditional Formatting dialog: Conditional Formatting tab" to format a graph based conditions applied to columns.
Use this tab of the "Style and Conditional Formatting dialog" to format a graph based on conditions applied to columns.
For more information, see:
Displays tabs for each column to which you can add conditions. Click a column tab to display the conditions that are currently defined for the column. You can modify a condition using its Condition toolbar.
Use this button to add a condition. This button first displays a list of the columns to which you can apply conditional formatting and then, once you select a column, the "New Condition dialog", where you define the condition to add.
Use this button to delete all conditions on the current column tab.
The condition toolbar is the collection of components that displays to the right of a condition. It includes the following components:
Edit— Use this button to display the New Condition dialog, where you edit the condition.
Color — Use this box to display the Color Selector dialog, where you select the color to be applied to the column values that meet the condition.
Delete— Use this button to delete the condition.
Use this tab of the "Style and Conditional Formatting dialog" to format a graph based on the position of graph elements.
For more information, see:
Displays tabs for each graph element to which you can apply formatting. Click a column tab to display the positions that are currently formatted.
Displays the positions that have been formatted for the element.
To specify a color for a position, click the down arrow in color box to display the Color Selector dialog.
Note:
If you specify 0 for the width of a line, the legend marker changes from the default line marker to symbol markers for the line as well as for other lines in the graph (for example, the symbol markers are shown as the legend markers for all the lines in the graph).Use this button to add a new position entry to the Custom Formatted Positions table.
Use this button to remove the selected position entry in the Custom Formatted Positions table. To select an entry, click the first column in the entry row.
Use this pane to:
Select the columns and members to add to an analysis.
Select the column to use when you create or edit a named filter.
Add or remove subject areas that are related to the primary subject area that you have selected. You select a primary subject area when you create a new analysis or a new named filter. (Only related subject areas that you have permission to access are available for you to add.)
Refresh the columns that display in the subject area or refresh the subject area's metadata after the administrator made changes to the columns in the repository.
View the metadata dictionary information for a selected subject area, folder, column, or hierarchy level.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of all the tabs of the "Analysis editor" and part of the "Filter editor".
Displays the primary subject area and any related subject areas that you have added.
Use this tree to:
Expand and collapse a folder to show the folder's columns.
In addition, when the Subject Areas pane is displayed in the:
"Analysis editor: Criteria tab", you can expand a hierarchical column to show its levels.
"Analysis editor: Results tab", you can expand a column to show its members. (You cannot show its members in the Criteria tab.)
If tooltips have been configured in the Oracle BI Presentation Services Administration page, then you can hover over a column name and see its description.
Select the columns and members to add to an analysis. You can add a column or a member to an analysis in one of two ways:
Double-click the column to display it in the "Selected Columns pane" or the Results tab.
Drag and drop the column to the Selected Columns pane. You can press Ctrl+Click to select multiple values and drag and drop those values together.
You cannot select levels of a hierarchical column; you can select only the entire column.
Select the column to use when you create or edit a named filter. To do so, double-click the column to display the "New Filter dialog", where you create the filter based on the selected column.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Add/Remove Subject Areas — This button is available only if one or more related subject areas are available and you have permission to access them. Use this button to display the "Add/Remove Subject Areas dialog", from which you can add or remove related subject areas.
Refresh — Clicking this button executes the default behavior of Refresh Display. Clicking the arrow beside the button allows you to select one of the following options:
Refresh Display — Use this option to refresh the subject area view without refreshing the Oracle BI EE server cache. Use this option when the subject area does not contain the columns that you expect to see. If you use this option and the expected columns still do not display, then use the Reload Server Metadata option.
Reload Server Metadata — Use this option to reload the subject area's metadata when you know that the administrator has built new metadata in the repository or if after you use the Refresh Display option and the subject area display still does not contain the columns that you expect to see in the subject area. For example, if the administrator added a new measure column to the repository metadata, then you would not see it in the subject area until after you reloaded the metadata. The administrator cannot force a reload of the subject area's metadata. Reloading the metadata also refreshes the subject area's display.
Reloading metadata clears the metadata cache that is used by all users within the server instance, and after the metadata is reloaded, the metadata cache is re-built as user queries are run. This process of re-building the cache can slow system performance slightly.
View Metadata Dictionary — This button is available only when the Subject Areas pane is displayed in the Criteria tab or the Results tab of the Analysis editor and only if the administrator has configured for the display of metadata dictionary information. This button is not available if you select column values or members. Click this button to displays the metadata dictionary page for the selected subject area, folder, column, or hierarchy level.
For more information, see "Viewing Metadata Information from the Subject Areas Pane".
See "Columns in the Excluded Drop Target" for information on how adding columns to a view using the Subject Areas pane can place them in the Excluded drop target.
Use this pane to view summary information about the selected initiative, objective, or KPI.
For more information, see "Viewing Overview Information".
This pane is part of the "Scorecard editor: Overview tab".
This area displays summary information about the selected objective, initiative, or KPI. For more information on the specific information that is displayed, see:
This view is displayed in the "Summary View pane" when you select an initiative in the "Initiatives pane" or an objective in the "Strategy pane". Use this view to view basic settings for the selected initiative or objective (for example, status, business owner, and so on) as well as a status summary showing the number of KPIs and initiatives, or KPIs and objectives, that evaluate progress in each performance state.
Displays the score for the selected initiative or objective in a gauge.
For more information on scores, see "Understanding Initiative or Objective Performance Assessment".
Displays for the selected initiative or objective:
The number of its child initiatives or child objectives in each assessment range.
The number of its child KPIs in each assessment range.
If there is at least one child objective, initiative, or KPI for a particular status value, the status name is a hyperlink that drills to a dynamically created list of the child objectives, initiatives, and KPIs.
Displays for the selected initiative or objective:
The number of its descendant initiatives or objectives in each assessment range.
The number of its descendant KPIs in each assessment range.
If there is at least one descendant objective, initiative, or KPI for a particular status value, the status name is a hyperlink that drills to a dynamically created list of the descendant objectives, initiatives, and KPIs.
Displays the perspective with which the selected objective or initiative is associated. For example, an Improved Client Response Time objective might be associated with the Customer perspective.
For more information on perspectives, see "What Are Perspectives?"
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the selected initiative or objective.
Displays the rule that is used to assess the overall performance of the selected initiative or objective, for example, Worst Case or Weighted.
Go to this initiative or Go to this objective
Displays the "Scorecard editor: Initiative Details tab" or the "Scorecard editor: Objective Details tab") for the selected initiative or objective in the current mode (edit or view).
This view is displayed in the "Summary View pane" when you select a KPI in the "Initiatives pane" or "Strategy pane". Use this view to view basic KPI settings for the selected KPI as well as performance data.
Displays the score for the selected KPI in a gauge.
For more information on scores, see "Understanding Initiative or Objective Performance Assessment".
Displays the perspective with which the selected KPI is associated. For example, a Net Profit KPI might be associated with the Financial perspective.
For more information on perspectives, see "What Are Perspectives?"
Displays information that indicates how the performance of the selected KPI has changed since the last reporting period or a date that you specify.
Displays the userID of the person responsible for managing the selected KPI.
Displays the following performance data for the selected KPI:
Actual — Displays the current value of the KPI (for example, Product Sales).
Target — Displays the desired value of the KPI (for example, Product Sales + 1500).
Variance — Displays the amount by which the actual value differs from the target value. This partially determines the performance level of the KPI and indicates how realistic the target KPI value might be or if it needs to be adjusted.
% Variance — Displays the amount by which the actual value differs from the target value expressed as a percentage.
Change — If you enabled trending, displays the amount by which the current actual value differs from that of the previous period. For example, if an actual value for an "Annual Sales" KPI is 25000 but was 20000, the change is 5000.
% Change — If you enabled trending, this displays the change value as a percentage.
Displays a graph showing, for the selected KPI, the actual values over time, such as for financial quarter, according to their assessed performance. For example, if four performance states (critical, warning, good, and excellent) were defined, KPI values are displayed according to these mappings.
The graph will only show multiple time periods if trending was enabled in the KPI's definition.
Displays the "Scorecard editor: KPI Details tab" for the selected KPI in the current mode (edit or view).
Use this dialog to edit the properties of a table or pivot table.
For more information, see "Editing Table and Pivot Table Views".
Use the "Table Properties dialog: Style tab" to specify formatting preferences for tables and pivot tables.
Use the "Table Properties dialog: Write Back tab" to set up for users to modify values in columns in tables.
Use this tab of the "Table Properties dialog" to specify formatting preferences for tables and pivot tables.
For more information, see "Editing Table and Pivot Table Views".
This dialog is also displayed as:
Use this box to specify where the paging controls are displayed for the view. The paging controls include First 25 Rows and Next 25 Rows. You can select either the top or bottom of the view or you can select to hide the controls. For information on the paging control buttons, see "Results tab: Data View editor".
Use this field to enter the number of rows to display per page for the view. This setting affects the number of rows that are displayed with the First, Next, and Previous paging control buttons.
Display Column & Folder Headings
Use this box to specify whether to display headings for the columns and the view. You can select from the following:
Only column headings — Displays only the column headings, not the view headings.
As separate rows — Displays the column and view headings as individual rows in the view.
As Folder.Column — Displays the column names with the lowest-level folder name from the Subject Area. For example, suppose that you have a column called Color in the Products folder. With this option, the column heading displays as Products.Color, rather than simply Color.
As Folder.Column (where needed) — Displays the column names with the folder name from the Subject Area but only when the column names are not unique. This option is available only for tables.
Enable alternating row "green bar" styling
Use this box to specify whether to add green bar styling to the view. Green bar styling shows alternating rows or columns in a light green color. (Light green is the default color, which you can change.) Select this box to add green bar styling. Deselect it to omit green bar styling.
Use this box to select one of the following options for green bar styling for pivot tables:
Innermost Column — Applies green bar styling only to the column that is closest to the data.
All Columns — Applies green bar styling to all columns.
Use this box to indicate that all cells that span rows are repeated. For example, suppose that you have a table that has Year and Month values. When this box is not selected, Year is displayed once for Month values. When this box is selected, Year is repeated for all Month values. This box is available only for tables.
Use this button to display the "Edit Format dialog", where you add cosmetic formatting for the green bar styling of the view.
Listen to Master-Detail Events
Use this box to specify whether a table or pivot table is to act as a detail view in a master-detail relationship and listen for master-detail events, select this box and then specify the channel or channels in the Event Channels field.
For information on master-detail relationships, see "What is Master-Detail Linking of Views?"
This field is displayed only if you select the Listen to Master-Detail Events box.
Use this field to enter one or more channels on which the table or pivot table is to listen for master-detail events raised by one or more master views. The channel name is case sensitive and must match exactly the channel name specified in the master view. Separate channels with commas, for example, channel a, channel b.
The remaining components of this dialog are described in "Column Properties dialog: Style tab".
Use this tab of the "Table Properties dialog" to configure the view for users to modify values in columns.
For more information, see "Modifying Values and Performing Write Back" and "Column Properties dialog: Write Back tab".
Use this box to allow users to modify values in the view, if one or more columns in the analysis has been enabled for write back. Deselect the box to prevent write back on the view, even if one or more columns have been enabled for write back.
Use this field to enter the name of the template to employ for writing back values. The template includes SQL statements that write values back to the data source.
Use this box to enable the toggling of modes for writing to the view. Click the box to allow the view to be toggled from View mode to Edit mode so that users can write back values. Deselect the box to prevent the view from being toggled from View mode to Edit mode; rather, the view is always in Edit mode.
Use this field to enter the text to be displayed on the button that users click to apply the values that they have entered; that is, to write the values back to the data source. The default value for this button is Apply.
Use this field to enter the text to be displayed on the button that users click to clear the values that have just entered for write back. The default value for this button is Revert.
Use this field to enter the text to be displayed on the button that users click to indicate that they have finished entering values for write back. Any values that have not yet been written back to the data source are written back. The default value for this button is Done.
Use this list to select the position of the buttons on the view, such as Right or Left.
Use this pane to perform object-specific tasks. The tasks that you can perform depend on the object's type, the object's permissions, and your privileges.
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Catalog page".
Add to Briefing Book — Use to add the selected object to a briefing book. After you select this option, the "Save Briefing Book Content dialog" displays. For more information about briefing books, see "Working with Briefing Books".
Archive — Use to pack or bundle the contents of a a folder or multi-component object (a scorecard, for example) that you unpack in another directory. This enables you to transfer data between environments (development to test, for example).
Copy — Use to duplicate a folder or object and paste it in another directory.
Create Agent — (This option is available only when you select a KPI.) Use this option to display the "Create New Agent dialog", where you create an agent from the KPI.
Create Link — Use to display a folder or object if the directory in which it resides is very large, requiring scrolling. For example, to quickly access the components of a Sales and Marketing scorecard in a corporate directory that contains thirty scorecards, create a link to the Sales and Marketing scorecard.
Create Shortcut— Use to create a shortcut to the object or folder. When you create a shortcut, Oracle BI EE adds the shortcut to the current folder. You can then move this shortcut to another location within the catalog.
Delete — Use this button to remove a folder or object that you created from the catalog. If you delete shared folders or objects, other users who have added shared objects such as analyses to their Quick Answers list, or HTML content, links, analyses, and so on, to their personal dashboards will lose access.
Do not delete objects that are used throughout OBI (KPIs for example) until you are certain that they are no longer used or require
Disable — Use this option to temporarily disable an agent. See "Disabling and Enabling Agents' Schedules".
Edit — Use this button to modify objects using the associated Editor or Builder. For example, select a KPI and click this button to modify the KPI in the KPI Builder.
Enable — Use this option to cause an agent to run on schedule again. See "Disabling and Enabling Agents' Schedules".
Expand — Use this button to display the contents of a selected folder. For example, select a Dashboards folder and click this button to display all available dashboards. If you select a scorecard, all associated objects such as (mission statements, perspectives, objectives, and the Strategy Tree etc.) are displayed.
Execute — Use to run a script, URL, or web service action. See "Working with Actions".
Export — Use to save a report in PDF, Microsoft Excel, or MHTML format.
Open — Use to view an object or expand folder contents.
Permissions — Use to enable users to view folders and objects. To grant specific privileges that determine the tasks that users can perform with these objects, see Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition.
Print — Use to print the current page.
Properties — Use to view or modify the selected object's properties. When you select this option, the "Properties dialog" displays.
Rename — Use to change the name of a folder or object.
Subscribe — Use this option to subscribe to an agent that the owner has made available to you for subscription. See "Subscribing to Agents".
Unsubscribe — Use this option to unsubscribe from an agent to which you are currently subscribed. See "Unsubscribing from Agents".
Use this dialog to specify properties for a text object that you are adding to a dashboard page. If you have the appropriate privileges, then you can enter HTML tags into the object.
For more information, see "Adding Content to Dashboards".
Use these buttons to apply Bold, Italic, or Underline to characters in the text object.
Use this button to insert a line break between characters in the text object.
Use this option to work with HTML codes, as described in "Working with HTML Markup".
Use this field to enter the text that you want to include on the dashboard.
The name that you assign in the Dashboard editor is the name that will be used for the text object in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog.
You can reference variables in this field. For the syntax to use, see "What Is the Syntax for Referencing Variables?" For more information on variables, see "Using Variables".
Use this button to view how the text will be formatted on the dashboard in the Preview area box. If you make any changes, then you can click Preview again to see the results.
Use this dialog to find and specify how you want to upload the archive file to the Presentation Catalog. For more information, see "What is Archiving?"
Use this field to enter or browse for the name and location of the archive file. Archive files are named according to the following convention: <name of the presentation services folder>.catalog. For example, sales_dashboards.catalog.
Use to specify if and how to replace an existing folder or object with the same name. Note the following options:
All — Select this option to replace any existing folders or objects with the same names as folders or objects included in the archive file that you are uploading.
Old — Select this option to replace folders or objects except those folders or objects that already exist unless they are older than the source.
None — Select this option to add any new folders or objects, but preserve any existing folders or objects that already exist.
Force — Select this option to add and replace all folders or objects.
Use to specify how the folders or objects are assigned permissions via Access Control Lists (ACLs) when unarchived. Note the following options:
Inherit — Inherits the folder or object's permissions (ACL) from its new parent folder.
Preserve — Preserves the folder or object's permissions (ACL) as it was in the original, mapping accounts as necessary.
Create — Preserves the folder or object's permissions (ACL) as it was in the original, creating and mapping accounts as necessary.
See Oracle Fusion Middleware System Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition for information on ACL entries.
Use this pane to:
Add new views to an analysis
Add views that have been added to the analysis to compound layouts
Edit views added to an analysis
Remove views from the analysis
For more information, see:
This pane is part of the "Analysis editor: Results tab".
Displays the views that have been added to the analysis. For a list of available view types, see "What Types of Views Are Available?"
This toolbar contains the following buttons:
Add View — Use this button to add a view to a compound layout. First make the compound layout to which you want to add the view the current layout, in the Views List, select the view that you want to add, then click Add Views.
New View — Use this button to add a new view to the analysis. Click New View and then select the type of view that you want to add. You can edit and save the views, which is added to the Views List. You can then add it to a compound layout using the Add button.
Edit View — Use this button to edit a view. In the View List select the view that you want to edit, then click Edit View. The view's editor is displayed.
Duplicate View — Use this button to create a copy of the view that you have selected.
Remove View from Analysis — Use this button to remove a view from the analysis. In the Views List, select the view that you want to remove, then click Remove View from Analysis. The view is removed from the analysis as well as from any compound layout to which it had been added.